Home

Type 2250 Product Sheet

1. 8 1 6 Multi user Facility The analyzer can handle more than one user of the instrument Each user can have their own set of preferences templates and jobs and projects completely invisible to other users This can also be very useful in organising large measurement jobs or cases you can separate the cases completely from each other by handling each case as a separate user The transducers the calibration setup and the calibration histories of the transducers are common to all users as shown in the overview provided in Fig 8 7 Fig 8 7 Overview of Multi user Facility Instrument e Transducer Calibration History Calibration Setup H User 1 x User N Preferences Preferences Template Template Display Param Display Param Setup Setup BHEEEEE Project Project Template Template Meas Data Meas Data Annotations Annotations 040105 Tap Users or the plus icon then select Yes in the Multi User Enabled drop down to distinguish between different users The instrument when delivered has one default user called 2250 for Type 2250 or 2270 for Type 2270 You require Utility Software for Hand held Analyzers BZ 5503 included with the analyzer to set up new users on the instrument see Section section 7 1
2. A weighting filter B Back erase Pushbutton 0ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 5 48 Backlight ICON wissens 47 Bandwidth Parameters 192 Basic Principles when using the Analyzer Battery Charge Indicator cesses os Battery Pack iccisessciiscecossccsstisesecensersettsceeeosvessenoases Battery Pack QB 0061 eeen Battery power Status Icon 0 Bottom F for Special Leq Parameter Broadband Frequency Weighting Broadband VIEW eceeeeseceseceseeeeeseneesseeteneeeeaes Builtin OID vc enccvccieceteeteeneeicetevetecevevecteontersseenevoeers B weighting filter eee eee eeereeeneeeeaeeeee BZ 5503 Utility Software for Hand held Analyzers 40 BZ 7222 Sound Level Meter Software 1 38 BZ 7222 Sound Level Meter Software 38 BZ 7223 Frequency Analysis Software 1 39 101 BZ 7224 Logging Software 1 107 BZ 7224 Logging Software Module ceeeeeee 39 BZ 7225 Enhanced Logging Software 1 121 BZ 7225 Enhanced Logging Software Module 39 BZ 7226 Sound Recording Option 1 16 39 127 BZ 7227 Reverberation Time Software 1 40 137 BZ 7231 Tone Assessment Option 1 16 40 157 Cc Calculating the Level Difference Between One Band and the Adjacent Bands 00 159 Calibration kinri seare siistisi araras Acoustic Electrical HISOLY AEAEE ET Hand held Analyzers Types 2250 and 2270 User
3. Parameter Values Comment Printer Used None Select None if you don t have a printer connected to the analyzer MPS Select MPS for a Mobile Pro Spectrum thermal printer from AM TECH Select PCL for a printer accepting PCL PCL printer language Select PCL Inkjet for an inkjet printer PCL Inkjet accepting PCL language Select PCL Laser for a laser printer PCL Laser accepting PCL language See Chapter 8 for more details Top Margin 0 0 to 20 0 cm Use Top Margin to position the print on the paper Left Margin 0 0 to 20 0 cm Use Left Margin to position the print on the paper Width 1 0 to 15 0 cm Use Width to set the size of the print Height 1 4 to 20 0 cm Use Height to set the size of the print D 8 Modem DynDNS Settings Table D 8 Modem DynDNS Settings Parameter Values Comment Modem Disabled Auto Answer GPRS EDGE HSPA Dialup Set to Disabled if you don t have a modem connected or when you physically connect or disconnect the modem Set to Auto Answer if you have a analogue PSTN a GSM or a GPRS EDGE HSPA modem connected to the Compact Flash socket and you want to dial up the instrument for connection by using BZ 5503 Set to GPRS EDGE HSPA Dialup if you have a GPRS EDGE HSPA modem connected to the Compact Flash socket and you want the instrument to be connected to the Internet See Chapters 7 and 8 for more details APPENDIX D Preferences Parameter Values Comment Extra Init
4. Set the frequency for the last band of the middle frequency range of the assessment Default is 400 Hz The middle frequency range is from one band higher than the Low Freq Last Band parameter to the value of the Middle Freq Last Band parameter Note Only available if Tone Standard parameter is set to SO 1996 2 2007 214 Hand held Analyzers Types 2250 and 2270 User Manual Table A 23 Tone Assessment Parameters Parameter Values Comment Level Difference Low 0 1 to 100 0 dB Set the required level difference for detecting a tone in the low frequency range Default is 15 dB Note Only available if Tone Standard parameter is set to SO 1996 2 2007 Level Difference Middle 0 1 to 100 0 dB Set the required level difference for detecting a tone in the middle frequency range Default is 8 dB Note Only available if Tone Standard parameter is set to SO 1996 2 2007 Level Difference High 0 1 to 100 0 dB Set the required level difference for detecting a tone in the high frequency range Default is 5 dB Note Only available if Tone Standard parameter is set to SO 1996 2 2007 ISO 226 1987 Free field 1987 Diffuse field 2003 Free field The tone is checked against levels in other frequency bands using normal equal loudness level contours defined by ISO 226 Select here which version of the standard to use Note Only available if Tone Standard parameter is set to D
5. Edit Mode The Full tab at the bottom of the screen allows you to view the complete list of setup parameters while the Quick tab allows you to access the more frequently used parameters defined by yourself Press the Edit icon on top of the screen to enter Edit mode This mode allows you to copy parameters from the Full View to the Quick View simply by tapping on the parameters in the Full View and to remove parameters from the Quick View by tapping on the parameters in the Quick View When you have finished tap the Edit icon again to exit Edit mode Setup settings can be protected from accidental changes by tapping the padlock icon FR on the top of the screen This will also protect the template from being deleted or renamed When locking the template you get the option of password protecting the lock If you choose this then you enter a password see Fig 5 7 Fig 5 7 SETUP Password protecting a template myPassworg CHAPTER 5 Getting to Know Your Analyzer 53 The password must consist of minimum two characters and or digits Note the password is case sensitive To unlock the setup settings and template tap the padlock icon again If the lock is password protected you must enter the password Note It is important to remember the password the template cannot be unlocked without the password The only way of overwriting a locked template is to re install the software using BZ 5503 The default templates will be overw
6. APPENDIX C Instrument Parameters 229 Table C 2 Cont Transducer Setup parameters Parameter Values Comment Microphone Type 4189 If microphone is a known type then the rest 4190 of the parameters of the transducer are set 4191 automatically Sound Field Correction and 4193 Windscreen Correction are possible for known 4950 microphone types only 4952 0 Note Microphone Types 4952 and 4184 A 4952 90 can be used with 0 reference direction or 90 4184 A 0 reference direction 4184 A 90 For unknown microphone types set the rest Unknown of the parameters no corrections can be made for unknown types Note If you are unsure which microphone to use please refer to Overview of Type 2250 2270 Microphones which gives an overview of the microphones where they can be used and their specifications Nominal Sensitivity Double Set automatically for known type otherwise set the nominal sensitivity of the microphone in mV Pa Sensitivity Unit mV Pa Can only be mV Pa Polarization Voltage Yes Set to No if microphone is prepolarized No otherwise set to Yes for polarization voltage of 200 V Top Socket only Set automatically for known Microphone Type Free field Type Yes Set to Yes for Free field types otherwise set No to No Set automatically for known Microphone type Capacitance Double Insert capacitance of microphone in pF Set automatically for known Microphone type CCLD Yes Set to Yes
7. Broadband A A excl Peak Broadband Peak Exposure e Time Reference e Time Threshold Level APPENDIX B Measurement Parameters 225 Table B 3 Occupational Health Parameters Parameter Leng Lep a v E Dose ProjDose VPeaks LavRQ TWA TWA Dose Proj gt NNNdB RQ DoseRQ Criterion e e e e Level Peaks Over Level Exchange e 5 5 Rate for Lav Time S S Weighting for Lav B 6 Reverberation Time Measurement B 6 1 For Reverberation Time Software BZ 7227 The following parameters are measured or calculated at each position Decays e Reverberation Decays for each frequency band from Bottom Frequency to Top Fre quency based on sampling Lzeq spectra at 5 ms intervals Spectra e T30 Spectrum e T20 Spectrum e EDT Spectrum Single Number Values e T30 Wide Band RT Bottom Wide Band RT Top e T20 Wide Band RT Bottom Wide Band RT Top EDT Wide Band RT Bottom Wide Band RT Top The following parameters are calculated for the room as an average of all positions Decays e Ensemble Averaged Reverberation Decays for each frequency band from Bottom Fre quency to Top Frequency Spectra e T30 Spectrum e T20 Spectrum 226 Hand held Analyzers Types 2250 and 2270 User Manual e EDT Spectrum Single Number Values e T30 Wide Band RT Bottom
8. ccccecceeeeeeeteeeeeeeees Spectrum Parameters cccccceeeeeseeeeeeees Periodic Reports eceeeceeeeeeeeereeee Placing the Measurement Microphone Point ANd Shoot 2 Polarization Voltage eee eee eeeeeeeeeteeeeeneeeeeeees Polarization Voltage Parameter Post processing and Reporting Post processing Parameters Power Off ccceeceeeeeeeeteeeeeee Power Settings vs ssussaedia ee eentanienenit Power Settings Parameter essnee Power Settings Screen Power Supply Connected ICOn ccseeeeee Power on Pushbutton 0 ee eee cee eeeeeeneeeeeeeeaes Preamplifiel vee ccccvccencercesccneaecatenseoadascentcsuentenveeveeteestes Connecting asinine edhe sain cine Disconnecting PreferenGes noie ieee de eis adie Preferences SCre n cececceeeeceeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeees Preparing your Measurements Printer Setting Parameters Printer Settings eee Profile View aseeseen 112 114 124 ProjDoS okies sae naase i ae aaa aAa a NER 246 ProjDoseUQ Project Name e Project Template c sccscsssccosssesesteesssenseeeseeees 16 Enhanced LOgQing cccccesseseeeeeeseeeeeeneenees Frequency AnalySiS 0 c ccceseeeeeeseeeneeeneeeees Logging siner aaa a aE Sound Level Meter Project Template Bar ee eeeeeeceeeeeseteneenees Projects ien i a PSI ad iaie aat Pushbutton Usage sesesseseesiseserierrerrrrrerrrerrerinenes Pushbuttons N viga tiO Nainen i
9. 11 3 3 Editing Markers on Profiles To widen a marker 1 Tap and hold the stylus on the profile display at a position within the marker range 2 Drag the stylus left or right to the position where you want the marker to end 3 Remove the stylus from the display and a drop down menu appears 4 Select the marker you want to widen from the drop down menu To narrow a marker 1 Tap and hold the stylus on the profile display at the position inside the marker range where you want it to stop 2 Drag the stylus left or right to a position outside the marker range 3 Remove the stylus from the display and a drop down menu appears 4 Select Delete for the marker you want to narrow from the drop down menu The part where the marker overlaps the gap between the two cursors will be deleted To delete a marker 1 Tap and hold the stylus in the profile display at a position to the left of the marker you want to delete 2 Drag the stylus to a position to the right of the marker 3 Remove the stylus from the display and a drop down menu appears 4 Select Delete for the marker you want to delete from the drop down menu Note Sound markers cannot be edited Marking the whole sound marker or part of it and selecting Delete will delete the whole sound marker and sound recording 11 3 4 Annotate Sound Categories You can annotate the measurement on line with a spoken comment or a written note or Type 2270 only an image The annotation i
10. B 4 1 B 5 Hand held Analyzers Types 2250 and 2270 User Manual Logged 100 ms Measurement For Logging Software BZ 7224 and Enhanced Logging Software BZ 7225 The following Broadband parameters can be logged every 100 ms Laeg Instantaneous Measured Parameters available at any time Instantaneous Time weighted Sound Levels Sound Pressure Levels maximum time weighted sound levels once per second LXE SPL LXS SPL e Lxyspr LYKSPO LyYs SPL e LDyrsPo Peak Sound Levels maximum peak sound level once per second Lypeak 1s Voltage updated at approx 5 s intervals e Trig Input Voltage requires Trigger Input is set to Voltage for Monitoring Instantaneous Measured Spectra a These parameters require license for BZ 7223 and measurement of spectra APPENDIX B Measurement Parameters 223 B 5 1 Processed Parameters for Display Only If Statistics are available then Std Dev and 7 percentile levels can be calculated and dis played LXN1 or LXUNI to LXN7 or LXUN7 If spectral statistics are available then 7 percentile levels as spectra can be calculated and displayed LWUNI1 to LWUN7 If Lweq spectrum is available then NC NC Decisive Band NR NR Decisive Band RC RC Classification NCB NCB Classification can be calculated and displayed If Lweq 1 3 octave spectrum is available then Loudness and Loudness Level can be calcu lated and displayed B 5 2 Relationship Between Setup
11. Initial Calibration screen Hand held Analyzers Types 2250 and 2270 User Manual Standard Calibration 1 Stand away from loud sound sources that may interfere with the calibrator s signal 2 Switch on the analyzer by pressing 3 Tap the Main Menu icon Ei and select Calibration from the list of options The screen shown in Fig 4 1 will appear CALIBRATION 78 7 dB Te 0 x 50 70 90 110 130 150 16 03 2010 09 03 50 31 60 mV Pa Deviation from last 0 00 dB Details Remind d 21 33 09 This screen contains a bar graph showing the actual sound pressure level and three placeholders for displaying information about the last calibration 4 Following the first part of the instruction in the status field fit Sound Calibrator Type 4231 carefully onto the microphone of the hand held analyzer To avoid handling vibrations to disturbing the calibration rest the assembly in a roughly horizontal position on a table or other flat surface Ensure that the calibrator fits snugly on the microphone 5 Switch on the Calibrator Wait a few seconds the level to stabilise 6 Tap the __ Start button on the screen to start the calibration Note Detecting level appears on the screen as feedback 7 While the analyzer is searching for the calibration signal and the signal level is stabilis ing the traffic light indicates a short green flash every second When the level is stable the traffic light indicates
12. Tone Assessment Option BZ 7231 1 3 octave 15 1 Method General Tone Assessment Option BZ 7231 includes tone assessment according to selected methods The software module includes an FFT based as well as a 1 3 octave based method It allows assessment of tones on site The result of the tone assessment is the adjustment to be added to the Lagg as described in the relevant standards for calculating rating level BZ 7231 when used with BZ 7223 Frequency Analysis BZ 7224 Logging and BZ 7225 Enhanced logging allows you to e Assess tones in a measured 1 3 octave spectrum according to ISO 1996 2007 Annex D e Assess tones in a measured 1 3 octave spectrum according to Italian Law Ministero dell ambiente Decreto 16 marzo 1998 hereafter referred to as Italian Law BZ 7231 when used with BZ 7230 FFT Analysis Software allows you to e Assess tones in a measured FFT spectrum according to ISO 1996 2007 Annex C e Use the Generate tone at cursor feature to generate a pure tone on the headphone output of the Hand held Analyzer for comparison to the actual noise This section will focus on tone assessment based on the 1 3 octave method Please refer to User Manual BE 1778 FFT Analysis Software BZ 7230 and Tone Assessment Option BZ 7231 for use with Hand held Analyzers Types 2270 and 2250 for detailed information about tone assessment based on FFT spectra Tone Assessment Option BZ 7231
13. antton 12 5 63 250 ik 4k 20k 1 3 octave 5 0 dB The information shown in value panel can be changed by tapping in the field From the tone parameters the adjustment and the selected tone standard can be selected See Fig 15 10 Results from the tone assessment can also be found by tapping on the Broadband tab and browsing the Broadband view in a similar way 166 Hand held Analyzers Types 2250 and 2270 User Manual Fig 15 10 Changing the information shown in the value panel 15 6 Logging Software BZ 7224 Template The results from the tone assessment can be found in the spectrum view of the logging template Tone assessment is performed for each logging period as well as for the total measurement time see Fig 15 11 Fig 15 11 LOGGING Viewing results on the logging template Leq 1 25 kHz 94 3 dB Tone We 11 9dB 7 4d8 ab 140 102 12 5 63 4k k AC 250 1k Please find more information about setting up a logging measurement in Chapter 11 CHAPTER 15 Tone Assessment Option BZ 7231 1 3 octave Method 167 15 7 Enhanced Logging Software BZ 7225 Template The tone parameter can be shown for both the logging and the report periods in the spectrum view of the enhanced logging template see Fig 15 12 Fig 15 12 Viewing results on the enhanced logging template ENHANCED LOGGING li Ta Please find more information about setting up the enhanced logging in Chapter 12 15 8 St
14. 35 dB for T30 Measurement Time Automatic selection of measurement time for the decays based on the actual reverberation time of the room Maximum Measurement Time from 2 to 30 s Averaging EDT T20 and T30 measurements can be averaged arithmetic averaging or ensemble averaging EDT T20 and T30 Calculation From slope in evaluation range Slope Estimation Least squares approximation Quality Indicators Quality Indicators with status information like Overload Curvature in etc extensive list of Status information Quality Indicators are available on reverberation time spectra for each frequency band and as overall quality indicators for each measurement position and for the total project room Reverberation Time Range Max 50 s min 0 1 0 7 s depending on bandwidth and centre frequency Wide Band Reverberation Time The arithmetic average of the Reverberation Time within a selectable frequency range is calculated Measurement Displays OVERVIEW MAP Map of Source and Receiver positions with reverberation time readout for a selectable frequency band on each measurement position together with quality indicator Organisation of Source and Receiver Positions measure at all receiver positions for each source or measure in a number of positions 1 to 10 for each source Source and Receiver positions can be added moved or deleted OVERVIEW TABLE Table of measurement positions with reverberation time readout for select
15. 8 1 7 8 2 CHAPTER 8 Advanced Use of the Analyzer Tips and Tricks 73 Printer Settings You can make screen dumps on a printer connected to the analyzer using USB cable AO 0657 Use the Printer Settings to select your preferred printer When a printer has been selected under the Printer Used parameter then the Print Screen command in the Main Menu appears Use this command to print a screen dump of any screen on the analyzer The printer must either be an MPS type or accept the PCL printer language PCL Printer Control Language developed by Hewlett Packard see details on their Web site www hp com e MPS Mobile Pro Spectrum thermal printer from AM TECH see details on Web site www amteq co kr e PCL printers accepting PCL printer language e PCL Inkjet suitable for Inkjet printers and supports colour printing e PCL Laser suitable for Laser printers For the PCL printers you can use the Top and Left Margin parameters to position the print on the paper and use Width and Height parameters to set the size of the print Modem DynDNS Settings You can use the analyzer for monitoring in remote places and control it using Utility Software for Hand held Analyzers BZ 5503 via a telephone connection wired or wireless using suitable modems or via network connections See the overview of possibilities in section Table 7 1 in Chapter 7 When you connect via a modem or via a network connection you will see the co
16. Storage Settings Parameter Values Comment Auto naming of Projects Yes No Select Yes for automatically naming projects from the start date of the project as Year Month Date in the format YYMMDD e g 051112 as 2005 November 12th or No for using the name defined in the Project Name Prefix parameter Project Name Prefix Text string Prefix for automatically generated project name Maximum 8 characters 236 Hand held Analyzers Types 2250 and 2270 User Manual D 5 Headphone Settings Table D 5 Headphone Settings Parameter Values Comment Listen to signal No In addition to the commentary Input X weighted annotations you can listen to the Input C weighted input signal for monitoring Input Z weighted purposes Select one of the A weighted B weighted C weighted or Z weighted signals Note 1 The frequency weighting of the signal you listen to can be selected independently of the frequency weighting of the measurement the signal at the output socket and the signal used for sound recording Note 2 X frequency weighting A or B A requires that the Broadband excl Peak parameter is set to AC or AZ B requires that the Broadband excl Peak parameter is set to BC or BZ Automatic Gain Control On To ease identification of sound Off sources the gain can be automatically adjusted to keep the average level within a 40 dB range When playing back the recorded
17. Wide Band RT Top e T20 Wide Band RT Bottom Wide Band RT Top EDT Wide Band RT Bottom Wide Band RT Top Quality Indicators are given for each frequency band in each reverberation time spectrum and for each reverberation time spectrum Instantaneous Measured Parameters available at any time Instantaneous Time weighted Sound Levels Instantaneous Measured Spectra Lzp Appendix C 227 Instrument Parameters This appendix describes the parameters that are common to all users of the instrument C 1 Table C 1 Current Transducer Current Transducer parameters Parameter Values Comment Transducer Used i e connected to Top Socket Ch 1 for Type 2270 Name and serial number of transducer This parameter selects which transducer is connected to the Top Socket displayed in Setup Input Type 2250 or Setup Input Ch 1 Type 2270 and at the top of Transducers database Transducer Used i e connected to Top Socket Ch 2 for Type 2270 Name and serial number of transducer Type 2270 only This parameter selects which transducer is connected to the Top Socket Ch 2 displayed in Setup Input Ch 2 and at the top of Transducers database Transducer Used i e connected to Rear Socket Ch 1 for Type 2270 Name and serial number of transducer Type 2270 only This parameter selects which transducer is connected to the Top Socket Ch
18. ccceeeeeeeseeeeeeeeteeeseees 216 Sound Exposure Level Lag ceceseeeeeeees 216 Spectrum Parameters cccecceeeeeeteeeeeeeees 217 Statistics to Calculate Percentile Levels AS SOCIA ie minister 218 Total Parameter cccccccssseseeeeeesesssteeeeeeees 111 124 Touch Sereen nosis ar eds 94 Traffic Lightin sietinas 48 Transducer Database 0 cece eeeeeeeeeeees 31 Transducer Parameters cceeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeee 228 Transducer Setup seese 228 Transducers Screen sseeeeseeeeieeierrieirisrnsrenenens 44 Transferring Data to Your PC cccceeeeeeteeeteeeeees 61 triaxial LEMO COnneCtol c cccceeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeeeeee 7 Trigger INPUt csccsssccscesscsssseseseecnsessecsoseeesseeseeeeees Trigger Parameter eee eee eee Trigger Parameters Triggers Parameter ooo eee eee eeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeee Tripod Adaptor UA 1673 e eee cece eee ereeeeeeeeee 6 Tripod Extension Stem 12 Tripod Mounting Thread cece eee eeeeeeeeeee 5 Tripod UA 0587 Troubleshooting 0 0 eee ee eee eceee eee eeeeeeeeeeeneeeeaeenaees 92 Battery Pack icciicicesecccicaurecoetsrcccccceenieamivervecte 93 Recalibration of Battery Charge Indicator 93 Reset Options resuena errre 94 SD and CF Cards eeeeceseeceeseeeeseeeeeeeeeeereeeeeas 93 TOUCH SOP GMs cssicccsccsestccstesscieceosessstcintecedtvecsesieens 94 Turn Off Backlight eeceeeseeseeeeereeeeeneeeeeeneenteees 68 Turn O
19. e Template Explorer e Timer Setup In addition the Main Menu also allows you to perform the following actions e Lock Keys and Screen e Log Off Explorer The Explorer screen is accessed from the Main Menu or by tapping on the Project name and gives you access to the instrument s Data Project manager This allows you to view the overall project structure including job folders and projects and to view all the individual measure ments When you have finished tap E to return to the measurement screen You can tap any measurement file to view the saved measurement and if there are any voice text or image annotations attached these can be viewed by tapping the paperclip icon visible next to all measurement files with attachments When you have finished reading listening or viewing the attachments tap to return to the Explorer screen Setup The Setup screen is accessed from the Main Menu and gives you access to the various setup parameters such as frequency weightings control of the measurement bandwidth statistics and the type of input currently connected You can change these as required see section 5 4 6 The Full tab at the bottom of the screen allows you to view the complete list of setup parameters while the Quick tab allows you to access the more frequently used parameters defined by yourself When you have finished viewing or updating the parameters tap E to return to the measurement screen Changes made to th
20. weighting is determined by setting the parameter in Setup Frequency Weightings Broadband excl Peak The measured signal covers approx 120dB from approx 20 dB to 140dB with a Type 4189 or Type 4190 microphone of nominal sensitivity The output of the headphone socket covers approx 75 dB Use the gain settings for the measured signal to adjust the output level to suit the listening conditions If the signal has a very high dynamic range or the levels are unknown you can set Automatic Gain Control to On this will convert the 120 dB input range to 40 dB output range enabling you to hear signals of any level clearly Individual gain settings are provided for the commentary annotations and the measured signal Tap the gain parameter and use the keypad to enter a new setting Use to assign the new value for immediate response at the output or use the up down navigation keys to increment decrement the value Note 1 A 0 dB gain on the measurement signal means you get a V output for a 1 V input when the measured signal Automatic Gain Control is set to Off Note 2 While playing back an annotation you can use the up down navigation keys to increase decrease the gain of the annotation 72 Hand held Analyzers Types 2250 and 2270 User Manual Note 3 If you do not want to listen to the input signal then set the Listen to Signal parameter to No to economise on power
21. 15 3 CHAPTER 15 Tone Assessment Option BZ 7231 1 3 octave Method Fig 15 3 Setting Tone Assessment option on l Output Socket Signal Occupational Health Generator Tone Assessment Tone Assessment Quick From the Setup menu select either the SO 1996 2 2007 or the Italian Law DM 16 03 1998 method Fig 15 4 Setting the Tone Output Socket Signal Assessment method Occupational Health Generator Tone Assessment Tone Assessment Tone Standard Adjustment Low Freq Last Band Middle Freq Last Band 400 Hz Level Difference Low 15 0 dB Level Difference Middle 8 0 dB Level Difference High If you select the tone assessment method according to the ISO 1996 2 Annex D standard you can accept the default setup according to that standard You can then change the various tone parameters according to your needs apart from the ZSO 226 parameter which is greyed out and proceed directly to the measurement If you select the tone assessment method according to Italian Law i e you select DM 16 03 1998 then you have accepted the default setup for that standard and the only parameter you can change is the SO 226 parameter Select one of the diffuse or free field contour options available from the parameter drop down which appears when you tap the parameter For more details and for information on how to set up individual tone assessment parameters see the following section 161 162
22. 20 0 kHz 4952 Outdoor Free field 0 20 0 141 dB A 4 3 Hz 14 0 kHz 3 2 Hz 14 5 kHz Prepolarized or 90 and 6 3 Hz 14 0 kHz 5 6 Hz 14 5 kHz Diffuse field a From the typical total inherent noise level for the microphone and Type 2250 2270 to the overload limit for a sinusoidal signal at 1 kHz b Type 2250 2270 Extended Low Frequency set to On Detailed specifications for the analyzer together with the different microphones are availa ble Please contact your local Briiel amp Kj r representative if you need more information The analyzer has correction filters to optimise the frequency response of each microphone The relevant filter is automatically applied when you select the microphone for input be it via the top socket or the rear input socket Note for Microphone Type 4193 Microphone Type 4193 is delivered with the UC 0211 Adaptor Do not use UC 0211 togeth er with the analyzer The adaptor can be used together with other equipment to extend the low frequency range but when using Microphone Type 4193 together with the analyzer the correction filters are used to do the job This results in a better dynamic range specification Using the Adaptor together with the analyzer results in a corrupted low frequency response and a reduced sensitivity of approximately 16 dB 233 Appendix D Preferences This appendix describes the unique set of parameters that can be set for ea
23. 245 A weighting filter B weighting filter C weighting filter Criterion Level Decibel dB Glossary Frequency weighting corresponding approximately to the 40 dB equal loudness curve that is to say the human ear s response at low to medium sound levels It is by far the most commonly applied frequency weighting and is used for all levels of sound Frequency weighting corresponding approximately to the 70 dB equal loudness curve that is to say the human ear s response at medium sound levels Frequency weighting corresponding to the 100 dB equal loudness curve that is to say the human ear s response at fairly high sound levels Mainly used when assessing peak values of high sound pressure levels Criterion Level is the maximum averaged sound level allowed for an 8 hour period Used for calculation of Dose ProjDose DoseUQ and ProjDoseUQ where U F or S and Q 4 5 or 6 dB The measurement unit for expressing the relative intensity of sound A direct application of linear scales in Pa to the measurement of sound pressure leads to large and unwieldy numbers As the ear responds logarithmically rather than linearly to stimuli it is more practical to express acoustic parameters as a logarithmic ratio of the measured value to a reference value This logarithmic ratio is called a decibel or dB The advantage of using dB can be clearly seen in the below illustration Here the linear scale with its large numbe
24. A typical screen is shown in Fig 5 2 Fig 5 2 Typical screen when making a measurement Project Template ND LEVEL METER LAF DANNO ONY NONNI LAeq LCpeak LAF90 0 View area Measurement Mode Status field l 60 80 100 120 140 86 9 dB 131 2 dB 56 7 dB 103 7 dB Manual View tabs Shortcut bar with icons The main areas starting at the top of the screen are e Project Template e Status Field e View Area with View tabs e Shortcut Bar a Hand held Analyzers Types 2250 and 2270 User Manual Project Template Bar This bar displays the name of the Project Template which contains all the screen settings and measurement setup for the current project Tap the text to open the Template Explorer screen containing all the available templates If you make any changes to the setup in a template an will appear next to the template name to indicate that the new settings have not been saved Tap the Save icon H in the Template Explorer to save the settings in the current template Status Field The area just below the Project Template bar is called the Status field Depending on the template this field displays status information using up to three lines of text as follows First Line Path and name of the current project section 6 1 1 Tap it to open the Explorer To change the path navigate to the desired job path and tap the RA icon to save this path as the default measur
25. CPeaks gt 1400B cccceeceeceeeeeeeteeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaees 250 Numerics 1 1 or 1 3 octave Frequency Analysis 0 101 41484 A oes e cece ete e ee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeetetaeeeseeeees 172 177 Accept PUSNDUTION eee cece cee ccne sees eeeeeeeaeeeeees 5 Accredited Traceable Calibration Acoustic Calibration oo ceeeeseeeeeseeeeeeneeeeeeneeneeeees 27 Adaptor for Standard Tripod 6 Add Image to Current Measurement 0 44 Add Note to Current Measurement 44 Adding Comments on Profiles sat Adding Notes on Profiles 0 000 eee cece eeeeeeees Advanced use of the Analyzer Tips ANC NICKS te eccsssrecssctcrsccuacevaseedcecdsteanencrsvesetes 67 Alhambra Colour Scheme 68 Alternative Measurement Method 0 eee 12 Analyzer Assembling the Analyzer oo eee eeeeeeeeeees 11 Annotating a Project oo eee cece eeeeceneeeeeeaees 112 Annotating Projects and Positions in Reverberation Time Software a se 143 Annotating Sound Categories 117 ANnOtatiOnS esia diane 23 59 Inserting Annotations Using Explorer 0 60 Inserting Using Explorer 0 60 Viewing or Listening TO ou eee eee eeeeeeeeeees 59 Applications How to Update Upgrade Them 89 Arcade Colour Scheme Assembling your Analyzer ecceeeeeeceeeeseeeneeeees 3 Auxiliary Parameters in Reverberation Time Software 148 Averaging Time A weighting
26. Chapter 2 2 1 2 2 Assembling your Analyzer Introduction This chapter describes how to assemble and set up your analyzer It provides a brief description and an associated diagram showing the instrument components and the various input and output connections This enables you to start getting familiar with the instrument while assembling your system This is followed by an overview of the hardware components showing all the main configu rations of the instrument and its accessories Finally instructions are provided that explain how to assemble standard and optional hardware components used in your system Once you have followed the assembly instructions your hand held analyzer will be ready to make measurements Instrument Components An overview of the main Instrument components is provided in Fig 2 1 The descriptions that follow refer to those components 4 Hand held Analyzers Types 2250 and 2270 User Manual Fig 2 1 Instrument components 23 070131 1 Measurement Microphone A Briiel amp Kj r Prepolarized Free field 1 2 Microphone is used A robust and reliable microphone with a wide frequency range 2 Preamplifier Used to convert the high impedance output of the microphone to low impedance suitable for driving long extension cables 3 G Manual Event Pushbutton This allows you to manually indicate events during a measurement Using BZ 7222 and BZ 7223 software you can control
27. From typical noise floor to max level for a 1 kHz pure tone signal A weighted 16 6 to 140 dB Primary Indicator Range In accordance with IEC 60651 A weighted 23 5 dB to 122 3 dB Linearity Range In accordance with IEC 60804 A weighted 21 4 dB to 140 8 dB Linear Operating Range In accordance with IEC 61672 A weighted 1 kHz 24 8 dB to 139 7 dB Peak C Range In accordance with IEC 61672 1 kHz 42 3 dB to 142 7 dB SAMPLING FOR STATISTICS The Statistics can be based on either Lyp Lxg or Lxeq e Statistics Lypny 7 or Lxgn1 7 are based on sampling Lyf or Lys resp every 10 ms into 0 2 dB wide class es over 130 dB e Statistics Lxy1 7 are based on sampling Lxeq every second into 0 2 dB wide classes over 130 dB Full distribution saved with measurement The Std Dev Standard Deviation parameter is calculated from the statistics MEASUREMENT DISPLAYS SLM Measurement data displayed as numbers of various sizes and one quasi analogue bar Measured data are displayed as dB values housekeeping data as numbers in relevant format Instantaneous measurement Lyf is displayed as a quasi analogue bar MEASUREMENT CONTROL Manual Manually controlled single measurement Automatic Pre set measurement time from 1 s to 24 hours in 1 s steps Manual Controls Reset Start Pause Back erase Continue and Store the measurement manually Auto start A total of 10 timers allow set up of measurement start times up to a month in advance
28. SUANGArdS es cette oe coin ares acco ei teva ae Ee aac 11 Standby Mode 16 68 69 Star Navigation Concept eceeeeseeseereeteeeteeees 41 Start Duration Parameter cccceceseeteeetees 202 260 Hand held Analyzers Types 2250 and 2270 User Manual Start Level Parameter 0 cceccceeeeeeeeeeeteeeee Start Slope Parameter c ceccceseeseeeeeeteeeee Start Time Parameter cccccccsscccessseceesseesesseees Start Pause Pushbutton Statistics Parameter cccceeeeeeeteeeeteeeees Statistics to Calculate Percentile Levels 217 220 Status Codes Tone Assessment eccceeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeeeeneeeees 167 Statuis Fieldizs oeaan naani 46 113 Status Field in Reverberation Time Software 144 Status Indicator oo ee ee eee eeeeeceee eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeenaeeees 5 Stop Duration Parameter 203 Stop Level Parameter ccccesseeceeeeeseeeeteeeee 202 Stop Time Parameter 202 Stopped ICON icsi ieie iaia ni 46 Storage Settings Parameter 0 70 235 236 Storage Settings Screen Store Pushbutton Storing the Instrument Sls anene a ite ani ata bate eaten Stylus USAGE 00 eeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeteeeeaeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeas Switching Off ae Switching Onis saves na aa A R Na IAA TERR Synchronize with Clock Parameter 0 06 201 T Tables in Reverberation Time Software 145 Topea
29. This is to ensure that the accessories have limited acoustical influence on the instrument during measurement All the components described below are shown in Fig 2 1 and Fig 2 3 CHAPTER 2 Assembling your Analyzer 13 Mounting the Outdoor Microphone Kit For longer term outdoor measurements an Outdoor Microphone Kit UA 1404 will be required as an alternative to the windscreen If this is the case mount the kit onto the microphone and preamplifier combination according to assembly and mounting instructions in the User Manual for the Outdoor Microphone Kit BE 1077 Connecting a Microphone Extension Cable The optional extension cables that are recommended for use with Type 2250 2270 are e AO 0697 D 030 3 m long e AQ 0697 D 100 10 m long Note Connecting a recommended microphone extension cable has no acoustical effect on the hand held analyzer s measurement and has no effect on the instrument s calibration However although it is not essential to re calibrate it is good measurement practice to calibrate the whole measurement chain including microphone extension cable before starting a measurement Decide which cable you require and assemble as follows 1 Gently screw the microphone onto Preamplifier ZC 0032 see items 1 and 2 in Fig 2 1 2 Insert the preamplifier into the female plug of the extension cable and push gently until it snaps into position 3 Insert the male plug of the extension cable into the top s
30. completion of measurement The noise generator is turned on and off automatically Escape Time 0 to 60s Build up Time 1 to 10 s Number of Decays per Measurement 1 to 100 ensemble averaged into one decay The generator can be turned on and off manually for checking equipment and sound levels Impulse Excitation Manual start of first measurement When level say from starter pistol exceeds the user selected trigger level the decay is recorded and backwards integration performed Schroeder method The trigger can then be armed automatically for measuring at the next position Sound Recording Recording of the Z weighted measured signal can be done at each position Sound Recording requires a CF or SD Card for data storage Sound Recording requires license for Sound Recording Option BZ 7226 Measurement Status On Screen Information such as overload awaiting trigger and running paused are displayed on screen as icons Traffic Light Red yellow and green LEDs show measurement status and instantaneous overload as follows e Yellow LED flashing every 5 s stopped ready to measure Green LED flashing slowly awaiting trigger or cali bration signal e Green LED on constantly measuring Yellow LED flashing slowly paused measurement not stored e Red LED flashing quickly intermittent overload calibration failed Calibration Initial calibration is stored for comparison with later calibrations Acoust
31. e Select Auto Zoom to adjust the range of the Y axis for best fit of the measured spectrum e Select Zoom In Zoom Out to adjust the zoom e Select Scale Up Scale Down to adjust the full scale value on the Y axis or select Auto Scale to select the best scaling for viewing the spectra without adjusting the zoom e Auto Zoom and Auto Scale automatically close the drop down menu otherwise select Close tap outside the drop down list or use the left arrow pushbutton to close the menu 11 3 2 Marking Sound Categories Use this facility to categorise the sound while you are measuring or while you are observing the different kinds of sound on the display This will make it much easier to do the post processing and reporting back in the office You can mark up to five sound categories on line The markers are displayed as horizontal lines above the sound profile see Fig 11 3 There are two main types of marker e An Exclude Marker this allows you to mark a sound you want to exclude from your measurement later during post processing or reporting It does not remove any data from your measurement e An Event Marker this allows you to mark a particular sound of interest during your measurement 116 Hand held Analyzers Types 2250 and 2270 User Manual On the analyzer Marker 1 is used as an Exclude Marker while Markers 2 to 5 are used as Event Markers All four event markers can be user defined You can define a marker by t
32. expected working time may be read out in and in time Battery Fuel Gauge The battery is equipped with a built in fuel gauge which continuously measures and stores the actual battery capacity in the battery unit Charge Time In instrument typically 10 hours from empty at ambient temperatures below 30 C To protect the battery charging will be terminated completely at ambient temperatures above 40 C At 30 to 40 C charging time will be prolonged With external charger ZG 0444 optional accessory typically 5 hours Note It is not recommended to charge the battery at temperatures below 0 C 32 F or over 50 C 122 F Doing this will reduce battery lifetime CLOCK Back up battery powered clock Drift lt 0 45 s per 24 hour period WARM UP TIME From Power Off lt 2 minutes From Standby lt 10 seconds for prepolarized microphones TEMPERATURE IEC 60068 2 1 amp IEC 60068 2 2 Environmental Testing Cold and Dry Heat CHAPTER 16 Specifications 171 Operating Temperature 10 to 50 C 14 to 122 F lt 0 1 dB Storage Temperature 25 to 70 C 13 to 158 F HUMIDITY IEC 60068 2 78 Damp Heat 90 RH non condensing at 40 C 104 F Effect of Humidity lt 0 1 dB for 0 lt RH lt 90 at 40 C 104 F and 1 kHz MECHANICAL Environmental Protection IP44 Non operating IEC 60068 2 6 Vibration 0 3 mm 20 m s2 10 500 Hz IEC 60068 2 27 Shock 1000 m s IEC 60068 2 29 Bump 4000 bumps at
33. or you simply tap the job icon to the left of the job name You can move a job project and its content to another job by tapping the job name project name and selecting Cut from the dropdown list Then navigate to the job you want as the new holder of the moved job project and tap the Paste icon cS or navigate to the level above and tap the job name and select paste from the dropdown list In order to copy a job project do as described above but use Copy instead of Cut from the dropdown list Select Delete from the dropdown list in order to delete the job project and all of its contents You can select more than one job project for copy cut or delete by tapping and holding the stylus on a job project name and then dragging the stylus up or down to select other jobs projects 6 2 Selecting Default Measurement Job Path Tap the ia icon to select the current job as the default measurement job where all projects will be saved when you press the Save Y pushbutton The job name followed by the current project name will appear in the topmost line in the status area to confirm which job you have selected 6 3 Recalling Measurements You can recall your measurement results in one of two ways e To display the measured results and calibration details only use the results viewer this can be done during an ongoing measurement and is a convenient way of browsing several sets of measurement data see below e To re use setups from p
34. 12 3 2 Displaying Noise Indicators The Ly and Ly parameters are displayed in the Broadband View when selecting Total in the Result Selector Then select the Noise Indicators from the Leq parameter group See Fig 12 2 Fig 12 2 Noise Indicators 80 0 dB 20 40 6 D a0 Lden 60 1 B 62 2 dB 58 3 dB 54 0 dB 59 3 dB 10 11 2005 11 35 02 Spectrum 12 3 3 Saving and Recalling Results Measurements are saved and can be viewed later in the same way as described for the Sound Level Meter Project in Chapter 3 and Chapter 6 Note The viewer only displays the results as one set of data per logging interval you can browse through all data To display the data as a Profile and see or hear annotations or even edit the markers or insert new markers and annotations you must Open the saved project instead of Viewing it 126 Hand held Analyzers Types 2250 and 2270 User Manual Chapter 13 13 1 13 1 1 Sound Recording Optional Module Sound Recording Option BZ 7226 allows you to record sound during measurement The sound recording can be controlled manually or by using an external trigger signal The recording can also be triggered when a measured parameter exceeds a preset level BZ 7224 and BZ 7225 only The recorded sound can be played back and listened to using the supplied earphones HT 0015 Sound is recorded directly to CF or SD memory cards The main benefit is that data is documented on site and is t
35. 12 Image Settings Type 2270 only eee eeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeaeeeeaeeteaeeseseeeeeneeeeaeeeaes 244 APPENDIX E GOSS AY Seco eect eet eee 245 Chapter 1 1 1 1 2 1 2 1 Introduction Welcome This user manual describes the Type 2250 Hand held Analyzer and the Type 2270 Hand held Analyzer platforms including Sound Level Meter Software BZ 7222 Frequency Analysis Software BZ 7223 Logging Software BZ 7224 Enhanced Logging Software BZ 7225 Sound Recording Option BZ 7226 Reverberation Time Software BZ 7227 and Tone Assessment Option BZ 7231 The manual explains how to perform a basic sound measurement which parameters you can measure and how the instrument should be operated In addition some practical hints and guidelines are provided including all relevant technical specifications Finally a glossary is added to help with specific terminology found in this manual How to Use this Manual Conventions Used in this Manual Analyzer refers to Type 2250 or Type 2270 if the description is valid for both types Instructions and descriptions that refer to the analyzer pushbuttons are shown with the pushbutton icons as seen on the instrument See Chapter 2 for a list of pushbutton icons and their functions Menu items and buttons tabs used on the screen Indicated by bold type face for example select Calibration from the list of options Parameter Text Appearing on the Screen Parameters instructions and descripti
36. 12 Logged Broadband parameters Parameter Values Comment Full Statistics Yes Determines whether the full broadband No statistics are logged or not Broadband Parameters All Determines whether all broadband Selected parameters are logged or a selected part is logged up to 10 parameters 198 Hand held Analyzers Types 2250 and 2270 User Manual Table A 12 Logged Broadband parameters Parameter Values Comment Parameter 1 to LXeq This parameter can be set if Broadband Parameter 10 LYeq Parameters Selected Lceq LAeq Lye X frequency weightings A or B controlled Lyg by Setup Frequency Weightings LVpeak Broadband excl Peak parameter LxFmax Lysmax Y frequency weightings C or Z controlled Lyimax by Setup Frequency Weightings hyFmax Broadband excl Peak parameter Lysmax Lyimax V frequency weightings A B C or Z LXFmin controlled by Setup Frequency Weightings Lysmin Broadband Peak parameter LXImin LyEmin U time weightings F or S controlled by Lysmin Setup Occupational Health Time Ly lmin Weighting for Lav parameter Lxieq Ly leg Q exchange rate 4 5 or 6 dB controlled Laleq LAeq by Setup Occupational Health Exchange LaFTeq Rate for Lav parameter LarteqLAeq LavuQ W frequency weightings A B C or Z SIL controlled by Setup Frequency Weightings PSIL Spectrum parameter SIL3 LWeq f1 f2 f1 Bottom frequency band controlled b
37. 4 Set Increment to Sources First Receivers First or Manual Typically Sources First is best for Impulsive excitation you can then walk between the source positions and generate the impulses while Type 2250 2270 is placed on a tripod at one receiver position Receivers First is best for Interrupted Noise excitation you can move Type 2250 2270 between the receiver positions while the sound source remains in the same place The Overview tab will then look like Fig 14 10 Fig 14 10 REVERBERATION TIME Overview tab showing CF Card NT Project 010 one source and one l receiver position Spectrum Decay 16 56 24 Note the Add Source Ei and Add Receiver Gi icons on the headline for the map Tap Ei to add new sources and tap Gi to add new receivers on the map CHAPTER 14 Reverberation Time Software Optional Module Fig 14 11 REVERBERATION TIME Overview tab showing two sources and three receiver positions mF T30 lt 1 25 kHz gt You can move the sources or receivers on the map by tapping on the source receiver see Fig 14 12 select Move from the drop down menu that appears then tap at the position where you want the source receiver see Fig 14 13 Fig 14 12 REVERBERATION TIME Tap a source to geta drop down with options mF T30 lt 1 25 kHz gt Decay 17 11 19 152 Hand held Analyzers Types 2250 and 2270 User Manual Fig 14 13 Sources and receivers moved to places on the map
38. 400 m s WEIGHT AND DIMENSIONS 650 g 23 oz including rechargeable battery 300 x 93 x 50 mm 11 8 x 3 7 x 1 9 including preamplifier and microphone USERS Multi user concept with login Users can have their own settings with jobs and projects totally independent of other users PREFERENCES Date Time and Number formats can be specified per user LANGUAGE User Interface in Catalan Chinese People s Republic of China Chinese Taiwan Croatian Czech Danish English Flemish French German Hungarian Japanese Italian Korean Polish Portuguese Romanian Serbian Slovenian Spanish Swedish and Turkish HELP Concise context sensitive help in Chinese People s Republic of China English French German Italian Japanese Korean Polish Portuguese Romanian Serbian Slovenian and Spanish UPDATE OF SOFTWARE Update to any version using BZ 5503 through USB or update to SW21 latest version through Internet WEB PAGE Connect to the instrument using an Internet Browser supporting Java scripts The connection is password protected Two levels of protection e Guest level for viewing only e Administrator level for viewing and full control of the instrument Hand held Analyzers Types 2250 and 2270 User Manual Software Specifications Sound Level Meter Software BZ 7222 Conforms with the following National and International Standards e IEC 61672 1 2002 05 Class 1 e IEC 60651 1979 plus A
39. Air Conditioning Engineers Balanced Noise Criteria is a refinement of NC The rating is determined by the SIL value and gets the Classification R for Rumble if the spectrum is rich in low frequency sound 16 Hz to 500 Hz the Classification H for Hiss if the spectrum is rich in high frequency sound 1 kHz to 8 kHz or the Classification RV for Vibration and Rattle if the spectrum at low frequencies 16 Hz to 63 Hz is likely to produce audible rattling in lightweight building elements The details of the NCB rating are defined in ANSI S12 2 1995 Noise Rating rates noise levels at public or private indoor areas The rating is determined from 1 1 octave Lzeq spectra compared with NR curves based on equal loudness curves The NR rating is the value of the highest NR curve touched by the measured spectrum The Decisive Band is the frequency band touching the NR curve Defined in ISO R1996 1971 Occupational Health Standards APPENDIX E Glossary Typical Setup Parameter settings for Occupational Health measurements in accordance with various standards e OSHA Occupational Safety and Health Administration 29 CFR 1910 95 e MSHA Mine Safety and Health Administration 30 CFR 62 0 UMHRPEL e DOD Department of Defence DoD Instruction 6055 12 e ACGIH American Conference of Government Industrial Hygienists DHHS Pub 98 126 ISO UK Noise at Work Regulations SI 1989 1790 amended by SI 1992 2
40. Decisive Band ccccccccssccecsssecessseceesseeseesees 250 NC Decisive Band Parameter cccccccsscceeseees 223 NG P r meter seein verinen shares 223 NCB Parameter cccccccsscccsssseceessseeessseseesseeeeeseees 223 Network Settings fe ParaMeters ini saveeedesecctsvacdestacnaievessesteccestasnaeee 78 New Applications How to Install ThEM ccccecseeceeesessseeeeeeeeeees Next Calibration Date ccccccccscccsseceesseeeessseeeees Night Colour Scheme sses No Windscreen Fitted Diffuse Field Icon No Windscreen Fitted Free field Icon Noise Guiviesic acFask Aveoctenta ce craic Noise Dose Dose DoSeS5 0 0 eceeceeeereeeeeneenrees Noise Indicators Adding on Profiles vs Adding to Current Measurement 0 ee Notes Screens eninin iriiria paie Notification settings NR Decisive Band NR Decisive Band Parameter ccccccssssseeees NR Parameter ninini aea Number Keyboard Number of Decimal Places k Number of Peaks CPeaks gt 140 dB neeese O Occupational Health Parameters 0 ce 208 Occupational Health Standards eeeee 251 On screen Feedback cecesseeseseeceeeeeeeeetereeeaees Operating Mode ses essenin ienie Ordering Information sseni Organising Measurements Outdoor Colour Scheme Outdoor Microphone Kit MOUN nsira aaa 13 Output Socket Asscuenii genni etwu
41. ICES 001 EMC Immunity requirements EN IEC 61000 6 2 Generic standard Immunity for industrial environments EN IEC 61326 Electrical equipment for measurement control and laboratory use EMC IEC 61672 1 IEC 61260 IEC 60651 and IEC 60804 Instrumentation standards 184 Hand held Analyzers Types 2250 and 2270 User Manual 185 Appendix A Setup Parameters This appendix describes all the setup parameters included in a template A 1 Input for Type 2250 Table A 1 Input parameters Type 2250 Parameter Values Comment Input Top Socket Determines whether the input is taken from the Rear Socket top socket or the rear socket Input on connector panel Connect your transducer to this socket Note Sound Field and Windscreen corrections can be added to both the Top Socket and the Rear Socket Input parameters However be careful that you don t add a double correction for instance if you have recorded the signal from the Output socket on a tape recorder and later want to re analyse the recording via the Rear Input In this case you should set Microphone Type to Unknown on the Transducer menu for the used transducer when using Rear Input Sound Field Correction Free field Select a correction matching the sound field of Diffuse field your measurements i e you can make correct measurements in a diffuse field using a Type 4189 or Type 4190 free field microphone by sel
42. IP address when connected to the network However typically the IP address will be renewed each time the analyzer connects to the network In order to deal with this in BZ 5503 or an Internet Browser you need to use DynDNS see Section section 8 2 3 Compact Flash Modems Compact flash modems can be inserted directly in the compact flash socket of the analyzer see item 9 in Fig section 2 2 The following modem has been tested e Compact GPRS from Pretec see details on Web site www pretec com Modems with RS 232 Serial Interfaces Modems with an RS 232 serial interface can be connected using a Compact Flash to Serial converter inserted in the compact flash slot of the analyzer Switch off the analyzer when connecting a serial I O CF Card and modem to the analyzer The following Compact Flash to Serial converter has been tested e Serial I O CF Card Ruggedized from Socket see details on Web site www socketmobile com The following modems have been tested e FASTRACK Supreme 10 and 20 GSM GPRS EDGE Modem from Wavecom e Airlink Fastrack Xtend GPRS EDGE and HSPA from Sierra Wireless see details on Web site www sierrawireless com Modems with USB Interface Modem to USB interface is currently not supported DynDNS If the analyzer is connected to e the Internet through a GPRS EDGE HSPA modem or e a local network with access to the Internet through a DSL modem router 8 3 CHAPTER 8 Advanced Use of the A
43. Input Ch 1 parameters Type 2270 Parameter Values Comment Sound Field Correction Free field Diffuse field Select a correction matching the sound field of your measurements i e you can make correct measurements in a diffuse field using a Type 4189 or 4190 free field microphone by selecting Diffuse field correction Even free field correction of a free field microphone will enhance the overall frequency response of the system Generally ISO requires free field conditions and ANSI requires diffuse field conditions Check your local standards for the setting you require No correction is made for unknown transducers Windscreen Auto Detect On Off Automatic detection of UA 1650 windscreen when mounted on the ZC 0032 microphone preamplifier The preamplifier should be connected to the top socket if necessary using a microphone extension cable This parameter is available for microphone types using ZC 0032 only Windscreen Correction None UA 1650 UA 1404 If Windscreen Auto Detect is set to Off you can manually select a windscreen correction suitable for the windscreen in use Correction is automatically made for the windscreen on Types 4952 and 4184 A No correction is made for unknown transducers A 4 Input Ch 2 for Type 2270 Table A 5 Input Ch 2 parameters Type 2270 Parameter Values Comment Input Top Socket Rear Socket Determines whether the inp
44. Logging Interval 221 Parameters to be Logged and Displayed on Spectrum Display 221 Sound Exposure Level cccceseeeseeeeeeeeeees Special Parameters Logged Spectrum Parameters Logging asenti airi iai dake wel Logging and Enhanced Logging Software 129 Logging Period Parameter ccceccesesceeeeeeeee 194 Logging Project Template ceeeeeeeeeseeeteeees 16 Logging Software BZ 7224 107 Logging Software BZ 7224 Template 166 Logging Software Module BZ 7224 s sssssseesnneeeeen 39 LOUCNESS nisione 105 186 188 250 Loudness Level Loudness Parametel cccccsseececeeessssteeeee 186 188 Loudspeaker ICON c cccccseccscseccestentenetscsosceadeecsseeassee 23 Low Frequency Parameter c ceeeeeeeeeeeeees 187 Low Frequency Range ccceeeeeeesseeseeeneeeeeees 159 Lweq 220 221 223 Lweglf1 f2 sssssssssiisssssisssssnisssniressnnnnssns 198 220 221 LWUN1 Parametel ccccceceeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeneeeeeeee 223 LWUN7 Parameter Lyeg f1 2 2 LXN1 Parameter cccccccccceeccsssseeeeeesesssseeeeeeeeeeees LXN7 Parameter cccccccccceescsssseeeeeeeesssteeeeeeeeeees LXUN1 Parameter LXUN7 Parameter Lye Pee eee eee ree EE T E M Main Menu ICON ccccccccceeesessseeeeeeessssteeeeeeeeess 5 47 Making a Measurement sseesseeersesreerierrerrerrerrnrne 16 Making Good Measurements 11 Making your First
45. Lyp output every ms as a DC voltage between 0 V and 4 V DC output for calibration purposes 0 dB 0 V and 200 dB 4V Headphone Signal Input signal can be monitored using this socket with headphones earphones Gain Adjustment 60 dB to 60 dB VOICE ANNOTATIONS Voice annotations can be attached to measurements so that verbal comments can be stored together with the measurement Playback Playback of voice annotations can be listened to using an earphone headphones connected to the headphone socket Gain Adjustment 60 dB to 0 dB TEXT ANNOTATIONS Text annotations can be attached to measurements so that written comments can be stored with the measurement IMAGE ANNOTATIONS TYPE 2270 ONLY Image annotations can be attached to measurements Images can be viewed on the screen DATA MANAGEMENT Metadata Upto 10 Metadata annotations can be set per project text from keyboard or text from pick list number from keyboard or auto generated number Project Template Defines the display and measurement setups Setups can be locked and password protected Project Measurement data stored with the Project Template Job Projects are organised in Jobs Explorer facilities for easy management of data copy cut paste delete rename view data open project create job set default project name Hand held Analyzers Types 2250 and 2270 User Manual NOTIFICATIONS Sends an SMS or e mail if an alarm condition is fulfilled Ala
46. Manual History Parameter 0 c cece eee eeseeeseeeeeeeees 230 Mana cicis a eet a ira aaae 30 Sree heia taie apradapa aee aaea E Settings ave Standard is eenaa 28 Vibrations enana a 30 Calibration Interval ccccseeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 34 Calibration REMindel cccceeeeeseeeteeeteeeteeeeee Calibration Reminder Tab uh Calibration Setup ceeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeeeenteees Calibrator Sound Level niacin inne reas CAMEL ceecceeceeeteeeteeteeeteeeee Care Cleaning and Storage i Central View Area ccccccceeeeceseeeseeeeeeeeeeseeeeeaeeeeee CF Card CEEE Character Keyboard Charge Injection Calibration ClO EEE ETE Charge Injection Calibration Parameter 194 Charging the Battery for the First Time 11 CIGs ss2aticniiien anc edhe 27 34 111 124 GIG Ral eaea enee ASEE EEIE TASEA a seep thee 34 35 GIG Ret Date istarsan tiny eree 35 CIC Reference Ratio cccccecceceeeseeeeeeeteeeteeeeee 35 GIG Result Tronis arre ANSEES 111 124 CIC Result 2 GIG RESUIE4 A e n ERATA 124 CIC ResultSet iaiia 218 CIC Theory ssec 34 Cleaning the Instrument 97 Clock Display 0 we 47 Gold Start xcs A EA csebs aso AE 17 Colour SCHEMES cc ccecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 68 Commentary 59 Commentary Icon 46 Commentary Pushbutton ccceeeee
47. Pentium III or equivalent processor 2048 Mbyte RAM SVGA graphics display adaptor sound card DVD drive mouse USB Windows 7 Ordering Information SOFTWARE MODULES AVAILABLE SEPARATELY BZ 7223 Frequency Analysis Software BZ 7224 Logging Software BZ 7225 Enhanced Logging Software BZ 7225 UPG Upgrade from Logging Software BZ 7224 to Enhanced Logging Software BZ 7225 does not include memory card BZ 7226 Sound Recording Option BZ 7227 Reverberation Time Software BZ 7229 Dual Channel Building Acoustics Software Type 2270 only BZ 7228 Building Acoustics Software BZ 7230 FFT Software BZ 7231 Tone Assessment Option COMPONENTS INCLUDED WITH TYPE 2250 2270 HAND HELD ANALYZER Type 4189 1 2 Prepolarized Free field Microphone or Type 4190 1 2 Free field Microphone ZC 0032 Microphone Preamplifier AO 1476 USB Standard A to USB Mini B Interface Cable 1 8 m 6 ft BZ 5298 Environmental Software including BZ 5503 Utility Software for Hand held Analyzers UA 1650 90 mm dia Windscreen with AutoDetect UA 1651 Tripod Extension for Hand held Analyzer UA 1673 Adaptor for Standard Tripod Mount DH 0696 Wrist Strap KE 0440 Travel Bag KE 0441 Protective Cover FB 0679 Hinged Cover Type 2250 only FB 0699 Hinged Cover Type 2270 only HT 0015 Earphones UA 1654 5 Extra Styli QB 0061 Battery Pack ZG 0426 Mains Power Supply 182 COMPONENTS INCLUDED WITH LOGGING SOFTWARE BZ 7224 AND ENHANCED
48. Preferences Notification Settings Alarm Settings Disk Space Level Trigger When level trigger conditions are fulfilled Indicates sound level exceeds trigger level specified in Logging or Enh Logging template a 82 Hand held Analyzers Types 2250 and 2270 User Manual Table 8 2 Content of Notification Information Type Content Reason for notification Test or Alarm followed by a short description Time of notification Date and Time Instrument ID Serial No and Location Status of current Disk Free memory Total memory Status of Internal Battery Full High Low Critical Charging or Unknown Trigger Input Voltage if available The voltage Measurement Status if available Running Paused or Stopped No of Sound Recordings if The number available Latest CIC Result if available Passed Background noise too high Ratio outside tolerances Ratio deviates from Ref Undefined Ref or Undefined Current value of LAF if available The value Note some of the information listed above may not be available depending on the conditions when the notification was sent e g no measurement values will be available immediately after a power on SMS Notifications SMS notifications can be used if you have connected a GSM GPRS EDGE HSPA serial modem to the analyzer see section 8 2 1 In addition to sending SMS notifications initiated by alarms you can
49. Sound Level Calibration c ccecceseeeeeeeteeeeeeeee Sound Level Meter SLM eenen Sound Level Meter Project Template SEINO Renee Cee pres A Eee ees Serer tne tee ye Sound Level Meter Screen Initials nent erana aia einen 17 Sound Level Meter Software BZ 7222 cc e 38 Sound Pressure Level ccccccccesseeesseeeees 39 252 Sound Recording ccccceceeceeeeeee 127 143 164 Sound Recording Option BZ 7226 16 39 127 Sound Recording Parameters c eeeeees 204 Special Parameters cc cceccceeseeeeeeeteeeeeeeeeeeeeees 217 Specifications ceceeeeceeeeeeeeeneeeeeeteeeeeeeeereeeee 169 1 3 octave Based Tone Assessment Together with BZ 7223 24 25 Only 180 2250 Enhanced Logging Software BZ 7225 175 2250 Frequency Analysis Software BZ 7223 174 2250 Logging Software BZ 7224 eceee 175 2250 Reverberation Time Software BZ 7227 177 2250 Sound Level Meter Software BZ 7222 172 FFT Based Tone Assessment Together with BZ 7230 Only 179 Sound Recording Option BZ 7226 e eee 176 Tone Assessment Option BZ 7231 seee 179 Type 2250 2270 Platform c cccseceseseeteeseees 170 Utility Software Hand held Analyzers BZ 5503 e 180 Spectrum Graphs in Reverberation Time Software eseee 146 Spectrum View SpectrumTab in Reverberation Time Software 146 Standard Calibration 0 ccccccecee eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 28
50. and Measurement Parameters The measurement parameters are measured in accordance with the setup parameters The fol lowing tables describe the relationship between the setup and measurement parameters Table B 1 General Parameters Parameter LXeq LXE LXleq LAFTeq LVpeak TVpeak LXYmax LXYmin Sound Field e e e e Correction Windscreen e e e e e e C Correction Extended Low e e e e Frequency Broadband e e A e excl Peak Broadband e Peak Table B 2 Noise Indicators and Statistics Parameter Lday Levening Laight Lden Ldn LXYN Sound Field e 6 e Correction Windscreen e e 6 Correction Extended Low e e Frequency Broadband A A A A A e excl Peak 224 Table B 2 Cont Noise Indicators and Statistics Hand held Analyzers Types 2250 and 2270 User Manual Parameter Lday Levening Lhight Lden LXYN Broadband Statistics based on Percentile N Day Start Evening Start Night Start Evening Penalty Night Penalty Table B 3 Occupational Health Parameters Parameter Lep d Lep d v E Dose ProjDose VPeaks gt NNNGB LavRQ TWA TWA Dose RQ Proj DoseRQ Sound e Field Correction Wind e e screen Correction Extended e Low Frequency
51. and assess tonality 5 2 3 Logging Software Module BZ 7224 This software module allows logging of broadband and spectral data to obtain a time history for later analysis for example for use in environmental noise as well as workplace noise assessment It allows free selection of up to 10 parameters to log at periods from 1 s to 24 h Results are logged directly to CF or SD memory cards 5 2 4 Enhanced Logging Software Module BZ 7225 This software module is optimised for long term monitoring It has the functionality of the Logging and Frequency Analysis software and in addition it can measure continuously save data in manageable portions every 24 hours make periodic reports i e every hour and measure Lg and Lgep etc 5 2 5 Sound Recording Option BZ 7226 This option allows recording of sound during measurement The sound recording can be controlled manually or by using an external trigger signal The recording can also be triggered when a measured parameter exceeds a preset level BZ 7224 and BZ 7225 only The recorded sound can be played back and listened to using the supplied earphones HT 0015 Sound is recorded directly to CF or SD memory cards a Requires Frequency Analysis Software BZ 7223 5 2 6 5 2 7 5 2 8 5 3 Hand held Analyzers Types 2250 and 2270 User Manual Reverberation Time Software BZ 7227 This software module allows measurement of reverberation time using Impulsive excitation and
52. and the analyzer will reboot when finished Any unsaved logging data will be saved and the analyzer is ready to use again 5 Connect to the instrument again and verify the new software version by tapping g on the instrument s screen then About To continue the measurement press the Start pushbutton Note If you have set up your instrument for e mail notifications see Section 8 4 then you will get an e mail in step 4 when the analyzer is paused and you will get a new e mail in step 5 when the analyzer has rebooted and is ready for connection again Fig 9 1 About screen Showing the Check for updates on the Web link Fig 9 2 Software update screen Showing the Check for updates button License valid Check for updates on the Web gt The above software modules can be in one of two states active not active Active means the software is running and using the current Project Template Copyright 2004 2009 by Br el amp Kj r Sound amp Vibration Measurement AJS All rights reserved 0 Software Update Progress EE Message Server update bksv com 2250 latest Software Update j 9 2 3 Downgrade to an Earlier Version It is possible to downgrade to an earlier version of the software a 9 3 9 4 9 4 1 Hand held Analyzers Types 2250 and 2270 User Manual 1 Change the latest part of the server address see Fig 9 2 to the requested software
53. are easily set and changed using the keyboard or selected from a user defined picklist The metadata are stored together with the measurement on the project Refer to section 8 6 for a more comprehensive description of using metadata Tap the g icon to close the Annotations screen Another method for documenting your measurement is by attaching a short spoken comment to the project you are working on This is done before during or after saving the measurement by pressing and holding down the Commentary pushbutton while talking to the instrument The microphone situated on the underside of the analyzer will pick up your comments Recording stops when you release the pushbutton Note Tap the paperclip icon to see a list of all annotations in the project and tap the loudspeaker icon in the annotation to hear the comment using the earphones plugged into the earphone socket A third method is to make a short written comment and attach it to the project you are working on This is done before during or after saving the measurement by tapping the Main Menu icon and then tapping on Add Note to Current Measurement in the list of options A blank note screen will appear where you can make written comments about the measurement using the standard full character keyboard that appears at the bottom of the note screen See the example in Fig 3 11 Tap the paperclip icon to see a list of all annotations in the project and tap the tex
54. backwards integration of the impulse or using Interrupted Noise from the built in noise generator Measurements can be made in a number of positions in the room and the average reverberation time for the room is calculated Tone Assessment Option BZ 7231 This option allows the assessment of tones on site according to selected methods The option described in this manual is based on the 1 3 octave method Please refer to User Manual BE 1778 for detailed information about tone assessment based on FFT spectra When used with BZ 7223 Frequency Analysis BZ 7224 Logging and BZ 7225 Enhanced logging it allows you to assess tones in a measured 1 3 octave spectrum according to ISO 1996 2007 Annex D or assess tones in a measured 1 3 octave spectrum according to Italian Law Ministero dell ambiente Decreto 16 marzo 1998 Built in Help If you need more detailed information at any time during operation tap the Help icon fgg on the instrument s screen The resulting screen will explain that particular item in much more detail You can scroll up and down the explanatory text using either the 7 and A pushbuttons or the scrollbar on the screen Return to the normal display screen by tapping g If you need to view any of the previous 10 screens you have visited in the help system tap the lt icon at the top of the display Software and Hardware Versions Once in the help system you can access the list of installed software versions and
55. data copy cut paste delete rename view data open project create job set default project name Note For specifications and details on Type 7831 and Type 7830 please refer to Product Data BP 1691 Software Specifications Tone Assessment Option BZ 7231 LICENSE Tone Assessment Option BZ 7231 is enabled with a separate license and can be used with the FFT template BZ 7230 or with 1 3 octave and logging template BZ 7223 BZ 7224 and BZ 7225 FFT Based Tone Assessment Together with BZ 7230 Only STANDARD Tone assessment is based on the measured FFT spectrum in accordance with ISO 1996 2007 Acoustics Description assessment and measurement of environmental noise part 2 Determination of environmental noise levels Annex C informative Objective method for assessing the audibility of tones in noise Reference method SPECTRA ASSESSED Any displayed sound FFT spectrum FFT Ref or MAX may be assessed Assessment is made as post processing i e when measurement is paused or stopped SETUP ACCORDING TO STANDARD Setups in violation of the standard are indicated as such on the display you may then accept to apply the default setup Tone assessment will be made if possible in spite of standard violations Tone Seek Criterion 0 1 to 4 0 dB in 0 1 dB steps 180 Hand held Analyzers Types 2250 and 2270 User Manual TONE AT CURSOR A sinusoidal tone is available at the Headphone output
56. decays to be measured automatically and averaged together per position Trigger Level 0 to 200 dB Parameter only available if Excitation Impulsive Specify the trigger level for the sound level in any frequency band the measurement starts as soon as this level is exceeded The measurement has a pre trigger of 1s Trigger Repeat Off On Set to On to start a new measurement automatically after saving the previous measurement and after fulfilling the trigger conditions Parameter only available if Excitation Impulsive and Automatic Save Yes A 10 Logged Broadband 100 ms Table A 11 Logged Broadband 100 ms parameters Parameter Values Comment Lheq On Select On to log Laeg with an elapsed time Off of 100 ms and a logging period of 100 ms Note Logging Laeq every 100 ms requires Broadband excl Peak parameter set to AC or AZ LaF On Select On for logging of Lar every 100 ms Off Note Logging Lar every 100 ms requires Broadband excl Peak parameter set to AC or AZ APPENDIX A Setup Parameters Table A 11 Cont Logged Broadband 100 ms parameters 197 Parameter Values Comment Las On Off Select On for logging of Las every 100 ms Note Logging Las every 100 ms requires Broadband excl Peak parameter set to AC or AZ a For Logging BZ 7224 and Enhanced Logging BZ 7225 templates only A 11 Logged Broadband Table A
57. determined by the trigger condition parameters Minimum Duration 00 00 00 to 01 00 00 When Duration Limit is On then Minimum Duration will determine the minimum recording time regardless of the trigger conditions The total record length will then as a minimum be the sum of Minimum Duration Pre recording Time and Post recording Time Table A 17 Cont Sound Recording parameters APPENDIX A Setup Parameters 207 Parameter Values Comment Maximum Duration 00 00 00 to When Duration Limit is On then Maximum 01 00 00 Duration will determine the maximum recording time regardless of the trigger conditions The total record length will then as a maximum be the sum of Maximum Duration Pre recording Time and Post recording Time Note If Maximum Duration 00 00 00 then it is disabled and doesn t limit the duration a Requires license for Sound Recording Option BZ 7226 b For Logging BZ 7224 and Enhanced Logging BZ 7225 templates only c For Enhanced Logging BZ 7225 templates only A 17 Output Socket Signal Table A 18 Output Socket Signal parameters Parameter Values Comment Source Off Output to the Output socket on the connector Input X weighted panel Select between Off and the input Input C weighted signal for monitoring purposes Input Z weighted The Lap setting will output the X weighted Lye sound level as a voltage between 0 V and DC Voltage 4 V Us
58. finished tap the E icon to return to the measurement screen Tap the paperclip icon to see a list of all annotations in the project and tap the camera icon f in the annotation to view the image To get more familiar with this process try the following 1 Make a new measurement see section 3 2 if unsure 2 Tap the paperclip icon and define or select metadata 3 Make a short written comment and attach it to the new measurement as previously described 4 Make a short spoken comment as previously described 5 Make an image as previously described for Type 2270 only 6 Tap the paperclip icon and check that you have three annotations select one of them to see hear the annotation Switching Off Switch the analyzer off by pressing If held in for 1 second the instrument goes into standby mode if held in for more than 4 seconds it switches the instrument off The instrument will automatically switch off when it has been in standby mode without external power for more than 30 hours 26 Hand held Analyzers Types 2250 and 2270 User Manual Chapter 4 4 1 4 2 4 3 Calibration Introduction Calibration is an adjustment of your analyzer to measure and display correct values The sensitivity of the transducer as well as the response of the electronic circuitry can vary slightly over time or could be affected by environmental conditions such as temperature and humidity While you are unlik
59. for recording sound while making a logging see Chapter 12 12 Under Input specify Trigger Input if you want to start the sound recording using an external trigger signal See details in Appendix A To exit the screen tap the ga icon Controlling the Measurement The measurement is controlled in the same way you would control a normal sound level meter measurement using Start Pause Continue Reset and Save pushbuttons see Chapter 3 for more details If you have set the Charge Injection Calibration parameter to On then CIC is performed at the start of the measurement and at the end of the measurement An Exclude marker is set on the logging profile at the point where CIC is being performed The update of the Total parameters is stopped while CIC is being performed You can see the results of the CIC under Total parameters CIC Result 1 and CIC Result 2 111 112 11 2 1 11 2 2 11 3 11 3 1 Hand held Analyzers Types 2250 and 2270 User Manual Annotating a Project While using the logging software you can annotate measurements using the normal method of adding annotations to a project before or after a measurement or while the measurement is paused The annotations can then be viewed by tapping on the paperclip icon or tapping the Main Menu and selecting Explorer from the list of options 3 5 However if you choose to annotate the profile during the measurement the annotation icon will appear below the profile
60. freq Low 8 kHz 3 kHz Fair 16 kHz 6 kHz Medium 24 kHz 10 kHz High 48 kHz 20 kHz Memory 16 KB s 32 KB s 48 KB s 96 KB s Recorded Signal Input X weighted Input C weighted Input Z weighted Use this parameter to select the frequency weighting of the recorded signal Note 1 The frequency weighting of the recorded signal can be selected independently of the frequency weighting of the measurement the signal at the output socket and the signal at the earphone socket Note 2 X frequency weighting A or B A requires that the Broadband excl Peak parameter is set to AC or AZ B requires that the Broadband excl Peak parameter is set to BC or BZ Automatic Gain Control Off To ease identification of sound sources the gain can be automatically adjusted to keep the average level within a 40 dB range When playing back the recorded signal you will then hear clearly the whole signal content whether the level has been 20 dB or 140 dB Set Automatic Gain Control to On to convert the recorded signal Set Automatic Gain Control to Off for recording the signal with a fixed gain then set Peak Recording Level to fit the signal Note If the sound contains very high levels at low frequency then a fixed gain is recommended 206 Hand held Analyzers Types 2250 and 2270 User Manual Table A 17 Cont Sound Recording parameters Parameter Values Comment Peak Recording
61. in LAN Socket on the Connector Panel Fig 2 2 Type 2250 and Type 2270 accepts the following Compact Flash LAN and WLAN Cards e 10 100 Ethernet Ruggedized CF Card Briiel amp Kj r order number UL 1016 see www socketmobile com e Go Wi Fi P500 CF WLAN rev B and rev C see www socketmobile com Use a straight through standard Ethernet cable with RJ45 connectors at both ends to connect the analyzer to the network via a hub switch or router Use a crossover Ethernet cable with RJ45 connectors at both ends to connect the analyzer directly to a PC The analyzer supports TCP IP Transmission Control Protocol Internet Protocol on the LAN and WLAN This requires the analyzer to have a unique address on the network This address is called an IP address and consists of four sets of 3 digit numbers e g 010 116 121 016 The IP address can be obtained in different ways e Automatically e Using DHCP A DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol Server on the network assigns automatically an IP address to the analyzer when connected to the network This is the most common way of setting up IP addresses e Using Link local If no address is automatically assigned by the DHCP Server then after a few seconds the analyzer will use an address from the Link local address range 169 254 x x This will most likely be the case when connecting the analyzer directly to a PC using an Ethernet Crossover cable e Manual
62. in a new project The projects are named as specified in the Preferences Storage Settings Example If you select Auto naming of Projects and start the measurement on the 13th of November then your projects for measuring 48 hours assuming you have started in the middle of the day and have set Save Project Data at parameter to 00 00 00 will be 051113 001 containing data from the middle of the day November 13th until midnight 051114 001 containing data for a whole day November 14th 124 12 2 1 12 2 2 12 3 12 3 1 Hand held Analyzers Types 2250 and 2270 User Manual 051115 001 containing data from midnight to the middle of the day on November 15th If you didn t select Auto naming of Projects then you would have the following projects assuming the Project Name Prefix parameter was set to Project and no projects had been saved before in the directory Project 001 Project 002 Project 003 If you have set the Charge Injection Calibration parameter to On then a CIC Calibration is performed at specified times of the day An Exclude marker is set on the logging profile at the point where the CIC is being performed The update of the Total parameters and the Periodic Reports is stopped while the CIC is being performed You can see the results of the CIC calibration under Total parameters CIC Result 1 to 4 The CIC result can be either Passed Background noise too high or CIC Ratio deviates from Re
63. in accordance with their physical position in a room REVERBERATION TIME m 730 lt 1 25 kHz gt pectrum Decay The dark green fields on the map indicate the selected Source Receiver relation The next measurement will be saved at this position Results from the measurements at the receiver positions are displayed in the boxes at the receiver positions determined by the parameter and frequency selector in the headline of the map Fig 14 14 Example display showing a measurement in progress REVERBERATION TIME wm amp T30 lt 100Hz y The example in Fig 14 14 shows the state when four measurements have been made and saved and the position at S1R3 is selected ready for the next measurement Note the small smileys at some of the receiver positions you can tap them and get more detailed information You can attach text or commentaries at source or receiver positions by selecting View Annotations see Fig 14 12 and add new annotations as described in Chapter 6 Note the two small paperclips at S1 and R2 they indicate annotations at these positions CHAPTER 14 Reverberation Time Software Optional Module 153 Tap Map just above the Add Source Ea and Add Receiver Gi icons and select Table to display the measurements in a table see Fig 14 15 The table contains the same information as the table described in the previous section when measuring without position management Fig 14 5 F
64. interfaces are not just used for data download but also for remote monitoring and remote control of Type 2270 Description of Inputs Outputs Top Socket This 10 pin LEMO connector is the main microphone input for the instrument see item 17 in Fig 2 1 Microphone Type 4189 including Preamplifier ZC 0032 is normally connected directly to this connector If required however one of two microphone extension cables AO 0697 D 030 3 m and AO 0697 D 100 10 m can be fitted between the input stage and the main microphone input socket to extend the distance to the desired length For Type 2270 the microphone is connected to input Channel 1 In addition you can use the Dual 10 pole Adaptor JP 1041 for accessing both input Channel 1 and input Channel 2 USB Interface The USB Interface see item 1 in Fig 2 2 provides high speed direct communication with a PC s USB port It is used to synchronise measurement and setup data with a host PC Use the supplied cable AO 1476 The USB Interface is also used for connection to a printer see section 8 1 7 Use cable AO 0657 for connection to a printer that supports PCL language CHAPTER 2 Assembling your Analyzer 7 2 3 3 Earphone The 3 5 mm minijack earphone socket see item 2 in Fig 2 2 enables the instrument to be connected to a set of headphones earphones for reviewing recorded comments or for monitoring the measured sound Use the supplied earphones HT 0015 2 3 4 Output Thi
65. licenses together with information about the hardware This information is always available and is accessed by selecting About from the top of the display What is Utility Software for Hand held Analyzers BZ 5503 Utility Software for Hand held Analyzers BZ 5503 functions as the link between the analyzer and reporting software on a PC such as Noise Explorer Type 7815 Evaluator Type 7820 21 Protector Type 7825 or Qualifier Light Type 7831 The software enables you to do the following e Setup or control the analyzer from a PC e Retrieve data from the analyzer e Manage and archive data from the analyzer e View data in archives e Export data to Type 7815 Type 7820 Type 7825 Type 7831 or Microsoft Excel CHAPTER 5 Getting to Know Your Analyzer 41 e Update the software in the analyzer e Install license for use of software modules in the analyzer Utility Software for Hand held analyzer BZ 5503 is supplied on the Environmental Software DVD BZ 5298 which is included with your analyzer 5 4 Basic Principles when using the Analyzer 5 4 1 Navigation Principles Star Navigation Concept The main principle is that all the main menus are accessible via a single tap of the stylus The Main Menu icon forms the centre of the star navigation concept see Fig 5 1 42 Hand held Analyzers Types 2250 and 2270 User Manual Fig 5 1 The Star navigation concept NOTES What to bring PREFERENC Lis
66. list Select the required number and enter text in the Entry Text field 86 Hand held Analyzers Types 2250 and 2270 User Manual Entry Text For Type Text The text For Type Pick List The text for the selected Entry No Current No For Type Number The number Current Index For Type Index The index Step For Type Index The Current Index is incremented with Step after creation of a project The index wraps around when exceeding Upper Limit or getting below Lower Limit Note Step can be negative Upper Limit For Type Index The upper limit of the index Lower Limit For Type Index The lower limit of the index At the top of the screen you can set a checkmark to use the settings for this metadata on new projects when closing the display The checkmark is disabled for changes to the definition of the metadata currently in use because this will always be used for new projects however when you are editing or looking at metadata from a previously saved project you can decide whether to use the settings on new projects too or keep the changes to the project only Fig 8 9 Edit metadata Edit Metadata 2 x g Enabled Pick List 3 Hall C 10 37 59 8 6 2 Timers and Automatic Measurements Automatic control of the analyzer is available via one or more of the analyzer s timers up to ten CHAPTER 8 Advanced Use of the Analyzer Tips and Tricks 87 The purpose o
67. not as a paperclip icon in the status field or attached to a project in Explorer as described previously In this case you view the annotation using the method described under 11 3 1 Recording Sound You can record sound during the measurement by pressing the Manual Event pushbutton Manual Event marker the Back erase pushbutton Exclude Marker or when the level of a specific parameter exceeds a certain level or you can record sound through the whole measurement depending on the Sound Recording setting in the Setup details in Chapter 12 Displaying the Results The Logging measurement screen or Profile View includes three tabs at the bottom Profile Spectrum and Broadband View the Logging SLM includes the tabs Profile Broadband and XL View The tabs allow you to choose different ways of displaying the measurement results All but the Profile tab have been covered previously in Chapters 3 and 10 however a quick recap is provided below The Broadband view shows an instantaneous Lap readout with associated bar graph and a number of measurement parameters The first measurement parameter is displayed in a larger font size for better readability The XL View increases the size of the first parameter readout to a 4 digit full screen display including decimal point The Spectrum view shows two different spectra parameters being measured simultaneously The Profile View The Profile view displays a profile of a log
68. only Windscreen Correction None If Windscreen Auto Detect is set to Off you can UA 1650 manually select a windscreen correction suitable UA 1404 for the windscreen in use Correction is automatically made for the windscreen on Types 4952 and 4184 A No correction is made for unknown transducers APPENDIX A Setup Parameters Table A 2 Cont Inout parameters with windscreen correction Parameter Values Comment Extended Low Frequency On Use this parameter to extend the low frequency Off of the broadband measurements and the frequency analysis However be aware that the measurements will be more sensitive to very low frequency noise such as wind noise Extended Low Frequency Off Broadband Z weighting 6 3 Hz to 22 4 kHz 2 dB limits Frequency analysis 1 1 octave 16 Hz 16 kHz 1 3 octave 12 5 Hz 20 kHz Extended Low Frequency On Broadband Z weighting using Type 4189 or 4190 microphone 4 2 Hz to 22 4 kHz 2 dB limits Broadband Z weighting without microphone approx 1 Hz to 22 4 kHz 2 dB limits Frequency analysis 1 1 octave 8 Hz 16 kHz 1 3 octave 6 3 Hz 20 kHz Trigger Input None This parameter should be set to match the equipment connected to the Trigger Input Socket on the connector panel of the analyzer Set it to None if not used MATRON Set Trigger Input to MATRON Handswitch if the Handswitch analyzer is being used in the MATRON system This
69. or its subsidiaries Copyright 2004 2011 Briel amp Kj r Sound amp Vibration Measurement A S All rights reserved No part of this publication may be reproduced or distributed in any form or by any means without prior written consent from Briiel amp Kj r Sound amp Vibration Meas urement A S N rum Denmark Contents CHAPTER 1 IntrodU tiON sass see eid te ses nei eua acetate tide aaa nner dee 1 Vel 7 WelCOMG E EE E Seca vet et oes Bee oe et ot oe 1 1 2 Howto Usethis Manuals ssnsdin aaea iaaiiai 1 Conventions Used in this Manual 00 0 0 eeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeseaeeseneeeeeeeeee 1 BOQINNGTS T EEE EE EE T A T ETE 2 Experienced Users of Acoustic Measurement Equipment eee 2 CHAPTER 2 Assembling your Analyzer secccsesessseeeeecceesssssseeeeneeeeeseeeensesnenneeeeseensnsees 3 21 A MTPOMUCHON ace ienero eng oes ddan eas does faded dag eel aeae dite a aa deacons aap 3 2 2 lnstrument Components 2 s isidis ied ceo Cah ceeded des dees eee 3 2 3 Description of Inputs OUtPUtS eee eee e cece eeereeeeaeeeeaeeeeaeeeeeneeeeaeeseaeeeeeeeneees 6 TOP SOCKET sci cs cebtets cig ET eh oa ok Lied chad tee tag deed aes desea tigeeep deat 6 USB Interiace 2 5 S sit keto E ak ot Naso 2 ceevs cat eohy dyacenuacuaeoee suet 6 Earphone AEA EEEE cketelees eke A EE 7 Ei oE PEET E E E E T 7 AEA oE E AE A Seed as deve ee cee ee deseo 7 Input t Typ 2270 ONY ck sack eles ead ache de ap
70. package e g SW22 2 Press Check for updates 3 Follow the procedure described in section 9 2 1 or section 9 2 2 Note Only software packages equal to or above SW24 can downgrade to another package Software packages down to SW21 are available for update through internet How to Move a License If you have more than one analyzer you may want to share application software between the instruments You can do this by moving the license from one analyzer to another by using Utility Software for Hand held Analyzers BZ 5503 together with the License Mover VP 0647 If you lend out your analyzer you may want to temporarily un install applications not needed This can be achieved by moving the license of the application to License Mover VP 0647 When needed again you move the license back to your analyzer Please consult the on line help included with the BZ 5503 software for instructions on how to move a license Troubleshooting Analyzer Measurements If your analyzer measurement seems to be wrong then e Check the cabling if any e Check that the microphone including preamplifier is correctly mounted in the top socket or correctly connected to the extension cable e Check that the Input parameter is set to Top Socket Rear Socket in agreement with how you are going to use the input This is found by tapping the Main Menu icon Eq then Setup followed by Input e Check that the transducer you have mounted on your analy
71. reboots unexpected behaviour Measurement When a measurement Indicates measurement finished or unexpected State starts or stops behaviour CIC When Charge Injection Indicates possible measurement problem Calibration fails Internal Battery When Internal Battery is entering a specified state High Low or Critical Indicates internal battery getting low Internal Battery will be in one of the states Full High Low Critical Charging or Unknown You can set alarm to High Low or Critical in Preferences Notification Settings Alarm Settings Internal Battery Note The internal battery will typically be in one of the states Full or Charging if externally powered Entering one of the set states might then indicate a power failure Trigger Input Voltage When voltage at Trigger Input drops to or below a specified level Indicates no external power or external battery getting low Set the Setup Input Trigger Type to Voltage for Monitoring Set the voltage limit in Preferences Notification Settings Alarm Settings Trigger Input Voltage Connect the external battery or external power to this input in addition to the External Power Socket to get an alarm if the voltage drops to or below the specified level Disk Space When remaining disk space drops to or below a specified percentage of the total disk space Indicates disk space getting low needs to be swapped with an empty disk Set the percentage in
72. short recording together with capturing an image The recording will be Pre recording Time Post recording Time 1 second long See details in Appendix A e Off if you don t want to record sound 6 Set Recording Quality to High Medium Fair or Low in accordance with your needs Note however that high quality requires more disk space than low quality details in Appendix A 7 Set Recorded Signal to either Input A B weighted Input C weighted or Input Z weighted A B weighting is determined by setting the parameter in Setup Frequency Weightings Broadband excl Peak Input C weighted is suitable for recordings used afterwards to identify the sound source it contains all the audible content of the signal but reduces the low frequency noise from wind etc 8 Set Automatic Gain Control to On if you don t know the dynamic of the signal before hand or the dynamic is very high then the 120dB dynamic range from max input level and down will be converted to 40 dB Otherwise set it to Off and specify the Peak Recording Level 9 Under Input you specify Trigger Input if you want to start the sound recording using an external trigger signal See details in Appendix A To exit the screen tap the 1 icon CHAPTER 13 Sound Recording Optional Module 129 13 1 2 Controlling the Recording The measurement is controlled in the same way you would control a normal sound level meter measurement using Start Pause Co
73. signal you will then hear clearly the whole signal content whether the level has been 20 dB or 140 dB Set Automatic Gain Control to On to convert the signal at the headphone output Set Automatic Gain Control to Off for listening to the signal with a fixed gain APPENDIX D Preferences Parameter Values Comment Gain for Meas Signal 80 0 dB to 60 0 dB for Automatic Gain Control set to Off 60 0 dB to 0 0 dB for Automatic Gain Control set to On Key in a gain value 0 1 dB resolution for the measurement input signal Use to assign the new value for immediate response at the output or use the up down navigation keys to increment decrement the value in steps of 1 dB Note 0 dB means 1 V output for 1 V input Automatic Gain Control set to Off Gain for Annotations 94 5 dB to 0 0 dB Key in a gain value 1 5 dB resolution for the commentary annotations Use to assign the new value for immediate response at the output or use the up down navigation keys to increment decrement the value in steps of 1 5 dB D 6 Users Table D 6 Users Parameter Values Comment Multi User Disabled Set to Enabled to enable the Enabled Multi user facility set to Disabled if you are the only user 238 Hand held Analyzers Types 2250 and 2270 User Manual D 7 Printer Settings Table D 7 Printer Settings
74. sound recording this requires a license for the BZ 7226 option and using BZ 7224 Logging Software or CHAPTER 2 Assembling your Analyzer 5 BZ 7225 Enhanced Logging Software you can insert an Event Marker and control sound recording the latter requires a license for the BZ 7226 option In Type 2270 this button can also be used to capture images 4 Commentary Pushbutton This allows you to add recorded audio messages to your measurement files 5 4 VT Navigation Pushbuttons These move the active screen component Field Selector and navigate the user interface 6 02 Back erase Pushbutton This allows you to erase the last 5 seconds of measurement data or to insert an Exclude Marker BZ 7224 Logging Software or BZ 7225 Enhanced Logging Software only 7 Accept Pushbutton This allows you to accept any changes you make to the instrument s setup 8 Reset Measurement Pushbutton This allows you clear the current measurement from the screen 9 4 Start Pause Pushbutton Press this to start pause or continue with a measurement 10 Status Indicator The red yellow or green lights or LEDs referred to as the Traffic Light either side of the Start Pause pushbutton indicate important states of the instrument during operation i e measurement stopped paused or running See Chapter 4 for further details 11 amp Save Pushbutton This allows you to save measurement results 12
75. spectrum e Zoom In Zoom Out to adjust the zoom e Spectrum Table to display the spectrum in a table see an example in Fig 14 8 148 Hand held Analyzers Types 2250 and 2270 User Manual Fig 14 8 Spectrum table 14 3 3 Freq T30 T30Status gt 100 Hz 0 68 s F 125Hz 0 60sok 160 Hz 0 79 so k 200 Hz 0 88 s 250 Hz 1 02 s o k 315 Hz 1 00 s 400 Hz 1 12sok 500 Hz 0 79 s 630 Hz 0 74 s 800 Hz 0 63 s 1kHz 0 70s 1 25 kHz 0 61 s 1 6 kHz 0 62 s 2 kHz 0 64 s 2 5kHz 0 68s 3 15 kHz 0 61 s 14 10 31 Auxiliary Parameters Below the graphics are two lines containing parameters for displaying the Wide Band Reverberation Times for the current position or the Room Average You are also able to display the Lop and Lap broadband values Decay The Decay tab shows the reverberation time decay from a position or the Room average or both see Fig 14 9 Status Field The Status field on the Decay tab is the same as on the Overview and Spectrum tabs Decay Graph The Decay Graph shows the decay of one frequency band for the selected position and or the decay of the same frequency band for the Room Average requires Ensemble Averaging The Decay Parameter Selectors above the graph select which decay to display T20 Pos T30 Pos or EDT Pos Each of these selections show the decay for the measurement at the selected position together with the readout of T20 Pos T30 Pos and EDT Pos resp T20 T30 and EDT sho
76. status field displays Pause Back erase briefly and then displays the shortened elapsed time along with the Pause icon For BZ 7224 and BZ 7225 Software Pressing the Back erase pushbutton will start drawing an Exclude Marker on the display see section 11 3 2 Pressing it again will stop drawing the marker on the display toggle function On screen Feedback and Traffic Light Feedback is given on screen in the Status Field see Fig 5 2 and the Traffic Light indicates important states of the instrument see Table 5 2 Use of Stylus and Navigation Pushbuttons The stylus and navigation pushbuttons are used for setting up the analyzer navigating through the screens and managing the results A number of items that appear on the screen parameter values or icons can be selected updated and activated For instance a new parameter value can be selected from a drop down list CHAPTER 5 Getting to Know Your Analyzer 49 Table 5 2 ne Ligh h Traffic Light State ight Scheme Indications During power on or loading template Nothing E Stopped Ready to measure Short yellow flash every 5s gt Awaiting trigger searching for Short green flash every second calibration signal gt Running measurement Steady green light everything OK Pause Measurement not saved Slow yellow flash on 1 2 s off 1 2s A Overload Fast red flash The selection and activation of items on the screen can be d
77. the INStrUMeNt eee eee ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeceenessonerseneeeseeeesaeerseners 160 Selecting the Tone Assessment Option eeeeeeeeseeeeneeeeeeeeeseeteeeeeeeaeeneaes 160 Setting up a Measurement Manually 0 cece eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeteneeeeaes 162 Setting up the Measurement using the Default Setup 0 0 0 eres 163 Sound Recordings e eneee Sesaestcaecavenaesnayetceevcusc sunsets svteuaeisaveutsevueueesnevethas 164 15 5 MGASUMIN Gis EEAS T T AA 164 Result DISplay AE EEPE E A E TE AAEE 164 15 6 Logging Software BZ 7224 Template nnsnsnsnnsinsnsinsnnninsnnninsinnnnnnnnnnnnnenn 166 15 7 Enhanced Logging Software BZ 7225 Template c eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 167 15 8 Status Codes Smiley s cc ccccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeesneeeess 167 15 9 Recalling Saved Measurement ccceeececeeeeeeereeeeeeeeaeeeeeeseeeeeseneeeseeeeeees 168 CHAPTER 16 Specltlcations teste i ee ee eae 169 APPENDIX A MCTUP at E A Sa rica aces ss eae ee ee dae aoe dea 185 Act lnput for Type 2250 cits esnearen Caepbeuescepeadsnsentonstcapesdanaentovscapeatensietaeytoteverenses 185 A 2 Input for Type 2270 20 eee eeceeecceeseeeceeneresneeeeneeeeenecsanessaneneneeeesaeesnenesenerees 188 A 3 Input Ch 1 for Type 2270 eee eeeeeeeseeeeseeeeeneeeeaeeseseeeeeneeesaeeseaeessaeeeeseeees 189 A4 Input Chy 2 for Type 2270 os 2cccccctesceesceneckecesecevaccunsote
78. the icon to get a list of available commands 6 Select Check and Repair to start the procedure If any errors are found in the file system they are fixed When finished you will be informed whether the memory device was OK or that errors have been fixed Note the checking procedure can take several minutes depending on the size of the memory card Formatting a memory card 7 Select Format to start the formatting procedure A WARNING All data on the memory card will be erased during the formatting process Note the formatting procedure can take several minutes depending on the size of the memory card A WARNING Do not remove the memory card or switch off the instrument during the procedure this might damage the file system and data and make the card unusable Note The read write performance of SD and CF memory cards varies a lot The performance depends on the manufacturer of the card the type of card the size of card and even on the day of production of the card two identical cards can have a different performance because the manufacturer has changed the internal technology without notice In general as a rule of thumb you should select cards aimed for the industrial or professional photographer market The cards delivered by Briiel amp Kj r have all been tested for their read write performance in the analyzer and can be used for the applications available in the analyzer If you need more or othe
79. the screen see section 5 4 8 6 3 3 Viewing or Listening to Annotations and Metadata Use Explorer to locate the project with the annotations you want to view hear then tap the project name and select Annotations from the dropdown that appears or simply tap the annotations icon and select the Annotations tab This will show all annotations attached to the project see Fig 6 4 Fig 6 4 Example of an annotation attached to a project K Comment 1 21 05 2010 10 44 K Comment 2 21 05 2010 10 45 E Note 1 21 05 2010 10 45 Note 2 21 05 2010 10 45 GQ Image 1 21 05 2010 10 45 KI Soundrec 1 21 05 2010 10 46 Metadata oad 10 47 34 The K icon represents a verbal annotation or commentary Tap the annotation name and select Play from the dropdown that appears or tap the icon to play the commentary using the headphone output Note you can also rename or delete annotations or copy or move annotations to other projects or jobs 60 Hand held Analyzers Types 2250 and 2270 User Manual Fig 6 5 Example of metadata The Text icon represents written annotations or notes Tap the annotation name and select Open from the dropdown that appears or tap the icon to open the Notes Editor View the comments and if required edit the comments using the simulated keyboard that appears at the bottom of the screen Tap the EJ icon to accept the changes and return to the previous screen The Image Ci icon represents
80. then use Utility CHAPTER 9 Updating and Upgrading Applications Maintenance Calibration and Troubleshooting 97 Software for Hand held Analyzers BZ 5503 to update the Compact Flash card with the necessary files Please consult the on line help included with the BZ 5503 software for instructions on how to update a Compact Flash card with installation files for the analyzer Power off the analyzer and insert the compact flash card in the CF slot on the instrument Then press and hold down the Commentary and Save amp pushbuttons while switching on the instrument The Maintenance Mode initial screen will be displayed and then within a few seconds the screen shown in Fig 9 4 will appear Press the Accept pushbutton Y to update the software This will take approx 5 minutes A WARNING Do not remove the CF card while updating the analyzer software When the analyzer software has been updated you will get the option of resetting to the default settings If the problem still persists then you should contact your local Br el amp Kj r representative 9 5 Care Cleaning and Storage The analyzer is a delicate precision instrument When handling storing or cleaning your instrument please take the following precautions 9 5 1 Handling the Instrument e Do not try to remove the microphone grid as you can easily damage the microphone in this way e Do not attempt to open the instrument There are no user serviceable parts inside I
81. to help confirm identified tones Frequency the frequency is selected by the Main cursor Gain 70 dB to 10 dB Options The generated tone can be mixed with the input signal TONE ASSESSMENT CURSOR All tones found are indicated in the display The Tone cursor is initially placed at the most prominent tone and can then be stepped through the tones found You can also use the Main cursor to step through the tones RESULTS Results are displayed in the Tone panel and in the Value panel They are not saved with the measurement All Tones Frequency Tone level Loti Masking noise level Lon Audibility ALtg Critical Band CB Most Prominent Tone Tone Level L Adjustment Ky QUALITY INDICATORS On the display a quality indicator smiley will indicate that a hint is available for tone assessment quality Click on the indicator to see the hint 1 3 octave Based Tone Assessment Together with BZ 7223 24 25 Only Tone assessment is based on the measured 1 3 octave spectrum in accordance with either the international ISO 1996 2007 Acoustics Description assessment and measurement of environmental noise part 2 Determination of environmental noise levels Annex D informative Objective method for assessing the audibility of tones in noise Simplified method or the Italian law DM 16 03 1998 Ministero dell ambiente Decreto 16 marzo 1998 SPECTRA ASSESSED The displayed 1 3 octave spectrum Leg Lmax OF Lm
82. using the stylus in the profile or the Manual Event pushbutton during a measurement Marker 3 Text string Default set to Level This marker can be set using the stylus in the profile or if the conditions for the Level Trigger are met during a measurement Marker 4 and Marker 5 Text string These markers can be set using the stylus in the profile display Marker 6 Text String Default set to Sound This marker is set if a sound recording is made during a measurement Pre marker Time Oto5s Specifies number of seconds marker 1 marker 2 or marker 3 will be set ahead of the point where the Back erase or the Manual Event pushbuttons are pressed or the level trigger conditions are fulfilled a For Logging BZ 7224 and Enhanced Logging BZ 7225 templates only 200 Hand held Analyzers Types 2250 and 2270 User Manual A 14 Level Trigger Table A 15 Level Trigger parameters Parameter Values Comment Level Trigger Control On Off Set to On for setting Marker 3 Level when the Trigger Parameter fulfils the Level Trigger conditions see below The conditions are checked every second Sound Recording can also be controlled by these settings see Setup Sound Recording Recording Control Start Slope Rising Falling Set to Rising to start when level goes above Start Level and then stop when level goes below Stop Level Set to Falling
83. using the tripod adaptor UA 1673 20 Internal Battery Pack Rechargeable high capacity Li Ion battery pack to power the instrument 21 Hinged Cover FB 0679 FB 0699 A removable plastic cover is provided which is hinged at the top to provide protection for the connector panel underneath To remove simply open the cover and pull the hinge out of the slot at the top of the connector panel The cover includes a rubber insert printed with an overview of the main connectors and reset button for easy recognition Six indents are provided on the inside of the cover behind the insert which allow you to drill holes in the plastic cover giving access to the main connectors underneath so you can use the cover while power is connected for example 22 Camera Type 2270 only This feature is used to add images to measurements Protected and positioned on the underside at 45 degrees this is designed to allow simultaneous image capture and noise measurement without the need to reposition the analyzer for each task 23 High Speed USB and LAN Interfaces Type 2270 only This is used to provide fast and seamless transfer of measurment data recordings and photographs back to the office Both high speed interfaces USB or LAN can be used when the analyzer is located in close proximity to the PC However if the analyzer is remote from the host PC the LAN interface has the further advantage of data download from anywhere within the same LAN network Both
84. versatile hardware platform suitable for covering a wide range of different applications Together with Sound Level Meter Software BZ 7222 it is a Class 1 modular precision integrating averaging sound level analyzer with an easy to use interface for quick and simple measurement setups Sound Level Meter Software Module BZ 7222 Sound Level Meter Software BZ 7222 allows you to measure a comprehensive set of parameters used for rating noise in terms of its impact on the environmental and working environments and on occupational noise evaluation The more commonly used parameters which cover a large range of applications are either instantaneous measured parameters available at any time or timed measured parameters measured within a controlled time interval Timed Measured Parameters e Equivalent Continuous Sound Levels Leq example Leg e Peak Sound Levels Lpeak example Lepeak e Time for Peak Sound Level example Tepeax e Maximum Time weighted Sound Levels Linax example La pmax e Minimum Time weighted Sound Levels Lmin example Lappin e Percentile Levels Ly example L Af90 0 e Sound Exposure Level example Lap e Sound Exposure example E e Daily Noise Exposure Levels example Lep or Lex gh e Noise Dose example based on ISO standards Dose based on US standards DoseS5 e Number of Peaks example CPeaks gt 140 dB Time Weighted Average example TWA e Level Average with Exchange R
85. with backlight optimised for measurement control and screen navigation ON OFF BUTTON Function Press 1 s to turn on press 1 s to enter standby press for more than 5 s to switch off STATUS INDICATORS LEDs Red amber and green DISPLAY Type Transflective back lit colour touch screen 240 x 320 dot matrix Colour Schemes Five different optimised for different usage scenarios day night etc Backlight Adjustable level and on time USER INTERFACE Measurement Control Using pushbuttons on keyboard Setup and Display of Results Using stylus on touch screen or pushbuttons on keyboard Lock Keyboard and touch screen can be locked and unlocked USB INTERFACE USB 1 1 OTG Mini B socket MODEM INTERFACE Hayes compatible GSM or standard analogue modems connected through the Compact Flash slot Connection to Internet through GPRS EDGE HSPA modem connected through the Compact Flash slot Supports DynDNS for automatic update of IP address of hostname COMPACT FLASH SOCKET For connecting CF memory card CF modem CF LAN Interface or CF WLAN Interface LAN INTERFACE SOCKET TYPE 2270 ONLY Connector RJ45 Speed 10 Mbps Protocol TCP IP INPUT SOCKET 2 TYPE 2270 ONLY Connector Triaxial LEMO Input Impedance gt 1 MQ Direct Input Max input voltage 14 14 Vpeak CCLD Input Max input voltage 7 07 Vpeak CCLD Current voltage 4 mA 25 V TRIGGER SOCKET Connector Triaxial LEMO Max Input Voltage 20 V eak
86. 0 00 24 57 Pure Tone 06 03 2001 15 45 09 0 00 11 0 0 694 710 00 632 698 56 5 5000 Hz 48 9 3150 Hz 6 30 16 3 50 63 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 s000 16000 AC Hz Cursor 5000 Hz LLeq 62 9 dB LLFMax 64 8 dB LLFMin 48 1 dB M ieg M LLFMag V LLFMin E For Help press F1 An equal loudness curve is a frequency response curve Equal loudness curves are the experi mental results of presenting pure tones and levels at different frequencies to young people with no hearing impairment Along a contour line the young average normal listener will judge tones presented with different combinations of frequency and dB to be equally loud Equal loudness level curves are defined by ISO 226 Acoustics Normal equal loudness level contours The Italian Decreto 16 marzo 1998 refers to ISO 226 1987 but the ISO 226 standard has been thoroughly revised in the latest version from 2003 Your Type 2250 2270 with BZ 7231 software installed uses by default the free field curves from the 1987 version But the diffuse field contours from the ISO 226 1987 as well as the free field curves from ISO 226 2003 have been implemented and may be selected Setting up the Instrument Selecting the Tone Assessment Option Tap the Main Menu icon and select Setup from the list of options Under the Tone Assessment parameters on the full list of options tap the Tone Assessment option and set it to On see Fig
87. 0 10 Type 1 e ANSI S1 4 1983 plus ANSI S1 4A 1985 Amend ment Type 1 IEC 61260 1995 07 plus Amendment 1 2001 09 1 1 octave Bands and 1 3 octave Bands Class 0 e ANSI S1 11 1986 1 1 octave Bands and 1 3 octave Bands Order 3 Type 0 C e ANSI S1 11 2004 1 1 octave Bands and 1 3 oc tave Bands Class 0 ISO 140 ISO 3382 ISO 354 CORRECTION FILTERS For Microphone Types 4189 4190 4191 4193 4950 4952 and 4184 A BZ 7227 is able to correct the frequency response to compensate for sound field and accessories Broadband Measurements DETECTORS A and C weighted broadband detectors with F exponential time weighting Overload Detector Monitors the overload outputs of all the frequency weighted channels MEASUREMENTS Lar and Lor for Display as Numbers or Quasi analogue Bars MEASURING RANGES When using Microphone Type 4189 Dynamic Range From typical noise floor to max level for a 1 KHz pure tone signal A weighted 16 6 to 140 dB Primary Indicator Range In accordance with IEC 60651 A weighted 23 5 dB to 122 3 dB Linear Operating Range In accordance with IEC 61672 A weighted 1 kHz 24 8 dB to 139 7 dB Frequency Analysis CENTRE FREQUENCIES 1 1 octave Band Centre Frequencies 63 Hz to 8 kHz 1 3 octave Band Centre Frequencies 50 Hz to 10 kHz MEASUREMENTS Lz spectrum for display only LZeq Spectra sampled at 5 ms intervals MEASURING RANGES When using Microphone Typ
88. 00 Lpight over the night period from 23 00 to 7 00 and Lgen over the whole day with a penalty of 5 dB A for the evening period and a penalty of 10 dB A for the night period Lan day night level is defined by the Environmental Protection Agency EPA in the USA as a descriptor of noise level based on Laeq over the whole day with a penalty of 10 dB A for night time noise from 22 00 to 7 00 The Daily Noise Exposure Level is the average A weighted noise exposure level for a nominal 8 hour working day Lepg is also known as Lex gh Lepg is calculated from the measured Lag the setting of Exposure Time and a Reference time of 8h Used for assessing the noise exposed to a worker during a working day in accordance with ISO standards The European Noise at Work Directive 2003 10 EC defines the following limit and action values Exposure Limit Value 87 dB Upper Exposure Action Value 85 dB Lower Exposure Action Value 80 dB 250 Hand held Analyzers Types 2250 and 2270 User Manual Lep dv Loudness Loudness Level CPeaks gt 140dB NC NC Decisive Band NCB NCB Classification Rumble Hiss RV NR NR Decisive Band The Daily Noise Exposure Level for a user defined reference period Lep d v is calculated from the measured Lag and the settings of Exposure Time and Reference Time Used for example for calculating a Weekly Noise Exposure Level by setting the Reference Time to 40 h Loudness is the subjecti
89. 009 UL 1013 UL 1017 Hand held Analyzers Types 2250 and 2270 User Manual Dual 10 pole Adaptor Tripod Small Tripod Microphone Holder Outdoor Microphone Kit AutoDetect Insert for UA 1650 SD Memory Card for Hand held Analyzers CF Memory Card for Hand held Analyzers SDHC Memory Card for Hand held Analyzers MEASURING WITH REVERBERATION TIME SOFTWARE BZ 7227 Type 2734 A Type 2734 B UL 0256 Type 4292 KE 0449 KE 0364 Type 4224 Type 4295 KE 0392 AO 0523 D 100 AO 0524 D 100 AQ 0673 UA 1476 Type 7831 Type 7830 Power Amplifier Power Amplifier with built in UL 0256 Wireless Audio System Wireless Audio System OmniPower Sound Source Flight Case for Type 4292 TripodCarrying Case for Type 4292 Sound Source Omnidirectional Sound Source Carrying Case for Type 4295 Cable from Type 2250 2270 to Power Amplifier 10 m 33 ft Cable from Type 2250 2270 to Type 4224 10 m 33 ft Cable from Power Amplifier to sound source 10 m 33 ft Wireless Transmission Kit Qualifier Light Qualifier Note For sound sources please see separate Product Data BP 1689 INTERFACING Type 7815 Type 7820 Type 7825 UL 1016 UL 1019 Noise Explorer data viewing software Evaluator data viewing and calculation software Protector software for calculation of Personal Noise Exposure 10 100 Ethernet CF Card CF WLAN Card for Hand held Analyzers Service Products HARDWARE MAINTENANCE 2250 EW1
90. 1 displayed in Setup Input Ch 1 and at the top of Transducers database 228 Hand held Analyzers Types 2250 and 2270 User Manual Table C 1 Current Transducer parameters Parameter Values Comment Transducer Used Name and serial number of This parameter selects which i e connected to Rear Socket transducer transducer is used at Rear Ch 2 for Type 2270 Socket displayed in Setup Input Type 2250 or Setup Input Ch 2 Type 2270 and at the top of Transducers database Input no text is displayed Top Socket Determines whether the input is Rear Socket taken from the top socket or the rear socket Input on connector panel Connect your transducer to this socket This parameter is displayed in Setup nput and on the second line of the Transducers database C 2 Transducer Database The Transducer Database consists of a Transducer Setup and a Calibration History one set per transducer C 2 1 Transducer Setup Table C 2 Transducer Setup parameters Parameter Values Comment Serial No Text string Insert unique ID for transducer Name Text string Insert name of transducer to display together with serial number Description Text string Insert description of transducer Preamplifier ID No Text string Document the preamplifier here Transducer Family Microphone Transducer Family is set to Microphone in this version of the software
91. 11 2006 12 52 Project 006 29 11 2006 12 52 The example from Explorer in Fig 6 1 displays a list of jobs and then some projects which have not been stored under a job name The topmost line in the status area Internal Disk in the example in Fig 6 1 shows the location in the memory The next line in the status area contains 4 icons for navigation Tap the icon to go up one level in the job levels The top level is the Memory level where physical memory devices can be selected You can select between e Internal Disk e SD Card if available in SD Slot e CF Card if available in CF Slot If Multi user is enabled see Chapter 8 then each user can access data on the three devices However a user cannot see or access jobs for other users To go down one level i e exit the Memory level you tap the job name Internal Disk in this case and select Open from the dropdown list or you simply tap the memory icon next to Internal Disk CHAPTER 6 Data Management 57 Tap the CX icon to create a new job folder The first job folder name will be Job 01 subsequent job folders will be labelled Job 02 Job 03 etc You can rename the job folder name by tapping on the name and selecting rename from the dropdown list Use the keyboard to key in a new name accept by tapping on the Enter key To go down one level open a job you tap the job name in the list and select Open from the dropdown list
92. 225 Manual Control of Recording using Manual Event or Back erase pushbutton or an external signal Recording during all of the event or for preset minimum and maximum duration A Sound marker is set while recording Selectable pre and post recording time Manual Control of Recording using touch screen Recording for the selected time period subject to the limitations of the pre recording buffer A Sound marker is set for the selected time period Automatic Control of Recording An event can be triggered when a broadband level is above or below a specified level Recording during all of the event or for preset minimum and maximum duration Selectable pre and post recording time FUNCTIONS WITH BZ 7227 Automatic Control of Recording Start of recording when measurement is started PLAYBACK Playback of sound recordings can be listened to using the earphone headphones connected to the headphone socket CHAPTER 16 Specifications 177 RECORDING FORMAT The recording format is 16 bit wave files extension wav attached to the data in the project easily played back afterwards on a PC using Type 7815 7820 or 7825 Calibration information is stored in the wav file allowing PULSE to analyse the recordings Software Specifications Reverberation Time Software BZ 7227 Conforms with the relevant parts of the following e IEC 61672 1 2002 05 Class 1 e IEC 60651 1979 plus Amendment 1 1993 02 and Amendment 2 200
93. 2250 REF 2270 EW1 2270 REF Extended Warranty one year extension Hand held Analyzer Type 2250 Repair including Conformance Test with Certificate No measurement data included Extended Warranty one year extension Hand held Analyzer Type 2270 Repair including Conformance Test CHAPTER 16 Specifications with Certificate No measurement data included ACCREDITED CALIBRATION 2250 CAl Initial Accredited Calibration Hand Held Analyzer Type 2250 2250 CAF Accredited Calibration Hand Held Analyzer Type 2250 2270 CAl Initial Accredited Calibration Hand Held Analyzer Type 2270 2270 CAF Accredited Calibration Hand Held Analyzer Type 2270 Compliance with Standards ce Zealand CE mark indicates compliance with the EMC Directive and Low Voltage Directive C Tick mark indicates compliance with the EMC requirements of Australia and New Safety EN IEC 61010 1 ANSI UL 61010 1 and CSA C22 2 No 1010 1 Safety requirements for electrical equipment for measurement control and laboratory use EMC Emission industrial environments B Limits EN IEC 61000 6 3 Generic emission standard for residential commercial and light CISPR 22 Radio disturbance characteristics of information technology equipment Class FCC Rules Part 15 Complies with the limits for a Class B digital device IEC 61672 1 IEC 61260 IEC 60651 and IEC 60804 Instrumentation standards Complies with Canadian standard
94. 2270 Microphones Table C 5 Overview of Type 2250 2270 Microphones Micro Optimised Free field 1 dB Free field 2 dB Application p Dynamic Range Frequency Frequency phone For Range Range 4184 A Weatherproof Free field 0 28 8 150 dB A 3 6 Hz 15 0 kHz 2 5 Hz 16 5 kHz 200 V or 90 and 6 6 Hz 22 4 kHz 5 6 Hz 22 4 kHz Diffuse field 4189 Standard Free field and 16 6 140 dB A 6 8 Hz 22 4 kHz 4 2 Hz 22 4 kHz gt Prepolarized Diffuse field 7 8 Hz 22 4 kHz 6 3 Hz 22 4 kHz 232 Hand held Analyzers Types 2250 and 2270 User Manual Table C 5 Cont Overview of Type 2250 2270 Microphones Micro Optimised Free field 1 dB Free field 2 dB Application p Dynamic Range Frequency Frequency phone For Range Range 4190 Standard Free field and 16 5 140 dB A 4 0 Hz 22 4 kHz 2 6 Hz 22 4 kHz gt 200 V Diffuse field 6 7 Hz 22 4 kHz 5 7 Hz 22 4 kHz 4191 High Levels Free field and 25 6 152 dB A 3 6 Hz 22 4 kHz 2 5 Hz 22 4 kHz 200 V Diffuse field 6 6 Hz 22 4 kHz 5 6 Hz 22 4 kHz 4193 Low Low 23 2 152 dB A 0 56 Hz 22 4 kHz 0 45 Hz 22 4 kHz Frequencies Frequencies 44 6 152 dB Z 6 3 Hz 22 4 kHz 5 5 Hz 22 4 kHz 4950 Standard Free field and 16 4 140 dB A 4 3 Hz 19 0 kHz 3 2 Hz 20 0 kHz Prepolarized Diffuse field 6 3 Hz 19 0 kHz 5 6 Hz
95. 233C 10 the lower frequency limit will be optimized to match the specifications for the accelerometer DETECTORS Parallel Detectors on every measurement A or B weighted switchable broadband detector channel with three exponential time weightings Fast Slow Impulse one linearly averaging detector and one peak detector C or Z weighted switchable as for A or B weighted Overload Detector Monitors the overload outputs of all the frequency weighted channels MEASUREMENTS X frequency weightings A or B Y frequency weightings C or Z V frequency weightings A B C or Z U time weightings F or S Q exchange rate 4 5 or 6 dB N number between 0 1 and 99 9 For Storage Full statistics For Display and Storage Start Time Stop Time Overload Elapsed Time Lxeq Lyeq Lye Lye LGeg Laegk LxSmax LxFmax LXximax Lysmax LyFmax Lyimax LxSmin LxFmin Lximin Lysmin LYFmin Lyimin LxIeq LYIeq Laleg Laeg LAFTeq LarteqLaeq Time Remaining Lep d Lep dv E Dose Proj Dose Lypeak VPeaks VPeaks VPeaks gt NNNaB gt 137dB gt 135dB TVpeak Lavua TWA TWAv DoseUQ Proj DoseUQ Only for Display as Numbers or Quasi analogue Bars Lxs LxF Lx Lys LyF Ly Lxs SPL LXF SPL LXI SPL Lys SPL LYF SPL Ly SPL Lyng Or Lxung Lxne or Lxune Trig Input Voltage Lxn2 Or Lxun2 Lxns Or Lxuns Lypeak 1s Lyn OF Lxun1 Lxn4 Or Lxung Lxn7 or Lxun7 Std Dev MEASURING RANGES When using Microphone Type 4189 Dynamic Range
96. 28 Transducer Setup sec vestcissictves cetce aa aaa aa aa a a a aeai 228 Calibration iStone aaite aaa dai eaaa aa iaa aea 230 C 3 Galibration Setup iriiria a aiaa enaa aia aE 231 C 4 Type 2250 2270 Microphones ee ceeeeeeeeeeeneeeeneeeeeeseeeeeeneeeeneeseaeeeeeeeeeeeeee 231 APPENDIX D Preferentes cessiecceieucecaicd eavartdausede eclicaetuiaadauudessantauniccucdivecinudininads nea cottadianldiae 233 Di Display SettimOS iaee Ses seed sence casa tes dec feud ceavanes feed sens daane a ee us descents 233 D 2 Power SOTINGS aisseta testis aa e eh ded ee e aaa aa a eaa Ga dele ae 234 D 3 Regional STINGS seeria entei iae ianei aaiae are Aae ea Ea a iate deveeeusacegezeet 235 D4 Storage Stings aii aienea iae aaa a Ee eaaa edee E GO deren ade 235 D 5 Headphone Settings 0 eee eee eeseeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeessaeeseaeeeeseeeseeeeeseeeeaes 236 D 6 SUSClS ces2c2 bed Sh itso dite ented inet a A oa aaae iaeaea 237 Dif Printer Settings lt 3 c4i 05 c10 s0 et eines e e teh ced ited Se OG aed 238 D 8 Modem DynDNs Settings cece eceeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeseaeeeeaeeeseeeseneeesaeeeaes 238 D 9 Network Settings ee eeeeecssneceseeeeseeeeseeeeeaneceanecesnerssaeeeeaeeesaeessaneseenereneeeenaes 240 D 10 Notification Settings 0 0 ee eee eeeeeeeeee sees cece eeeeeeeaeeseaeeseaeeseseeeseeeeesaeeeaes 241 D 11 Web Server Settings 0 ee eee eesseeeseeeesececsenecsenecesnereneeeesaeeeseeessaneseeneseneeeesaes 243 D
97. 3 2 Playing the recording the drop down menu CHAPTER 13 Sound Recording Optional Module If you select Sound then a sound marker is made and the sound for the marked interval is stored in a wave file Only the portion of the sound available in the internal buffer to the right of the small triangle will be stored and the sound marker will only indicate this part Note when selecting an interval for storing or setting a marker the profile display freezes but the sound recording is still updated in the internal buffer The part of the buffer available on the screen will decrease and you will see the small triangle move to the right Be sure not to wait too long in selecting the Sound marker from the drop down menu otherwise the sound recording will disappear from the internal buffer Playing the Recording You play back the sound simply by selecting part of the marker as described in section 11 3 3 and choose Play Sound from the resulting drop down menu The following drop down menu will then appear see Fig 13 2 LOGGING Select one of the four ways of playing a sound Selection will play the part you have selected Repeat Selection will play the selected part until you press Cancel on the pop up menu To End will play the sound from the position you selected the sound marker to the end and finally Al will play the entire sound recording regardless of your selection point 134 Hand held Analyzers Types 2250 an
98. 5 adds MEASUREMENTS For Display and Storage Lan Laen Lday Levening aNd Lnight 176 Hand held Analyzers Types 2250 and 2270 User Manual Selectable Day Evening and Night periods and penalties Periodic Reports Measurement data logged at a pre set report period into files on external SD or CF cards Report Period From 1 min to 24 hours with 1 min resolution Broadband Data and Statistics Stored at each Reporting Interval All Spectrum Data Stored at each Reporting Interval All license for BZ 7223 required Spectral Statistics Stored at each Reporting Interval Full distribution or none license for BZ 7223 required Logging Time From 1 second to 31 days with 1 s resolution or Continuous Data are saved in separate projects for every 24 hrs of logging at a user defined time of day Automatic reboot and resume of operation in case of power failure TRIGGERS Timer Trigger For periodically starting a sound recording license for BZ 7226 required Level Triggers Markers can be set and sound recordings can be started license for BZ 7226 required when a broadband or frequency band level is above or below a specified level Hold off time between triggers can be set You can specify up to four independent Level Triggers to be active at four different times during the day CIC CHARGE INJECTION CALIBRATION Injects an internally generated electrical signal in parallel with the microphone diaphragm A manual
99. 5 dB or 113 85 dB For diffuse or pressure field types the calibration level is either 94dB or 114dB The calibration process automatically determines the correct level e Calibrator Serial Number type in the serial number for your calibrator The calibrator will be documented in the calibration history Vibration Calibration To calibrate an accelerometer use Calibration Exciter Type 4294 It provides a stable accel eration of 10 m s at 159 Hz The procedure is very similar to the Standard Calibration procedure for Sound Calibration described above however follow the procedure for mount ing the accelerometer to the exciter as described in the user manual for Type 4294 Electrical Calibration To calibrate the Direct input use a stable sinusoidal voltage at a frequency between 150 Hz and 10 kHz The procedure is very similar to the Standard Calibration procedure for Sound Calibration described above however without the transducer mounting procedure Manual Calibration If no calibrator is available or a known amplification is introduced i e by analyzing a tape recorded signal then you can type the sensitivity directly into the Sensitivity field The analyzer will be regarded as un calibrated and the text Uncal will appear in the status field Calibration History You select the calibration history by tapping on the Calibration History link on the Calibra tion Details screen see Fig 4 2 The analyzer saves the last 20
100. 82 2 Annex B k amp Decay is non linear Correlation coefficient in linear regression is too low 14 6 CHAPTER 14 Reverberation Time Software Optional Module The Quality Indicators first column are shown in the spectrum table only The Smileys are shown on e all readouts of reverberation time results e on the position selector as the sum of all quality indicators from each frequency band e on the Room Project as the sum of all quality indicators from each frequency band in the Room reverberation time spectrum The explanation is shown if you tap a smiley except on the small smileys below the frequency bands in the spectrum select the frequency band with the cursor and tap the smiley in the cursor readout Saving and Recalling Results Measurements are saved at position numbers for example Pos 1 or Source Receiver relations for example S RJ within the Project This means there are more measurements stored in the Reverberation Time Projects than the Sound Level Meter Frequency Analyzer or Logging Projects which all contain only one measurement within each project The saved project can be opened using Open in Explorer then you can view all the measured data and even continue measuring at new positions If you view the data using View in Explorer then you can only view the Room Average of the project 155 156 Hand held Analyzers Types 2250 and 2270 User Manual 157 Chapter 15
101. 966 and SI 1996 341 See the table below but please also check your local legislation Table E 1 Occupational Health Setup Parameters and Associated Standards Setup Parameters OSHA MSHA DOD ACGIH ISO Broadband excl Peak A A A A A Broadband Peak Z Z Z Z C Exposure Time N A N A N A 8 00 00 8 00 00 Reference Time Preset 8 00 00 8 00 00 8 00 00 8 00 00 8 00 00 Reference Time user definable 40 00 00 40 00 00 40 00 00 40 00 00 40 00 00 Threshold Level 80 80 80 80 70 Criterion Level 90 90 85 85 85 90 PeaksOver Level 140 140 140 140 140 Exchange Rate for Lav 5 5 4 N A N A Weighting for Lav S S S N A N A a This is user definable the two other PeaksOver Level parameters are preset to 137 and 135 dB resp Reference Time RC RC Classification Rumble Hiss RV Reference Time is used for calculation of Sound Exposure Level Lep a v or Time Weighed Average TWA with a reference time other than 8 hours Room Criteria is for rating room noise The rating is determined based on the PSIL value and gets the Classification R for Rumble if the spectrum is rich in low frequency sound 16 Hz to 500 Hz the Classification H for Hiss if the spectrum is rich in high frequency sound 1 kHz to 4 kHz the Classification N for Neutral if it is not R or H or the Classification RV for Vibration and Rattle if the spectrum at low frequencies 16 Hz to 63 Hz is likely to
102. 996 2 Annex Du eeeeceeeeeeeteeeeeeneeneeeees 162 italian EAW irisa inanin anaana 162 Setting up the Analyzer 37 Setting up the Generator ssec 102 Setting up the Instrument for Enhanced Logging e eee eeeeeeeeeeees 122 for Frequency Analysis 0 0 00 cece eeeee reece 101 for LOGGING eee eee eee cess eeeeeteeeeteeeeeeeeeeees 108 for Reverberation Time Measurements 141 for use with Frequency Analyzer Project Template ccesecsesseccssesessessens 127 for use with Sound Level Meter Template 127 Setting up the Instrument for Tone ASSCSSMEM cccceeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeseeeeeeaeees 160 Setup Parameters Setup SCIEN naiaiaee ea at eet INDEX 259 Shortcut Bat acctcistwintesaiai a aA A 47 SIES nae se ae aes Sse 105 198 252 SIGS ee raaa a a T 105 198 252 SLM Sound Level Metel ccceeceeeeteeeeeeee 37 Slot for Compact Flash CF Cards c eeeee 8 Slot for Secure Digital SD Cards cece eeeeeeeeee 9 Slow Time Weighting 37 Small Tripods iann ANE 12 Smiley s Tone ASSESSMEN1 ccceceeeeeeeteeeeseteeesenaeeess 167 SMUlCYS eee cece ceeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeas Software Version SONG Sound Calibrator wt Sound Category kaiina Sound Exposure E seceeceeseeeeeereeceeeeeeeeneeeneeaees Sound Exposure Level Lag Sound Field Correction Sound Level
103. BZ 7227 only b Available for Frequency Analysis Software BZ 7223 only 212 Hand held Analyzers Types 2250 and 2270 User Manual A 21 Post processing Table A 22 Post processing Parameters Parameter Values Comment Ensemble Averaging No Yes Set to Yes to average each of the position decays into an average decay called the ensemble average or Room average The averaged decays of the room can then be displayed in the Decay View T30 Room T20 Room and EDT Room will be calculated from the Room average Set to No for no ensemble averaging There will be no decays available for the room T30 Room T20 Room and EDT Room will be calculated as averages of the T30 T20 and EDT resp for all the positions Wide Band RT Bottom 50 Hz to Wide Band RT Top 1 1 octave 63 Hz 8 kHz 1 3 octave 50 Hz 10 kHz The settings of Wide Band RT Bottom and Wide Band RT Top control the range of frequency bands used in the averaging of the wide band parameters available below the Spectrum and Decay graphs Example Set Wide Band RT Bottom to 100 Hz and Top to 2 kHz then the average of the frequency bands from 100 Hz to 2 kHz will be calculated for the current position as e T30 100 Hz 2 kHz e T20 100 Hz 2 kHz e EDT 100 Hz 2 kHz and for the Room as e T30 Room 100 Hz 2 kHz e T20 Room 100 Hz 2 kHz e EDT Room 100 Hz 2 kHz Wide Band RT Top Wide Band RT Bott
104. CIC can be performed whenever there is no measurement in progress An automatic CIC can be performed at the start and end of a logging measurement The CIC can be set to occur up to 4 times in each 24 hour period CIC Duration 10s Software Specifications Sound Recording Option BZ 7226 Sound Recording Option BZ 7226 is enabled with a separate license It works with all the software for Type 2250 2270 Sound Level Meter Frequency Analysis Logging Software Enhanced Logging Software and Reverberation Time Software Sound Recording requires a CF or SD Card for data storage RECORDED SIGNAL A B C or Z weighted signal from the measurement transducer AUTOMATIC GAIN CONTROL The average level of the signal is kept within a 40 dB range or the gain can be fixed SAMPLING RATE AND PRE RECORDING Sound is buffered for the pre recording of sound This allows the beginning of events to be recorded even if they are only detected later Sampling Paar Sound Memory Rate kHz recording s Quality KB s 8 100 Low 16 16 50 Fair 32 24 30 Medium 48 48 10 High 96 FUNCTIONS WITH BZ 7222 AND BZ 7223 Manual Control of Recording Recording can be manually started and stopped during a measurement using a pushbutton or an external signal Automatic Control of Recording Start of recording when measurement is started Minimum and Maximum recording time can be preset FUNCTIONS WITH BZ 7224 AND BZ 7
105. DNS Settings No other settings are necessary The modem is initialized with the following command string AT lt cr gt AT amp FEOV1 amp C1 amp D2 lt cr gt If your modem needs extra commands for initialization they can be defined in Extra Init If you are not familiar with the command strings for modems then please consult the documentation from the manufacturer of the modem or web sites such as www modemsite com www modemhelp org or support microsoft com default aspx kb 164660 Note Before you connect or disconnect a modem or switch it on or off the Modem parameter should be set to Disabled or the analyzer must be in standby mode or switched completely off the latter is recommended Compact Flash Modems Compact flash modems can be inserted directly in the compact flash socket of the analyzer see item 9 in Fig 2 2 Analogue Modems The following modems have been tested e CF 56 K Modem Card V90 and V92 from Socket see details on Web site www socketmobile com e 56K CompactModem V92 from Pretec see details on Web site www pretec com GSM Modems The following modems have been tested e Compact GPRS from Pretec see details on Web site www pretec com Note The SIM card should be usable without pin code Modems with RS 232 Serial interfaces Modems with an RS 232 serial interface can be connected using a Compact Flash to Serial converter inserted in the compact flash slot of the analyzer Switch off the
106. Decay Time 3 s is adequate for most ordinary rooms but should be increased for larger halls or reverberation rooms 6 Set Excitation to Impulse if you want to measure using the impulse method go to step 14 otherwise select Interrupted Noise 141 142 14 2 1 14 2 2 Hand held Analyzers Types 2250 and 2270 User Manual Interrupted Noise Method 7 Set the number of decays you want to measure per position the analyzer automatically controls the generator measurement of the decays and averaging the decays 8 Set the Generator as required set Generator Type External if you want to control an external generator details in Appendix A otherwise leave it at Internal to use the internal generator 9 Select Noise Type for the internal generator Pink noise is typically used 10 Adjust the level of the internal generator output to match the input of the power amplifier used by setting Level re 1 V Note You can manually turn the generator on and off by tapping on the loudspeaker icon in the status field 11 Set the Escape Time allowing you to leave the room before the generator is turned on during the measurement see Fig 14 3 12 Set Build up Time to allow the excitation noise to reach a steady level before the measurement starts 1 s is adequate in most ordinary rooms but should be increased for larger halls or reverberation rooms 13 Select the Sound Source used to optimise the frequency res
107. Display Screen A high contrast colour touch sensitive screen 13 Main Menu Icon This calls up the Main Menu which allows you to navigate immediately to all the main functions of the instrument such as Setup Explorer or Data browser Preferences and the Calibration procedure 14 Power on Pushbutton Turns the instrument on and off If held in for 1 second the instrument goes into standby mode if held in for more than 4 seconds it turns the instrument off 15 Stylus Stored in a holder on the side of the instrument for use on the touch sensitive screen You can choose to use the stylus or the hardkeys depending on your preference and the measurement situation Also see section 5 4 5 16 Secondary Microphone This is used to add recorded comments to measurements and is positioned on the underside of the instrument 17 Top Socket This is the main microphone input socket for the instrument The Measurement Microphone and Preamplifier items 1 and 2 respectively are normally connected directly to this socket For more details see section 2 3 18 Tripod Mounting Thread Use this to mount the instrument onto the tripod and or tripod extension 6 2 3 2 3 1 2 3 2 Hand held Analyzers Types 2250 and 2270 User Manual 19 Wrist Strap Tripod Mounting Thread Use this to attach the wrist strap to the instrument for added security or use it to mount the instrument onto the tripod and or tripod extension
108. Each timer can be repeated Measurements are automatically stored when completed BACK ERASE The last 5 s of data can be erased without resetting the measurement MEASUREMENT STATUS On Screen Information such as overload and running paused are displayed on screen as icons Traffic Lights Red yellow and green LEDs show measurement status and instantaneous overload as follows e Yellow LED flash every 5 s stopped ready to measure Green LED flashing slowly awaiting calibration sig nal e Green LED on constantly measuring Yellow LED flashing slowly paused measurement not stored e Red LED flashing quickly intermittent overload calibration failed CALIBRATION Initial calibration is stored for comparison with later calibrations CHAPTER 16 Specifications 173 Acoustic Using Sound Calibrator Type 4231 or custom calibrator The calibration process automatically detects the calibration level when Sound Calibrator Type 4231 is used Electrical Uses internally generated electrical signal combined with a typed in value of microphone sensitivity Calibration History Up to 20 of the last calibrations made are listed and can be viewed on the instrument SIGNAL MONITORING The input signal can be monitored using an earphone headphones connected to the headphone socket or it can be fed to the output socket Output Signal Input conditioned A B C or Z weighted Gain Adjustment 60 dB to 60 dB
109. Evening Start 00 00 00 to 23 59 59 Determines the start of the evening period for the Levening calculation Night Start 00 00 00 to 23 59 59 Determines the start of the night period for the Lpight Calculation Evening Penalty 0 to 20 dB The Evening Penalty will be added to Levening when calculating Laden Night Penalty 0 to 20 dB The Night Penalty will be added to Lyight when calculating Lyon a For Enhanced Logging BZ 7225 templates only Note If Evening Start is set between Night Start and Day Start then the Levening Parameter will be undefined A 19 Occupational Health Table A 20 Occupational Health Parameters Parameter Values Comment Exposure Time 00 01 00 to 1 00 00 00 Set the Exposure Time to the actual time that you are exposed to noise during a workday Used for calculation of Leng and Lep ay Note Exposure Time can be changed after the measurement has been done APPENDIX A Setup Parameters Table A 20 Cont Occupational Health Parameters Parameter Values Comment Reference Time 00 01 00 to 5 00 00 00 Set the Reference Time as required for calculation of Sound Exposure Level or Time Weighed Average with a reference time other than 8 hours Used for calculation of Lep gy and TWA Threshold Level 0 to 140 dB Any sound levels below the threshold value do not contribute to the Dose measurement data The time resolution for this calculatio
110. Event Marker Use of Stylus Tap and hold the stylus on the profile display at the position where you want the marker to start This will freeze the display and show a cursor at the position of the stylus Then drag the stylus left or right to the position where you want the marker to end This will display a second cursor Next remove the stylus from the display and a drop down menu appears showing the five markers you have specified in the setup Select the marker you require The marker is displayed above the profile the cursors disappear and the profile unfreezes and progresses as it did before you tapped on the screen Note If you select Sound Marker then the sound for this part will be recorded see Chapter 12 for details Marking Measurement While it is Paused The measurement parameter is displayed as a profile while the measurement is paused CHAPTER 11 Logging Optional Module You can use the Stylus to Mark the Sound Categories Tap and hold the stylus in the profile display at the position where you want the marker to start This will display a cursor at the position of the stylus Then drag the stylus left or right to the position where you want the marker to end This will display a second cursor Next remove the stylus from the display and a drop down menu appears showing the five markers you have specified in the setup Select the marker you require The marker is displayed above the profile and the cursors disappear
111. Fmax Lyxsmax Lyxtmax y LyFmax y Lysmax Lytmax Minimum Time weighted Sound Levels These parameters require license for BZ 7223 and measurement of spectra APPENDIX B Measurement Parameters 221 LxFmin Lxsmin Lytmin LYFmin Lysmin Lytmin US Occupational Health Parameters Lavra Special Parameters Lxfeq also called Lyym Lyteq Lateqbaeq LarFteg also called Larrms LAFTeq Aeq SIL average of LZeq octave band levels 500 Hz 1000 Hz 2000 Hz and 4000 Hz PSIL average of LZeq octave band levels 500 Hz 1000 Hz and 2000 Hz SIL3 average of Lzeq octave band levels 1000 Hz 2000 Hz and 4000 Hz Lweq f1 f2 average of power values for Lyeg frequency bands from f1 Hz to f2 Hz Voltage updated at approx 5 s intervals and logged with Logging Period intervals Trig Input Voltage requires Trigger Input is set to Voltage for Monitoring The following parameters are available per set of logged parameters Overload in Start time Stop Time Elapsed Time excl pauses The Statistics can be logged to calculate Percentile Levels and Std Dev per logging interval Up to three or all of the following Spectrum parameters can be logged and displayed on the spectrum display Lweq Lwrmax Lwsmax Lwrmin Lwsmin The Statistics can be logged in Periodic Reports to Calculate Percentile Levels as spectra a These parameters require license for BZ 7223 and measurement of spectra 222 B 4
112. Gateway Address to a gateway for routing to another network Selectable if Set IP Address Manually Set DNS Automatically This will automatically obtain the DNS Manually You have to set the DNS Preferred DNS The IP address of the primary DNS server Alternate DNS The IP address of the secondary DNS server MAC Address The MAC Address of the network adaptor LAN or WLAN in use MAC Media Access Control Address is a unique identifier assigned to the network adaptor This field is for information only Status The status of the network connection either Operational or Non operational e Operational the network adaptor can be used for a connection e Non Operational the network adaptor cannot be used Parameters for Wireless LAN Only Name 80 8 4 Hand held Analyzers Types 2250 and 2270 User Manual Name SSID of the network you want to connect to Update the name either by e entering a name directly or e tapping on the Available Networks and selecting a name from the list Available Networks Tap the line to get a list of available networks Tap a name in the list to connect to this network The name is inserted in the Name line above this line Each network name is preceeded with Signal Strength information ranging from Excellent displayed as ee e e down to No Signal displayed as no dots at all Security Select the security as required by the network Open Shared WPA PSK or WPA2 PSK Open and Sh
113. Hand held Analyzers Types 2250 and 2270 User Manual 15 4 2 Fig 15 5 Left Setting the Low Freq Last Band Setting up a Measurement Manually ISO 1996 2 Annex D When tone assessment according to ISO 1996 2 Annex D is selected you can set the division between the Low and Middle frequency range the division between the Middle and High frequency range and also the limits for the level differences between adjacent bands see Fig 15 5 You can also refer to Fig 15 1 for a definition of the frequency ranges and level differences Output Socket Signal Occupational Health Output Socket Signal Occupational Health parameter Generator Right Setting the Level Tone Assessment Difference Low Tone Assessment Tone Assessmen parameter Tone Standard ISO 19 Tone Standard Adjustment Adjustment Low Freq Last Band Middle Freq Last Band Level Difference Low Level Difference Middle Level Difference High Level Difference Middle Level Difference High 5 07 49 You set the division between the Low Middle frequency range by selecting the required value for the last or highest band in the Low frequency range from 12 5 Hz to 315 Hz and set the division between the Middle High frequency range by selecting the required value for the last or highest band in the Middle frequency range from 160 Hz to 20 kHz The ISO method does not state which frequency weighting should be used so i
114. Input Impedance gt 47 KQ Precision 0 1 V OUTPUT SOCKET Connector Triaxial LEMO Max Peak Output Level 4 46 V Output Impedance 50 Q HEADPHONE SOCKET Connector 3 5 mm Minijack stereo socket Max Peak Output Level 1 4 V Output Impedance 32 Q in each channel MICROPHONE FOR COMMENTARY Microphone which utilises Automatic Gain Control AGC is incorporated in underside of instrument Used to create voice annotations for attaching to measurements CAMERA TYPE 2270 ONLY Camera with fixed focus and automatic exposure is incorporated in underside of instrument Used to create image annotations for attaching to measurements Image Size 640 x 480 pixels Viewfinder size 212 x 160 pixels Format jpg with exif information EXTERNAL DC POWER SUPPLY REQUIREMENTS Used to charge the battery pack in the instrument Voltage 8 24 V DC ripple voltage lt 20 mV Current Requirement min 1 5A Power Consumption lt 2 5 W without battery charging lt 10 W when charging Cable Connector LEMO Type FFA 00 positive at centre pin EXTERNAL AC MAIN SUPPLY ADAPTOR Part No ZG 0426 Supply Voltage 100 120 200 240 VAC 47 63 Hz Connector 2 pin IEC 320 BATTERY PACK Part No QB 0061 Rechargeable Li lon battery Voltage 3 7 V Capacity 4800 mAh nominal Typical Operating Time gt 8 hours Battery Cycle Life gt 500 complete charge discharge cycles Battery Indicator Remaining battery capacity and
115. JOOS eee eeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeesaeeseaeeeeaeeseaeeseeeeeeeaeeseaeeseeeeeeeeee 56 6 2 Selecting Default Measurement Job Path cceeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeaees 57 6 3 Recalling Measurement eeeeeceeeseeeeneeeeeeeteeeeeeaeeseseeeeeaeeseaeeseaeeeeeneeeeaeeeeaes 57 Viewing Data isni i e Saal weet bad yet ee Pe 57 Re using Setups from Projects eee eeeceeeseeeseeceeeeeeeeeeeeaeeseaeeseeeeeeeeeseaeeesaes 59 Viewing or Listening to Annotations and Metadata 59 CHAPTER 7 Connection to PC or Mobile Phone ccccsseeeeesseeesseeesseeeeeseeeesseeeeeseenseeeees 61 Fete IATROCUCTION a cock e late ee A AA hated a eshte culate 61 7 2 Transferring Measurement Data to Your PC ooo eee ceeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeneaes 63 7 3 Post processing and Reporting cecceeceeeseeeeseeeeeeeeseeeeeaeeseaeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeaes 63 7 4 Internet Browser for On line Display and Control of the Analyzer s 64 CHAPTER 8 Advanced Use of the Analyzer Tipsand FE BIS sass teat anina nionane tenes odete Sanaan aaa iaia aaa e aaa aa Aaaa iaiaaeaia ba stasa 67 8 1 Setting your Preferences on the Analyzer ssessssesereseeereerieerierrierrrerrrerreere 67 Display Settings neiere ioiei eia e a a e e e e a eh te 67 Power Seit i ect re rara a a eet a raa e a e e aE E in 68 Regional Sating S iene anenee e e e e e tele 70 Storage Settings e n aa a a oa a a a a a E et 70 Headphone Settings ce eeessceesececssneceeneeesneeeseee
116. L evening night L en Lan Statistics to Calculate Percentile Levels and Std Dev Spectrum Parameters Lweq Lwermax a b These parameters require license for BZ 7223 and measurement of spectra These parameters are available for Enhanced Logging BZ 7225 only These parameters require license for BZ 7223 and measurement of spectra 218 B 2 B 2 1 Hand held Analyzers Types 2250 and 2270 User Manual Lwsmax Lwemin Lwsmin Statistics to Calculate Percentile Levels as Spectra CIC Results CIC 1 Result e CIC 1 Dev from Reference e CIC 2 Result e CIC 2 Dev from Reference e CIC 3 Result e CIC 3 Dev from Reference e CIC 4 Result e CIC 4 Dev from Reference Periodic Reports For Enhanced Logging Software BZ 7225 Parameters measured within a Periodic Report interval Equivalent Continuous Sound Levels LxXeq s Lyeq LceqLAeq Sound Exposure Level LxE Lyg Peak Sound Level j Lypeak TVpeak Maximum Time weighted Sound Levels LyFmax Lyxsmax Lyxtmax LyFmax These parameters require license for BZ 7223 and measurement of spectra These parameters are available for Logging BZ 7224 and Enhanced Logging BZ 7225 only These parameters are available for Enhanced Logging BZ 7225 only APPENDIX B Measurement Parameters Lysmax e Lytmax Minimum Time weighted Sound Levels LxFmin Lxsmin Lyxtmin Lyrmin e Lysmin LYimin ISO EU Occ
117. LOGGING SOFTWARE BZ 7225 Memory Card for Hand held Analyzers Note the upgrade from Logging Software BZ 7224 to Enhanced Logging Software BZ 7225 BZ 7225 UPG does not include memory card ACCESSORIES AND COMPONENTS AVAILABLE SEPARATELY ANALYZER ZG 0444 CALIBRATION Type 4231 Type 4226 Type 4228 2250 CAI 2250 CAF 2250 CTF 2250 TCF 2270 CAI 2270 CAF 2270 CTF 2270 TCF MEASURING Type 3592 AOQ 0440 D 015 AO 0441 D 030 AO 0441 D 100 AO 0646 AO 0697 D 030 AO 0697 D 100 AO 0727 D 015 Charger for QB 0061 Battery Pack Sound Calibrator fits in KE 0440 Multifunction Acoustic Calibrator Pistonphone Accredited Initial Calibration of Type 2250 Accredited Calibration of Type 2250 Traceable Calibration of Type 2250 Conformance Test of Type 2250 with certificate Accredited Initial Calibration of Type 2270 Accredited Calibration of Type 2270 Traceable Calibration of Type 2270 Conformance Test of Type 2270 with certificate Outdoor Measuring Gear see Product Data BP 1744 Signal cable LEMO to BNC 1 5m 5 ft Microphone Extension Cable 10 pin LEMO 3 m 10 ft Microphone Extension Cable 10 pin LEMO 10 m 33 ft Sound Cable LEMO to Minijack 1 5 m 5 ft Microphone Extension Cable 10 pin LEMO length 3m 10 ft Microphone Extension Cable 10 pin LEMO length 10 m 33 ft Signal cable LEMO to BNC Female length 1 5 m 5 ft JP 1041 UA 0587 UA 0801 UA 1317 UA 1404 UA 1672 UL 1
118. Level 140 dB 130 dB 120 dB 110 dB 100 dB 90 dB 80 dB 70 dB The recorded signal is stored as a 16 bit wave file which has a dynamic range of up to 96 dB When playing back on the analyzer the dynamic range of the output is approx 75 dB When playing back on a PC it might be even lower Set Peak Recording Level to fit the signal The values for Peak Recording Level take the sensitivity of the attached transducer into account The values shown in the list here are nominal values for a Type 4189 or 4190 microphone Hint Monitor the Lpeak value during a trial measurement before selecting the Peak Recording Level Pre recording Time b 0 to 110s Recording is started the Pre recording Time before the trigger conditions are fulfilled e g 5s means the recording will be started 5s before you hit the Manual Event pushbutton This is possible because the recording is done continuously in an internal buffer ready to be saved as a wave file The Pre recording Time is limited by this buffer size and the Recording Quality Quality Pre recording Time limit Low 110s Fair 50s Medium 30s High 10s Post recording Time 0 to 300s Use this parameter to specify how much extra you want to be recorded after the trigger conditions are no longer fulfilled Duration Limit On Off Use this parameter to enable the Minimum Duration and Maximum Duration parameters for overruling the duration of the sound recording
119. LyImin by Setup Frequency Weightings L Fmin Broadband excl Peak parameter Lysmin Lyimin V frequency weightings A B C or Z LXF SPL controlled by Setup Frequency Weightings Lxs SPL Broadband Peak parameter LxSPL LYF SPL U time weightings F or S controlled by Lys SPL Setup Occupational Health Time LyisPL Weighting for Lav parameter LavuQ Q exchange rate 4 5 or 6 dB controlled by Setup Occupational Health Exchange Rate for Lav parameter a For Logging BZ 7224 templates only b Requires license for Sound recording BZ 7226 A 15 Triggers Table A 16 Trigger parameters Parameter Values Comment Timer Trigger Trigger On Off Set to On to periodically generate a Timer Event Note Set Sound Recording Recording Control to Timer Event or All Events Timer Period 00 01 00 to The sound recording is triggered with Timer 12 00 00 Period intervals Synchronize with Clock Yes Select Yes to synch the start of sound No recordings with whole minutes or hours Select No if you want the first sound recording Timer Period after start 202 Hand held Analyzers Types 2250 and 2270 User Manual Table A 16 Cont Trigger parameters Parameter Values Comment Duration 00 00 01 to Specifies the duration of the trigger for the 01 00 00 sound recording Note The total time of the sound recording will be P
120. M 16 03 1998 a Requires Tone Assessment Option BZ 7231 Appendix B 215 Measurement Parameters This appendix describes the measurement parameters They are measured in accordance with the setup parameters Please refer to the Glossary in Appendix E for a description of the parameters The following letters are substituted in the parameters that follow to represent the wide range of frequency weightings time weightings and percentile levels available V frequency weightings A B C or Z controlled by Setup Frequency Weightings Broad band Peak parameter X frequency weightings A or B controlled by Setup Frequency Weightings Broad band excl Peak parameter Y frequency weightings C or Z controlled by Setup Frequency Weightings Broad band excl Peak parameter W frequency weightings A B C or Z controlled by Setup Frequency Weightings Spectrum parameter U time weightings F or S controlled by Setup Statistics Spectral Statistics based on parameter R time weightings F or S controlled by Setup Occupational Health Time Weighting for Lav parameter Q exchange rate 4 5 or 6 dB controlled by Setup Occupational Health Exchange Rate parameter N number between 0 1 and 99 9 controlled by Setup Statistics Percentile N parame ter 216 B 1 B 1 1 Hand held Analyzers Types 2250 and 2270 User Manual Total Measureme
121. Measurement 0 ce eeeeeeeees 15 Manual Event Marker Manual Event Pushbutton eee eeeeeeees 4 Map Based Measurement Parameter 008 195 Maps in Reverberation Time Software 150 Markers ccccccccceeeeeseneee 116 199 204 Marking Sound Categories ceceeeeseneeeeneees 115 Maximum Time weighted Sound Levels Aa a E e E ora a e ae Ta E ia 38 Measurement Documenting seessessereeererirerrerisrresrrerrneresrreeree Making your First Measurement Control Parameters for BZ 7222 to BZ 7225 ccccecccccccsseceessseeessseees for Reverberation Time Software BZ 7227 Measurement Feedback in the Status Field Measurement Microphone e cece eeeeeeeeeeeeeee CONNECHING nearer Minette DISCONNECTING 0 cece cece ceee tee eeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeeee Mounting the 3 PIACING the endarnian Measurement MOde cccccccccccccsssseeeeeeeessssseeeeees Measurement Mode Parameter da Measurement Parameters ccseeeeeeeeeeereeeees Measurements Preparing them cccsesccsscsesessesteceseseesneesseesees 80 ReCalling ceccsseesscsessesseeseseesseestoeeesereoneesseesone 57 with Graphical Position Management 150 Measuring for Convenience eeeceeeeseeeeereentees 14 Measuring Tone Assessment s es 164 Metadata 59 60 84 85 86 173 Microphone Measurement ssssseesersrsersersenrnernasrnsensernsierrnnsadne 4 SOCONAA i eera r
122. Microphone Ext Cable 10 m UL 1009 Industrial Grade SD Memory Card for Hand held Analyzer BZ 5298 Environmental Software CD incl Utility software QB 0061 Rechargeable Battery Pack DH 0696 Wrist Strap KE 0440 Travel Bag for 2250 2270 AO 0646 and Sound Cable Accessories 1 5m FB 0699 Hinged Cover for Hand held Analyzer ZG 0426 Mains Power Supply ZG 0444 UAB Battery AO 0440 D 015 Charger Input Cable for QB 0061 AO 0440 D 015 15m Trigger Input Cable gger np 040031 7 1 5m 4231 Sound Calibrator JP 1041 Dual 10 pole Adaptor lt gt KE 0441 Protective Cover UA 1654 5 extra Styli UA 1673 Adaptor for Standard Tripod Mount CHAPTER 2 Assembling your Analyzer 11 2 5 Assembling the Analyzer 2 5 1 Charging the Battery for the First Time Battery Pack QB 0061 comes charged to approximately half capacity on initial delivery Before assembling your analyzer for the first time it is recommended that you fully charge the battery pack by connecting Mains Power Supply ZG 0426 to the external power socket see item 6 in Fig 2 2 It should take approximately 8 10 hours The battery charge light see item 7 in Fig 2 2 shows a steady green light when external power is applied and the battery is charging and a flashing green light when charging has finished You can leave the analyzer with external power on eve
123. No Text string Current N Comment Text string Current N Analyzer Serial No Text string Current C 3 Calibration Setup APPENDIX C Instrument Parameters 231 Table C 4 Calibration Setup parameters Parameter Values Comment Sound Level Calibrator 4231 Select which calibrator to use Custom Calibration Level for Custom 0 00 to 200 00 dB Set calibration level for custom calibrator Sound Level Calibrator re 20 Pa Serial No for 4231 Text string Serial number will be documented in calibration history Serial No for Custom Sound Text string Serial number will be documented in Level Calibrator calibration history Acceleration Calibrator 4294 Select which calibrator to use Custom Calibration Level for custom Acceleration Calibrator 0 to 1000 m s2 Set calibration level for custom calibrator Note When displaying acceleration levels as dB the reference will be 1 m s2 Calibrator Serial No for 4294 Text string Serial number will be documented in calibration history Serial No for Custom Text string Serial number will be documented in Acceleration Calibrator calibration history Calibration Level for Direct O to 1000 V Set calibration level for Direct Input Input Note When displaying voltage levels as dB the reference will be 1 uV Serial No for Direct Input Text string Serial number will be documented in calibration history C 4 Type 2250
124. PC Software This software is supplied on the Environmental Software DVD BZ 5298 which is included with your the analyzer a 7 4 Hand held Analyzers Types 2250 and 2270 User Manual Internet Browser for On line Display and Control of the Analyzer When the analyzer is connected to a network see Fig 7 1 you can connect to the analyzer from a PC or mobile phone using an Internet Browser supporting Java scripts Analyzer settings You access preferences by tapping on the Main Menu icon and selecting Preferences from the list of options the screen shown in Fig 8 1 will appear Tap Web Server Settings or select the plus icon next to Web Server Settings and set the Web Server Parameters to Enabled Define sets of Usernames and Passwords e one set for guest use view only e one set for administrator use of the instrument view and full control See Sections 8 5 and Appendix D Section D 11 for more details When you enter the IP address or Hostname of the analyzer see Sections 8 2 and 8 3 in the address or location bar of the Internet Browser the following screen appears 2250 home page pL Suid p g 0O le http bkflemmingathome dyndns org v 5 X Google 2 ve ae http bkflemmingathome dyndns org Ar B E Page v G Tools v gt Br el amp Kj r We help our customers improve the quality of sound and vibration and related human comfort Downloads Service Hel
125. Parameter Values Comment Alternate DNS XXX XXX XXX XXX The IP address of the secondary DNS server Name Up to 32 characters Name SSID of network you want to connect to Update the name either by entering a name directly or by tapping on the Available Networks and selecting a name from the list Security Open Select security as required by the Shared network WPA PSK Open and Shared are for WEP Wired WPA2 PSK Equivalent Privacy Infrastructure mode WPA PSK is for WPA Wi Fi Protected Access with Pre shared Key also called Personal mode WPA2 PSK WPA2 is an enhanced version of WPA Encryption None Select Encryption as required by the WEP Enabled network AES Enabled None is for Open security TKIP Enabled WEP Enabled is for Open and Shared security AES and TKIP Enabled are for WPA PSK and WPA2 PSK Encryption Key Up to 32 characters Insert the encryption key required by the network The key will be displayed until you press Enter then it will be replaced by kkk D 10 Notification Settings Table D 10 Notification settings Parameter Values Comment Notification Disabled Set to Disabled to disable notifications E mail Set to E mail to send notifications as e mail when SMS an alarm occurs Set to SMS to send notifications as SMS when an alarm occurs See Section 8 4 for the list of alarm types Alarm Settings Internal Battery High A notification is sent if inte
126. Range From typical noise floor to max level for a pure tone signal at 1 kHz 1 3 octave 1 1 to 140 dB Linear Operating Range In accordance with IEC 61260 1 3 octave lt 20 5 dB to 140 dB SAMPLING FOR OCTAVE OR 1 3 OCTAVE STATISTICS X frequency weightings A or B The Statistics can be based on either Lyp or Lyg e Statistics Lxpy1 7 Or Lxsyn1 7 are based on sampling Lyf or Lys respectively every T ms into 1 dB wide classes over 150 dB T 100 for frequency range set to 12 5 20 kHz T 200 for frequency range set to 6 3 20 kHz Full distribution can be saved with measurement MEASUREMENT DISPLAYS Spectrum One or two spectra superimposed A B and C Z broadband bars Table One or two spectra in tabular form Y axis Range 5 10 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 or 160 dB Auto zoom or auto scale available Cursor Readout of selected band INTERNAL GENERATOR Built in pseudo random noise generator Spectrum Selectable between Pink and White Crest Factor Pink Noise 4 4 13 dB White Noise 3 6 11 dB Bandwidth Selectable Lower Limit 50 Hz 1 3 oct or 63 Hz oct Upper Limit 10 kHz 1 3 oct or 8 kHz oct Output Level Independent of bandwidth Max 1 Vrms 0 dB e Gain Adjustment 60 to 0 dB When bandwidth is changed the level for all bands is automatically adjusted to comply with the set output level Correction Filters for sound sources Type 4292 Type 4295 and Type 4296 Flat
127. Stata nte ai a e aaa E 17 INDEX 261 Web Page for Veiwing and Control s es 66 Web Server Settings Parameters 00cce 243 Welcome isai Avil adenine ees 1 What is a Project Template What is a Sound Level Meter eeeeeeeees 37 What is the Hand held Analyzer sses 38 What is Utility Software for Hand held Analyzers BZ 5503 eee 40 Windscreen MOUNTING onai nyni a 12 Windscreen Correction Parameter 00 186 Windscreen Fitted Diffuse Field Icon c0 46 Windscreen Fitted Free field Icon Wrist Strap Mounting Thread ceceeeeseeeeeeeeneee 6 X AL VICW sti Bs earn eee ieee 19 Z Z WEIQNUING oie csevescecesceesctveuseveddesenseseesesssesenenstevveresoet 37 262 Hand held Analyzers Types 2250 and 2270 User Manual HEADQUARTERS Briel amp Kj r Sound amp Vibration Measurement A S DK 2850 N rum Denmark Telephone 45 7741 2000 Fax 45 4580 1405 www bksv com info bksv com Local representatives and service organisations worldwide
128. Technical Documentation Hand held Analyzers Types 2250 and 2270 With Sound Level Meter Software BZ 7222 Frequency Analysis Software BZ 7223 Logging Software BZ 7224 Enhanced Logging Software BZ 7225 Sound Recording Option BZ 7226 Reverberation Time Software BZ 7227 and Tone Assessment Option BZ 7231 User Manual Bruel amp Kj r English BE 1713 26 Hand held Analyzers Types 2250 and 2270 with Sound Level Meter Software BZ 7222 Frequency Analysis Software BZ 7223 Logging Software BZ 7224 Enhanced Logging Software BZ 7225 Sound Recording Option BZ 7226 Reverberation Time Software BZ 7227 and Tone Assessment Option BZ 7231 User Manual BE 1713 26 April 2011 BE 1713 26 April 2011 Safety Considerations This apparatus has been designed and tested in accordance with EN IEC 61010 1 and ANSI UL61010 1 Safety Requirements for Electrical Equipment for Measurement Control and Laboratory Use This manual contains information and warnings which must be fol lowed to ensure safe operation and to retain the apparatus in safe condition Special note should be made of the following Safety Symbols A The apparatus will be marked with this symbol when it is important that you refer to the associated warning statements given in the manual Protective Earth Terminal AN Hazardous Voltage Explosion Hazard The equipment is not designed to be used in potentially explosive environments It should not be op
129. When a transducer is selected you can tap the Calibration History link at the bottom of the transducer details and open the Calibration History screen see Fig 5 1 This screen includes the calibration history for the transducer i e microphone that is currently selected When you have finished viewing or updating the details tap EJ to return to the Transducers screen Calibration The Calibration screen is accessed from the Main Menu and gives you access to the instrument s calibration procedure To calibrate the instrument follow the instructions in the status field For more information refer to section 4 2 When you have finished calibrating or viewing the details tap to return to the measurement screen The Calibration tab at the bottom of the calibration screen allows you to perform and monitor the calibration while the Details tab allows you to view the details of the calibration and the calibrator that are being used to calibrate the instrument While you are viewing the Details tab you can tap the Calibration History link at the bottom of the calibration details and open the Calibration History screen see Fig 5 1 This screen includes the calibration history for the currently selected transducer tap E to return to the Calibration screen Add Note to Current Measurement The Notes screen is accessed from the Main Menu by selecting Add Note to Current Measurement This screen allows you to create a text annotation that you can
130. Z controlled by Setup Frequency Weightings Spectrum parameter f1 Lower freq range controlled by Setup Bandwidth Bottom F for Special Leq f2 Upper freq range controlled by Setup Bandwidth Top Freq for Special Leq Level Trigger 2 Exactly the same parameters as Level Trigger 1 Level Trigger 3 Exactly the same parameters as Level Trigger 1 Level Trigger 4 Exactly the same parameters as Level Trigger 1 a Cc For Enhanced Logging BZ 7225 templates only b Up to four individual trigger settings can be set for non overlapping time periods of the day Requires license for Sound recording BZ 7226 204 Hand held Analyzers Types 2250 and 2270 User Manual A 16 Sound Recording Table A 17 Sound Recording parameters Parameter Values Comment Recording Control Off Determines how recording of the measured signal is controlled Automatic Set to Automatic to start the recording when Manual Event Exclude Event External Event Level Trigger Event Timer Event All Events Image Event the measurement is started and record throughout the measurement only limited by the Maximum Duration Set to Manual Event to start recording manually while measuring when the Manual Event pushbutton is pressed and record until pressing the pushbutton again however take Maximum and Minimum Duration into account Set to Exclude Event to start recording ma
131. a Atare AR 216 For Sound Level Meter Software BZ 7222 Frequency Analysis Software BZ 7223 Logging Software BZ 7224 and Enhanced Logging Software BZ 7225 216 Bid Por die RO O a a a a a Aa deste teat tee 218 For Enhanced Logging Software BZ 7225 c ccccseceeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeennees 218 B 3 Logged Measurement ee ceescseesscesesnecesnereseeeeseeeesanecsanesseneseseeeseeeeesenersaners 220 For Logging Software BZ 7224 and Enhanced Logging Software BZ 7225 220 B 4 Logged 100 ms Measurement ee eeeeeeseeeeneeeeneeeeeeseseeeeeneeteaeeseeeeeeees 222 For Logging Software BZ 7224 and Enhanced Logging Software BZ 7225 222 B 5 Instantaneous Measured Parameters available at any time 00 222 Processed Parameters for Display Ony ce eeceeeeeeeeeeeeeneeseneeeeneeeeneeteeeeeeed 223 Relationship Between Setup and Measurement Parameters 0 00 223 B 6 Reverberation Time Measurement eceesceeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseaeeseeeeeaeees 225 For Reverberation Time Software BZ 7227 cccccecccccccccceceeeeeeceeceseeueeeeeeeeeees 225 APPENDIX C Instrument Parameters cccccecessseseeececeeeeenseseeeeceeeseeesseneeneeeeseeeeeesssnnnees 227 C 1 Current TranSQucer eeeeescceeescecseneceenereseeeesaceeeacessanessenereneeeeeaeessanessnerens 227 C 2 Transducer Database 00 0 eee eee ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeaeeeeeeeseeneeeeaeeseaeeseeeeeeeeeees 2
132. a Peale a a a Ea a Eaa ed ete Eaa 15 Congratulations liee a a tient ine AEE ele Ena 16 3 3 Making a Measurement eee eeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeaeeseaeeeeaeeseaeeseaeeeeeeeeneeee 16 What is a Project Template oo eee eeceeeceeeeneeeeaeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeseaeeeeeeeneees 16 Switching One eee ete ek ele ee eee elie 16 Set the Sound Level Meter Project Template eee eeeeeseeeeeeeeeeneeeeneeeeneees 17 3 4 Save your MEaSureMet eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeaeeceeeeeeeeeeaeeseaeeseaeeseeeeeeeaeeeeaes 21 Viewing the Saved Measurement eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeseeeeseeeeseeeeeaeeeeaeeeeeeeeaeees 21 3 5 Document your Measurement ceeeeeeseeeeneeeeneeeeseeeeeeeeeeneeseaeeeeaeeeeeneeeeaeeeeaes 22 3 6 Switching Off scck asin deta aioe cand a ante ee 25 CHAPTER 4 Gr elre LC aaa eT nD SOO Pa 27 AA s MOCUCHON ains ete Settee teste check sheet ahd sect ea es tbgceetedusta th dey aetegeecene needs 27 4 2 sACOUSTIC Calibration a ki e tod Sec esia a aias aaa her ana a aAa 27 4 3 Sound Level Calibration x tsiesuctieteSeekecs scadestegte aeaa i aa aa a AAE 27 Standard Cal raO e aa a r aa aeea a aa aT aa aaa a AA AE 28 Calibration Settings a e a Ea ota deal aa aa r aa aE Aa araa a A a E 29 4 4 Vibration Galibratiorn Ao ate eenia stag tech ad aaae aa anaa a A iA 30 4 5 Electrical Calibration 00 eee cece eeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeaeeseaeeeeeeeeesaeeesaeeseaeeeeseeeeeaeensaes 30 4 6 Manual Calibration scecvsceisct
133. a a aeo iaa aTa a aaa iaaiiai etatinis 112 11 3 Displaying the Results eeeeeeeeeeiesiesirerrierrierinerinsirnsinnsinnrinnsinnrinnrenereneenn 112 The iProfile View 2 arne ere eienn aaae areosa An iaaa aa ii aisat iaai 112 Marking Sound Categories 0 0 00 eeeeeeeeeeseeeeeneeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeseeeeseeeseaeeseeeeeeees 115 Editing Markers on Profiles ees eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeseaeeseaeeseeeeeeeeessaeeseeeeeeees 117 Annotate Sound Categories ee eeseeseeeereeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeseeeseaeeeseeeeneeeeeeeene 117 Editing Annotations on Profiles 0 eecceeceeeseeeeneeseeeeeneeeeseeeeeeeeseeeseeeeeeees 118 11 4 Saving and Recalling Results 0 eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeaeeseeeseseeeseaeeeeaeeeeeees 119 CHAPTER 12 Enhanced Logging Optional Modulle csccssesssseessseessereesseeensseeeseeees 121 12 1 Setting up the INStrUMent eee eeeeeeeeeeeseeeceeereeneeeseeessaneseenerssnenenaeeeseners 122 12 2 Controlling the Measurement ee cece eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeseaeeeeeeeteneeesaeeeeeees 123 Annotating a Project eee ceeceeeeeeeeneeeeseeeeeeeeeeneeseaeeeeaeeseseeeseneeseaeeeeeeseneeene 124 Recording Soundi ace erioa aria tiaia aes AAT i a a eai a ETa ant 124 12 3 Displaying the Results 000 ee eee eee eeenee cence eeeneeeeaeeseaeeeeaeeseeeeseneeseaeeeeeees 124 The Profile ViOW escceeseeceenereseeeeeeeeeeseeceenerseneeeeaeeseanessenesseneeenaeeenenesenerees 124 Displaying Noise Indicators eeeeeeceeeeeeeeeneee
134. a steady green and the signal is measured and used for calibration Once the calibration has been completed successfully the traffic light indicates a short yellow flash every 5 seconds The Sensitivity is automatically calcu lated and displayed in a pop up together with the deviation from the last calibration Press Yes to accept and use the new sensitivity and save it in the calibration history Press No to disregard the new calibration and continue with the old calibration If the calibration deviates more than 1 5 dB from the initial calibration microphones only then the calibration is stopped without changing the calibration of the instrument CHAPTER 4 Calibration 29 The traffic light will indicate a fast flashing red and an error description will appear in the status field Hint If the microphone is separated from the analyzer using a microphone extension cable then place the analyzer so it can be seen from the location of the microphone Start the calibration process select the Calibration screen and tap the Start button on the screen then go to the microphone and fit the Calibrator onto the microphone switch on the Calibrator and monitor the traffic light on the the analyzer as discussed previously button and remove the calibra 8 Once you have completed the calibration tap the tor It will automatically switch off after a few seconds 4 3 2 Calibration Settings Select the Details tab on the Calibration sc
135. aa ae aaa A A eaa iel Typa 4189 vccccvecsecaccsscescavianrsecccneeveisconedsdeveciwesteess Microphone Extension Cable COnnecting 2c enek decides ale lietatcaies Microphone for commentary i Microphone INput sessseseesssseesreeisererinsrrerrnrrnsrrerrnrrnes Microphone Settings csceeceeseeeeeseeeeeeeeeereeeeeees Microphone Type seses Microphone Type Parameter Microphones Connecting Two Microphones eeeeeeeee 13 Type 2250 2270 eceeecseceeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeates 231 Mid Frequency Range 159 Minijack Earphone Socket wT Minimum Time weighted Sound Levels 216 AFi eeteeees se bee ereeeeanave cnet eeeravaest dh 38 Modem Settings ccccccsceseseeeseeeeeeeeteeeeees 73 244 Modem DynDNS Settings 238 Mounting the Analyzer Onto the Tripod Extension Stem and Tripod 12 Mounting the Measurement Microphone 11 Mounting the Microphone On the Microphone Holder and Tripod 13 Mounting the Outdoor Microphone Kit 13 Mounting the Windscreen eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 12 Mounting Thread for Wrist strap 6 Moving Jobs Projects 57 Multi user Facility ccccccscsssssssreesseteeesssrsesesonees 72 N Navigating in JODS occ eceeeeeeeneeeeeeeneeeeaes 56 Navigation Principles Star Navigation Concept 41 INDEX 257 Navigation PUSNDUIIONS sssseseesseereereesieerrerreerrerrens 5 Navigation Pushbuttons and Stylus NC
136. able frequency band on each position together with quality indicator Positions can be included excluded from Room average SOUND LEVEL SPECTRUM LZF spectrum plus A and C broadband bars Y axis Range 5 10 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 or 160 dB Auto zoom or auto scale available Cursor Readout of selected band Quality indicator for each frequency band REVERBERATION TIME SPECTRUM One or two spectra can be displayed Y axis Range 0 5 1 2 5 10 or 20 s Auto zoom available Cursor Readout of selected band Quality Indicator for each frequency band REVERBERATION TIME SPECTRUM TABLE One or two spectra can be displayed in tabular form DECAY Decay curve for a position or the room average available for each frequency band Display of evaluation range and regression line Readout of Curvature in Y axis Range 5 10 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 or 160 dB Auto zoom or auto scale available MEASUREMENT CONTROL Measurement Sequence Supports measuring at all receiver positions before using another source at a receiver position for all sources before measur ing at a new position at subsequent receiver positions without source in formation or at manually selected source and receiver positions During measurement the instantaneous sound level spectrum is displayed After measurement the reverberation time is displayed Interrupted Noise Excitation Measurements are started manually and can be automatically stored on
137. age that is the decays for each frequency band are averaged over all positions and the RT spectrum is then calculated for the averaged decays How Do We Measure Reverberation Time RT can be measured using either Interrupted Noise with the built in noise generator or by using Impulsive Excitation Schroeder Method such as from a pistol or balloon burst Interrupted Noise Method When using a power amplifier and loudspeaker sound source see Fig 14 2 Type 2250 F 2270 F BZ 7227 will turn its noise generator on and off then measure and display the RT spectrum and decays CHAPTER 14 Reverberation Time Software Optional Module Fig 14 2 Typical RT measurement setup using a loudspeaker source Power Amplifier Type 2734 A 4292 L OmniPower 2250 2270 AQ 0673 Q Cable 10m BRA AO 0523 Cable 10m 3207 Tapping Machine AO 1442 Interface Cable Fig 14 3 Typical RT measurement cycle for the interrupted noise method A dB Sound Level Start Time l Escape l Build up x D i i out 1s ecay time l lt Time a Time re Sag y gt l Decay measurement l l l Generator On 060208 Fig 14 3 shows a typical RT measurement cycle automatically performed by the Analyzer where the different steps are described as follows 1 After Start there is a chosen Escape Time which allows for vacating the measurement site 2 The noise generator is then switched on and waits for the chose
138. aiaa da iaa iadaaa iiaiai aa 190 A 5 Frequency WeiQhtingS eeceeessessseecesneeeeneeeseceseececeanersnereeeeeeeeeessenertnerees 191 AXG Bandwidth yc 2 socssier i ietenisdedaietele E E EE 192 AZ SSTAtiStGS enea a aa fas aaaea a iaaea de aa Ea a aaa a aa aaa 192 A 8 Measurement Control for BZ 7222 to BZ 7225 eeeeeeeeeereerrerrernee 193 A 9 Measurement Control for Reverberation Time Software BZ 7227 195 A 10 Logged Broadband 100 MS sssesseesseeseiesriesrierrrerresiesirnsirnsinerinnsinerenereneeen 196 AST bogged Broadband eneee aaea a enar eaaet a deaa aaa aa Eda aE a ieai 197 aO oola c10 keelele intag EPEE E E 198 aae E E CE E EEE 199 e A EEA e E EEE E 200 A io Lo E E A E E E E 201 A 16 Sound RecordiNg ssie neninn ed i eai aei eria Eaa 204 A 17 Output Socket Signal 0 0 eee eeseecsseeeeeeeeeseeeesaeeseaeeseaeeeesaeeesaeessaeeseeeseneeeees 207 AAS r Liey F CMOOS S22 tao oe tite Ge e Gee ani old Sante Ga eens Gd ae 208 A 19 Occupational Health cece cee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeaeeseaeeeseeeeseaeeseaeeseeeeeeeeene 208 A20 Ggnerator ierte ah Bintan Ta aaa e ei 210 A 21 Post pr c ssSiNgiis sys ioini ii e a aee a e Eae Ear aa Eaa 212 A 22 Tone Assessment sssessiesrresrresrrertnertnrtnnntnnrtnnrtnarrnnrrnacrnacrnectnnenneennsennnenn 213 APPENDIX B Measurement Parameters ssssuuusssennnennnnnnnunnnnnnunnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nn nnnnnnnnn nnana 215 B Tota Measurement ie aaa aeaaeae aa
139. ailed information about the quality indication See the description of smiley s at the end of this chapter Table The header row of the table contains from left to right The RT selector EDT T20 or T30 which determines which RT to display in the table rows below It is also linked to the main Spectrum selector and main Decay selector The Frequency selector which includes decrement and increment Pg buttons determines the frequency of the readouts in the table rows below The frequency selector is linked to the Spectrum cursor and the frequency of the selected decay Readout of the RT value for the current measurement before it is saved to a position Each row of the table contains from left to right A checkmark x controlling whether the position is included or excluded from the Room average Tap it to include check or exclude uncheck the position All positions are by default included in the Room average The position Tap it to get a drop down with two options Select and View Annotations Use Select to select the position and View Annotations to view the list of annotations for the position You can add annotations on the position from this view as described in Chapter 6 Possible annotation indicated by fi Tap it to view the list of annotations for the position The readout of the RT parameter at the frequency determined by the RT selector and Frequency selector in the table header row There might be a smiley
140. alyzer e Create users on the analyzer e Upgrade software on the analyzer e Install software licenses on the analyzer Using this software measurements on the analyzer can be controlled from your PC and displayed on line using the same user interface on the PC as on the analyzer Data transferred to the PC are organised in Archives View the measurement data in the Archives or edit the project templates Data in the archives can be exported to e Noise Explorer Type 7815 e Evaluator Type 7820 e Protector Type 7825 e Qualifier Type 7831 31 e Predictor Type 7810 e Lima Type 7812 e Acoustic Determinator Type 7816 e Microsoft Excel for further post processing and reporting Sound Recordings can be input to the Briiel amp Kjer PULSE analyzer Platform for further analysis please contact your local Briiel amp Kj r representative for further information Post processing and Reporting The software modules are further enhanced by Briiel amp Kjer s post processing software suite including Utility Software for Hand held Analyzers BZ 5503 for data transfer setup and remote display included with your analyzer Noise Explorer Type 7815 for viewing data Evaluator Type 7820 for assessing environmental noise Protector Type 7825 for assessing workplace noise and Qualifier Light Type 7831 for documenting reverberation time measurements For further information please refer to the on line help included with the relevant
141. ameters The first measurement parameter is displayed in a larger font size for better readability CHAPTER 10 1 1 or 1 3 octave Frequency Analysis Optional Module 103 The XL View increases the size of the first parameter readout to a 4 digit full screen display including decimal point The Spectrum view which only appears as a tab if Frequency Analysis Software BZ 7223 is enabled shows two different spectra parameters being measured simultaneously In the example in Fig 10 2 Lzpmax and Lzp are being viewed at the same time Note the Reference Spectrum and Main Spectrum at icons indicating which spectrum belongs to which parameter 1 Select which spectra to view by tapping the parameter fields in the two lines above the spectrum display These lines also include readouts of the spectrum values highlighted by the spectrum cursor Tap the spectrum at the frequency of interest or just tap anywhere in the spectrum area and then move the cursor to the position of interest using the left and right arrow pushbuttons To the right of the spectrum two broadband bars of the same parameters are also displayed Fig 10 2 Displaying the results spectrum screen 1 3 octave Start Time 29 11 2006 13 29 15 Spectrum 2 Scale the Y axis left hand vertical scale of the graphical display by tapping on the scale and accessing the drop down menu see Fig 10 3 You can also select the spectrum cursor and press
142. amplifier combination carefully into the microphone holder so that it grips onto the body of the microphone and preamplifier Ensure that the microphone cable sits properly in the plastic guide Once you have carried out these instructions you are ready to start measuring see Chapter 3 2 5 4 Measuring for Convenience Measurements that need to be done at short notice with no particular accuracy can be carried out by simply holding the instrument or using any combination of hardware components and accessories shown in Fig 2 3 Chapter 3 3 1 3 2 Making your First Measurement Introduction This chapter describes how to make a basic measurement and how to save and document the results It assumes you have just received your Hand held Analyzer Type 2250 or Type 2270 and are turning it on for the first time If the instrument has been used before and the previous user has initiated the multi user facility then the screens that are displayed may not follow the sequence described below If this is the case please refer to section 8 1 6 Note A stylus is stored in a holder on the side of the instrument see item 15 in Fig 2 1 This can be used on the touch sensitive screen to select icons and functions during the procedures that follow Alternatively you can use the various pushbuttons see items 3 to 11 in Fig 2 1 The following procedures assume that the measurement microphone and preamplifier have been mounted as described in C
143. analyzer when connecting a serial I O CF Card and modem to the analyzer The following Compact Flash to Serial converter has been tested e Serial I O CF Card Ruggedized from Socket see details on Web site www socketmobile com 8 2 2 CHAPTER 8 Advanced Use of the Analyzer Tips and Tricks 75 Analogue Modems The following modems have been tested e MT5600ZDXe from MultiTech Systems Br el amp Kj r order number ZM 0069 see details on Web site www multitech com e Hayes Accura 56k speakerphone model 5670NL GSM Modems The following modems have been tested e GSM Module M1 from Siemens e WMOD2B G900 1800 Dual Band Modem from Wavecom e M1306B FASTRACK Dual Band Modem from Wavecom e FASTRACK Supreme 10 and 20 GSM GPRS EDGE Modem from Wavecom e Airlink Fastrack Xtend GPRS EDGE and HSPA from Sierra Wireless see details on Web site www sierrawireless com e GSM Small from INSYS Note The SIM card should be usable without pin code Modems Incompatible with the Analyzer The following modems don t work correctly together with the analyzer e Fujitsu Siemens CONNECT2AIR GSM GPRS Compact Flash Card e Audiovox RTM 8000P GSM GPRS CF modem e Enfora GSM 0110 Modem Modems with USB Interface Modem to USB interface is currently not supported Connection to Network using GPRS EDGE HSPA Modem GPRS EDGE HSPA modems are supported The modem is initialized with the same command string as described in Sec
144. apping on the Main Menu icon and selecting Setup followed by Markers Marker 2 is set to a Manual Event marker by default it can be controlled by the Manual Event pushbutton and the stylus Marker 3 is set to a Level Event marker by default it can be controlled by the level trigger facility and the stylus Marker 6 is used as a Sound Marker and shows the size of the sound recording The analyzer allows you to view the markers at a later date by recalling the data and viewing the desired profile This can also be done if you have transferred the data to BZ 5503 or Type 7815 Noise Explorer If required Type 7820 Evaluator and Type 7825 Protector can use the markers in their calculations Marker number 1 the Exclude Marker will always be used as an Exclude Marker while markers 2 to 5 will be used as defined in Type 7820 Evaluator Type 7825 Protector software The marker names however will be transferred from the analyzer Marker 6 will be used as sound marker Marking During the Measurement The measurement parameter is displayed as a progressing profile Use of Pushbuttons Press the Back erase pushbutton to start an Exclude Marker marker number 1 The marker is displayed above the profile Press the button once more to stop the Exclude Marker Press the Manual Event x pushbutton to start a Manual Event Marker marker number 2 The marker is displayed above the profile Press the button once more to stop the Manual
145. ared are for WEP Wired Equivalent Privacy Infrastructure mode WPA PSK is for WPA Wi Fi Protected Access with Pre shared Key also called Per sonal mode WPA2 is an enhanced version of WPA Encryption Select the encryption as required by the network None WEP Enabled AES Enabled or TKIP Enabled None is for Open security WEP Enabled is for Open and Shared securi ty AES and TKIP Enabled are for WPA PSK and WPA2 PSK security Encryption Key Insert the encryption key required by the network The key will be displayed until you press Enter then it will be replaced by Notifications The analyzer can notify you if disk space is getting low or external power has disappeared etc This is done via SMS or e mail as described in this section The SMS e mail notification contains a short status report for the analyzer This facility is especially useful if the analyzer is left for unattended monitoring Alarm Settings If one or more of the following alarms occur then a notification will be issued as either an SMS or an e mail depending on your equipment and settings If the notification fails e g the connection has been lost then the analyzer will retry to send the notification once more after 5 minutes Table 8 1 Alarm Settings CHAPTER 8 Advanced Use of the Analyzer Tips and Tricks Alarm Type Condition Comment Power On When analyzer is Indicates start from a timer or a power failure or switched on or
146. ate icon to open directly or tap the template name to reveal a drop down where you select Open 18 Hand held Analyzers Types 2250 and 2270 User Manual Fig 3 2 TEMPLATE EXPLORER Changing the project SOUND METE template fel Ei Name KE FFT ANALYZER at FREQUENCY ANALYZER at FREQUENCY ANALYZER ADV ge LOGGING SLM 4 NOISE MONITORING REVERBERATION TIME Ea dB SOUND LEVEL METER ADY dB SOUND LEVEL METER BASIC Quick 2 Tap Measurement Mode in the view area and set to Manual see Fig 3 3 Note The bar graph showing the sound pressure level Lap is now live but parameters such as Leg are not This is because Lag is an instantaneous value always available for display whereas L Aeq is a measured value that needs to be averaged over a period of time Therefore it cannot be displayed before you have started a measurement using the Start Pause pushbutton Fig 3 3 SOUND LEVEL METER Setting the measurement Sard NT ob 01 P mode LAF 20 40 60 80 LAeq LCpeak LAF90 0 dB LAFmax Ss aia 3 Measurement Mode lt lt Broadband 3 Press the Start Pause pushbutton to start the measurement Note Start appears on the screen as feedback when you press the Start Pause pushbutton Notice the Running Icon on the screen and monitor the red yellow green traffic light status indicators around the Start Pause pushbutton while you are measuring CHAPTER 3 Making your First Measurement 19 The indic
147. ates 4 5 or 6 example L 55 CHAPTER 5 Getting to Know Your Analyzer 39 Instantaneous Measured Parameters e Instantaneous Time weighted Sound Levels L example Lap e Sound Pressure Levels max levels once per second example Lap SPL e Instantaneous Peak Sound Levels example L peak 1s Note See Appendix B for a comprehensive list of all parameters Sound Level Meter software BZ 7222 incorporates a simple user interface which is easy to learn and uses intuitive data storage and recall Comprehensive security features means no loss of data even on accidental power off Smart features are built in for field use for example allowing you to personalise your measurements Sound Level Meter software BZ 7222 also provides connectivity between your PC and other sound analysis software This highly versatile hand held analyzer platform includes a range of optional software modules that are enabled through easily activated software license keys The combination of software modules and innovative hardware makes the instrument a dedicated solution for performing all your high precision measurement tasks The following optional software module is covered in this manual 5 2 2 Frequency Analysis Software Module BZ 7223 This software module allows real time frequency measurements in 1 1 and 1 3 octave bands making it a simple matter to for example select suitable hearing protection qualify noise from heat and ventilation systems
148. ations should be as follows e Yellow status indicator flashing every 5 s before you start the measurement e Steady green status indicator after you have pressed the Start Pause pushbutton and during the measurement if everything is OK e Short green flash every second means the measurement is waiting for the trigger e Yellow status indicator flashing every 5 s when you have stopped saved the measurement and are ready to do another measurement e Yellow status indicator flashing slowly 0 5 s on 0 5 s off if you pause the measurement e Red status indicator flashing rapidly if you encounter an overload condition during the measurement 4 Use the Start Pause Continue Back erase and Reset 4 pushbuttons to control the measurement The status field at the top of the screen will give short textual feedback on the pushbutton operation A visual indication of measurement status is also displayed on the status line by way of the Stopped icon W the Running icon gt and the Pause icon See Fig 3 4 Fig 3 4 Measurement feedback in the gt status field LA TUT M 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 LAeq 82 7 dB LCpeak 125 4 dB LAF90 0 51 3 dB LAFmax 103 1 dB Measurement Mode Manual Broadband 5 Toggle between different display parameters as required by tapping on each parameter field for example LAF90 0 in Fig 3 4 with the stylus and selecting other parameters from the drop down lists that a
149. attach to your measurement Text is inserted using a character keyboard similar to the one covered in section 5 4 6 When you have finished tap x to return to the measurement screen Add Image to Current Measurement Type 2270 only The View Finder screen is accessed from the Main Menu by selecting Add Image to Current Measurement This screen allows you to capture an image that you can attach to your measurement see Chapter 3 When you have finished tap EJ to return to the measurement screen Template Explorer CHAPTER 5 Getting to Know Your Analyzer e The Template Explorer is accessed from the Main Menu and gives you access to managing your project templates When you have finished tap E to return to the measurement screen Timer Setup The Timer Setup is accessed from the Main Menu and enables you to control the analyzer via one or more of the analyzer s timers The purpose of a timer is to initiate measurements in the absence of an operator When you have finished tap E to return to the measurement screen 5 4 2 The Display Screen During normal operation you will use the display screen to view your measurements and carry out a variety of functions which are described in the following sections CAUTION The touch sensitive screen is susceptible to damage from sharp objects such as pencils fingernails etc We therefore recommend you use the stylus provided to activate items on screen See also section 5 4 5
150. atus Codes Smiley s When Tone is selected on the tone parameter panel the list of status codes is updated Tap a smiley to get an explanation of the status code and for a tip on how to remedy or improve the settings on the instrument see an example in Fig 15 13 Fi ig 15 13 ENHANCED LOGGING Example of a status code l Pre explanation 168 Hand held Analyzers Types 2250 and 2270 User Manual If you have selected 1 l octave an accelerometer as transducer or a Direct input tone assessment will be performed but a smiley will be displayed When you tap the smiley it will advise you to use a microphone For an overview of all the remedies associated to the various smileys please refer to Table 15 2 Table 15 2 Overview of Smiley Indicators and associated remedies Smiley Colour Explanation Remedy Tip for Solution Red No tone assessment on 1 1 There is no method for assessing tones when octaves the spectrum is analysed in 1 1 octave bands select 1 3 octave instead Red Analysis on Accelerometer The analysis is carried out on an accelerometer input select a microphone Red Spectrum must be Lzfmin When Italian Law is selected the analysed spectrum must be LzfFmin Red No tone assessment on inst It is not possible to make tone assessments on parameters instantaneous parameters Fast or Slow Yellow Analysis on Direct The analysis is carried out on a Dire
151. benefit is that data is documented on site and is therefore ready for post processing and reporting back at the office using Utility Software for Hand held Analyzers BZ 5503 or other post processing software such as Noise Explorer Type 7815 Evaluator Type 7820 Protector Type 7825 or Microsoft Excel In addition to measuring broadband parameters see Chapter 3 and spectra see Chapter 10 the logging module allows you to simultaneously log the following parameters e Broadband Parameters including broadband statistics e Spectra including spectral statistics e Broadband Parameters every 100 ms e Record the measured signal An overview showing the options available during a typical logging task has been provided in Table 11 1 a b Requires Frequency Analysis Software BZ 7223 Requires Sound Recording Option BZ 7226 107 108 Hand held Analyzers Types 2250 and 2270 User Manual Table 11 1 Overview of options available during a typical logging task Selection Period Broadband Broadband Spectral Spectral Parameters Statistics Parameters Statistics Logged 1s 24h 1 to 10 None 0 3 None or All 32 or Full or All 5 or Full Logged Toome None Laeg Lar None None None 100 ms and or Las available available available roa Elapsed All 45 Full All 5 Full Time Check the About Menu to see whether you have the right license to run the Logging module The About Menu is accessed from bui
152. bleshooting Slot for Compact Flash CF Cards This slot see item 9 in Fig 2 2 accepts CF sized cards and can be used for memory or for example a modem 2 3 12 2 3 13 CHAPTER 2 Assembling your Analyzer 9 Slot for Secure Digital SD Cards This slot see item 10 in Fig 2 2 accepts SD and Secure Digital High Capacity SDHC memory cards and is typically used to save measurement data Capacities in excess of 2 gigabytes are acceptable LAN Socket Type 2270 only The LAN Socket see item 12 in Fig 2 2 provides high speed direct communication with a Local Area Network It is used to synchronise measurement and setup data with a host PC 2 4 Fig 2 3 Hardware Setup UA 1404 Outdoor Microphone Kit Hand held Analyzers Types 2250 and 2270 User Manual Type 2250 2270 Hardware Overview UA 1650 90 mm Windscreen with AutoDetect 4189 4190 Microphone AO 0697 D 030 Microphone Ext Cable 3 m UA 1317 Microphone Holder UA 0801 Small Tripod or UA 0587 2250 2270 Hand held Analyzer UA 1651 Y Tripod AO 1449 D 010 Extension LAN Interface Cable for Hand held Crossover Analyzer 1m AO 1450 y LAN Interface Cable UA 0587 Tripod 1 5m or UA 0801 AO 1476 USB Interface Cable 1 8m HT 0015 Earphones AO 0440 D 015 Output Cable 1 5m ZC 0032 Microphone Preamplifier Z AO 0697 D 100
153. brings results to the user on site as well as preparing for post processing and reporting back at the office Documentation can be completed using Utility Software for Hand held Analyzers BZ 5503 or the measured data can be exported for post processing by Evaluator Type 7820 or other post processing software such as Microsoft Excel 158 15 2 15 2 1 Hand held Analyzers Types 2250 and 2270 User Manual Check the About Menu to see whether you have the right license to run the Tone Assessment Option The About Menu is accessed from built in help tap the Help icon gg on the shortcut bar then select About If you have purchased Type 2250 2270 together with the software application s then the relevant license s comes pre installed on the instrument If you purchased a separate software application for your Type 2250 2270 then you have to install the license on the instrument This is done using Utility Software for Hand held Analyzers BZ 5503 please consult the on line help included with the BZ 5503 software for instructions on how to install a license Tone Assessment According to ISO 1996 2 Annex D When assessing noise it is generally recognised that noise containing audible pure tones is more annoying than noise with the same A weighted broadband level that does not contain audible tones When assessing noise that contains tones or narrow bands of noise an adjustment shall be added to the A weighted time averaged
154. calibrations plus the initial calibration which can be viewed on the Calibration History screen see Fig 4 3 When you have finished tap g to return to the calibration details screen and then tap amp again to return to the measurement screen Fig 4 3 Calibration History screen CALIBRATION HISTORY Date Deviation 15 11 2006 11 24 0 00 dB 26 10 2006 10 15 1 14 dB Time 26 10 2006 10 15 32 Sensitivity 50 00 m Pa Preamplifier User 2250 Input Top Socket Calibration Type Manually adjusted Calibrator Comment 4 8 Transducer Database CHAPTER 4 Calibration The specifications for Microphone Types 4189 and 4190 and Preamplifier ZC 0032 which come fitted in the top socket of the analyzer are described in a transducer database 1 Select the Transducer Database by tapping the Main Menu icon and choosing Transducers from the list of options The screen shown in Fig 4 4 will appear Fig 4 4 Transducer Database screen pS ip 4189 1234567 2 Tap the transducer name number or select the plus icon next to name number to view the details in the database see Fig 4 5 Sy Fig 4 5 Details in the T Js Transducer Database HK hji Taso 1234565 E Hand held Analyzers Types 2250 and 2270 User Manual All the details for the currently selected microphone can be found in the database You can add other transducers by tapping on the Add New Transducer icon TE selecting Mi
155. cate that the new settings have not been saved Tap the Template to select Template Explorer or select it from the Main Menu and tap the Save icon Bl to save the settings in the current template Switching On Switch the analyzer on by pressing The start up time depends on the state the instrument was in when last switched off and it may take up to 2 minutes from a cold start or up to 10 seconds if the instrument is already in Standby Mode i e from a warm start CHAPTER 3 Making your First Measurement 17 Note A cold start is described as a re boot of the instrument from ROM This normally occurs after the instrument has been turned off for some time either by the user or following an automatic power down A warm start takes the instrument quickly from Standby Mode to Operating Mode without having to re boot The battery needs to be charged for this to happen see section 2 5 1 3 3 3 Set the Sound Level Meter Project Template After initialisation the screen shown in Fig 3 1 appears Fig 3 1 Initial sound level meter screen LA LLL 20 40 60 60 20 LAeq dB LCpeak Seer LAF90 0 Seda LAFmax B Measurement Mode Manual Broadband 1 Check that the SOUND LEVEL METER Project Template is displayed at the top of the screen see Fig 3 1 If not use the stylus to tap the bar at the top of the screen to reveal the Template Explorer and select SOUND LEVEL METER from the list see Fig 3 2 Tap the Templ
156. cay is bent is set For more details of the quality indicators see section 14 5 Tap the Y axis to select Auto Zoom to adjust the range of the Y axis for best fit of the measured spectrum Zoom In Zoom Out to adjust the zoom Auto Scale to select the best scaling for viewing the spectra without adjusting the zoom Scale Up Scale Down to adjust the full scale value on the Y axis Show Hide Regression Line to show hide the regression line and the evaluation range for the main decay together with the two quality indicators C and amp 150 Hand held Analyzers Types 2250 and 2270 User Manual 14 4 Measurements with Graphical Position Management Type 2250 2270 can keep track of the source and receiver positions in a graphical way together with the measurements To do this make the following settings in the Setup 1 Set Map Based Measurement Yes in the Measurement Control setup the reverberation decays will then be placed graphically on the map shown on the Overview tab and numbered as source receiver relations for example SIR2 means the decay measurement with noise from Source and measured at Receiver position 2 2 Set Meas All Pos for Each Source Yes for measuring all combinations of source and receiver positions Set to No if you want to measure at a specific number of receiver positions per source 3 Set No of Positions per Source to the number of receiver positions you want to measure per source
157. ch user on the instrument D 1 Display Settings Table D 1 Display Settings Parameter Values Comment Colour Scheme Arcade Select between five colour schemes Alhambra one optimised for outdoor use in bright Indoor conditions and one optimised for very Outdoor dark conditions Night For each colour scheme select the optimum choice of brightness for the traffic light and whether the backlight for the pushbuttons should be on or off In addition you can also change the number of decimal places on your dB results readout Parameter Values Comment Traffic Light Brightness Off Low Normal High Key Backlight Off On 234 Hand held Analyzers Types 2250 and 2270 User Manual Parameter Values Comment Backlight Brightness Minimum Select backlight brightness using the Level 2 backlight icon EE at the bottom of the Level 3 screen Maximum level uses the most Level 4 power Level 5 Maximum Number of Decimal Places 1 Select how many decimal places you 2 want in the dB results readout 1 or 2 Note The setting is for display only and has no effect on the measurement precision or resolution D 2 Power Settings Table D 2 Power Settings Parameter Values Comment Turn off Backlight After 10 sec After 30 sec Select optimum value for full backlight on brightness determined by After 1 min Backlight Brightness After 2 min After 5 min Never Turn off Bac
158. con LL is displayed if an Accelerometer is selected as input and an input socket icon gj is dis played if Direct input is selected For Type 2270 two icons are displayed one for Ch 1 and one for Ch 2 If only one channel is used then no icon is displayed for the unused channel Immediate textual feedback on overload situation and latched overload indicated with an over load icon amp Third Line CHAPTER 5 Getting to Know Your Analyzer 47 e Used for Logging and Enhanced Logging see section 11 3 1 or used for Reverbera tion Time see section 14 3 1 Central View Area The Central View Area contains the screens required for a particular measurement such as bar graphs result readouts and various frequently used setup parameters e g Meas mode The template defines the content of this area More than one screen can be used for displaying the information Select the screen using the View Tabs at the bottom of the View area Changes made to the screens will only be applied temporarily i e until you select another project template or open another project to re use the screen from that project However if you want the screen changes to be saved in the current template tap the Project Template bar at the top of the screen to open the Template Explorer and tap the Save icon Note If you make changes to the screen that you do not want to keep and you have not yet saved the template you can undo them by selecting the temp
159. control of the instrument Default admin Password lt string of characters gt Define the password required for full access to the web page The password will be displayed until you press lt Enter gt then it will be replaced by Default admin Guest Login Required Yes No Set to Yes to require user name and password for login to the guest web page Set to No for free access to the guest web page Guest User Name lt string of characters gt Define the user name required for limited access to the web page i e view of the instrument only Default guest 244 Hand held Analyzers Types 2250 and 2270 User Manual Parameter Values Comment Guest Password lt string of characters gt Define the password required for limited access to the web page The password will be displayed until you press lt Enter gt then it will be replaced by Default guest Note The web server parameters are common to all users of the instrument D 12 Image Settings Type 2270 only Table D 12 Image Settings Type 2270 only Parameter Values Comment Image Control View Finder Set to View Finder to use the View Finder Manual Event together with the Manual Event key to capture an image The image can then be saved or rejected after capture Set to Manual Event to capture and save the image each time you press the Manual Event key Appendix E
160. control the sound recording using the stylus to mark the interesting part on the profile Note 1 Sound recordings can only be done during measurements Note 2 Sound recordings can only be done on projects saved on SD or CF cards Setting up the Instrument 1 Select a Logging Logging SLM or Enhanced Logging Project Template see section 3 3 1 for more details on templates 2 Insert an SD or CF memory card in the slot for SD or CF cards see items 9 and 10 in Fig 2 2 3 Tap the Main Menu icon and select Explorer from the list of options Navigate to the memory card create a job folder for the measurements and set the default measure ment job path as described in Chapter 6 Note You cannot record sound on the internal disk 4 Tap the Main Menu icon and select Setup from the list of options Set all the parameters as required for the Logging or Enhanced Logging measurement see Chapter 11 or 12 resp 5 Under Sound Recording you can specify the Recording Control parameters as follows Automatic if you want to start the recording when you start the measurement and stop when you pause the measurement and to limit the recording to Maximum Duration if Duration Limit is set to On Manual Event if you want to start and stop the recording using the Manual Event N pushbutton during the measurement Exclude Event if you want to start and stop the recording using the Back erase push button 4 during the mea
161. cro phone Accelerometer or Direct input from the drop down and filling in the details of your particular transducer parameters See section C 2 1 This is done by selecting the item from the drop down list that appears on some parameter fields or by entering the data via the keyboard that appears on other parameter fields A number of parameters are set automatically for a known microphone type such as Type 4189 Note 1 If the transducer is a microphone and the microphone type is known to the the analyzer as in the example in Fig 4 5 where Type 4189 details are known then the param eters Nominal Sensitivity Polarization Voltage Free field Capacitance and CCLD are set automatically See details in Appendix C The analyzer can then make sound field correction and windscreen correction as specified in the setup To confirm which type of correction is being applied an icon is displayed in the measurement Status field as described on section 5 4 2 If the microphone is unknown to the analyzer no corrections can be made and no icon appears in the Status field The parameters mentioned above have to be set manually i e typed in We recommend that you insert the value for Nominal Sensitivity directly from the calibration chart Nominal Sensitivity is used in the automatic level detection calculations when calibrating using the Type 4231 Calibrator to determine whether the level is 94 or 114 dB Note 2 If the transducer is an accelerome
162. crophone note the following precautions e When screwing the microphone on do it gently to avoid damaging threads e Keep dust and foreign matter off the microphone diaphragm Do not touch the diaphragm with anything it is very delicate Note Once the measurement microphone and preamplifier have been assembled and connected to your analyzer they should normally be left connected to the instrument 2 5 3 Hand held Analyzers Types 2250 and 2270 User Manual To connect 1 Gently screw the microphone onto Preamplifier ZC 0032 see items 1 and 2 in Fig 2 1 2 Insert the male plug of the preamplifier into the top socket of the hand held analyzer see item 17 in Fig 2 1 and push gently until it snaps into position To Disconnect 1 To remove the preamplifier and microphone grip the locking collar firmly and slide back to remove the preamplifier and microphone combination from the instrument Mounting the Windscreen For short outdoor noise measurements or indoor measurements exposed to air movement mount Windscreen UA 1650 onto the microphone and preamplifier combination making sure it snaps into place over the windscreen sensor The sensor is built into the preamplifier see item 2 in Fig 2 1 Icons in the status field on the screen indicate whether the windscreen is detected or not For longer term outdoor measurements see Mounting the Outdoor Microphone Kit below Mounting the Analyzer onto the Tripod Extensi
163. ct input select a microphone Yellow Setup different from ISO The ISO is selected and the measurement setup standard deviates from the proposals in the ISO standard Yellow Min or Max spectrum When the ISO standard is selected the analyzed 5 spectrum should be Leq Yellow Tone freq outside proposed In the ISO standard the defined frequency range E ISO range for tone assessment is from 25 Hz to 10 kHz A tone is detected outside this frequency range Yellow Tone freq out of proposed DM In the standard according to Italian Law the tone range assessment must be performed in the range from 20 Hz to 20 kHz A tone is detected outside this frequency range 15 9 Note The ISO method does not specify the weighting filter to be used The A weighting filter is selected by default but all selectable broadband filters may be applied without warnings Recalling Saved Measurements Saved measurements using the FREQUENCY ANALYZER LOGGING and ENHANCED LOGGING templates can be opened and the Tone Assessment can be applied Please refer to section 3 4 and section 6 3 for information on how to save and recall measurements respectively Chapter 16 This chapter comprises the specifications that are needed for evaluation of instrument performance characteristics and proper use of the instrument Some of the applicable sound level meter stand ards require additional technical documentation in Specifications particular
164. ctivated for the rest of the measurement session To activate it again you will have to reload the template or restart your instrument This automatic check is deactivated when the Tone Assessment parameter is set to Off in the Setup menu To reset all the relevant parameters to the default setup tap the OK button The default setup includes preset parameters that comply with the selected standard These are described in Table 15 1 To measure with the settings you set up manually tap the Cancel button 164 Hand held Analyzers Types 2250 and 2270 User Manual Table 15 1 Default parameters used Setup Parameter Default Value by the automatic Selected standard ISO 1996 2 Annex D measurement setup check Adjustment 3 dB Last band in low frequency range 125 Hz Last band in middle frequency range 400 Hz Level difference low 15 dB Level difference middle 8 dB Level difference high 5 dB Selected standard Italian Law DM 16 03 1998 ISO 226 1987 Free field Note 1 Even if you have set the Tone Assessment parameter to On Setup menu the calculation is not carried out until the Jone parameter is selected above the spectrum Note 2 You may find the Template Explorer accessed from the Main Menu useful to save your own measurement setup 15 4 4 Sound Recording 15 5 15 5 1 If a valid license for the Sound Recording Option BZ 7226 is present it is possible to record the sound while measuring Re
165. d 2270 User Manual Fig 13 3 Playing the recording output level pop up LOGGING When you have selected the method of play back a pop up appears explaining how to adjust the output level in the headphone and how to stop the play back Tap the Minimize button to reduce this to a small blue bar at the top of the screen allowing you to watch the profile underneath you will notice that the profile cursor is updated every second to the position of the sound that is currently being played Fig 13 4 LOGGING Playing the recording minimizing the pop up jel Sound The small blue button bar at the top can be maximized again by tapping the Ej icon or you can close it and stop playing back by tapping the x icon 13 2 5 CHAPTER 13 Sound Recording Optional Module Sound Recordings on the PC When projects including sound recording have been transferred into an Archive on a PC using Utility Software BZ 5503 then sound recordings on Sound Level Meter projects or Frequency Analysis Projects can be played back directly from BZ 5503 Sound recordings on profiles can be played back when the Logging or Enhanced Logging projects have been transferred to Noise Explorer Evaluator or Protector the sound record ing will appear in the profiles as Sound markers Sound Recordings can be input to the Briiel amp Kj r PULSE Analyzer Platform for further analysis please contact your local Briiel amp Kj r repre
166. dicators are recommended in ISO 3382 2 Annex B as a measure of how good the slope of the decay can be approximated to a straight line e C xx The Curvature indicator if above 10 then the quality indicator meaning Decay is bent is set Quality indicator Smiley Explanation Description No decay end found The end of the decay cannot be determined N 5 because it doesn t end in the background noise Background noise too high Background noise is above the upper 2 evaluation point t amp No decay start found No decay start found y Background noise too high Background noise is above the lower evaluation point T Max Decay Time too short The lower evaluation point is beyond the decay time z No decay found The slope of the decay is positive i e the reverberation time is negative amp Reverberation time too short Less than 2 points in Evaluation Range o E Excitation sound level too high Overload Reverberation time too short BxT below 16 B filter bandwidth and T F E reverberation time of detector required by ISO 3382 R 5 T20 used T30 unavailable T20 used T30 unavailable High background noise Background noise too close to level at lower evaluation point p E Short reverberation time Less than 4 points in Evaluation Range Decay is bent The difference between T20 and T30 is amp greater than 10 Recommended quality indicator from ISO 33
167. e a If you are using Reverberation Time Software BZ 7227 see Chapter 14 please note that there are more measurements stored in Reverberation Time projects than Sound Level Meter Frequency Analyzer or Logging Projects which all contain one measurement within each project 22 Hand held Analyzers Types 2250 and 2270 User Manual Fig 3 8 EXPLORER Viewing your measurement in Explorer gt 2 This opens the Data Viewer see example in Fig 3 9 The viewer displays the data in a pre defined format where you can select and view different parameters as necessary Fig 3 9 The Data Viewer 83 0 dB 125 4 dB 51 5 dB 125 4 dB 103 1 dB 44 0 dB LCeq 85 5 dB Overload 0 Start Time 28 11 2006 13 23 14 Stop Time 28 11 2006 13 29 18 Calibration 3 When finished tap R to return to Explorer and ga to return to the measurement screen 3 5 Document your Measurement One method for documenting your measurement is adding metadata to your project Tap 0 upper right corner of the screen see Fig 3 7 to open the Annotations screen with metadata on the Metadata tab and annotations on the Annotations tab see Fig 3 10 CHAPTER 3 Making your First Measurement 23 Fig 3 10 The Metadata tab of the Annotations screen x Fig 3 10 ANNOTATIONS Operator John Wright Location Hall C Type MX 47 No 246301 S Condition Max Speed Test No 3 Status OK Metadata are text or numbers which
168. e 4189 Dynamic Range From typical noise floor to max level for a pure tone signal at 1 kHz 1 3 octave 1 1 to 140 dB Linear Operating Range In accordance with IEC 61260 1 3 octave lt 20 5 dB to 140 dB Internal Generator Built in pseudo random noise generator Spectrum Selectable Pink or White Crest Factor Pink noise 4 4 13 dB White noise 3 6 11 dB Bandwidth Follows measurement frequency range Lower Limit 50 Hz 1 3 oct or 63 Hz oct Upper Limit 10 kHz 1 3 oct or 8 kHz oct Output Level Independent of bandwidth Max 1 V ms 0 dB Gain Adjustment 60 to 0 dB When bandwidth is changed the level for all bands is automatically adjusted to comply with the set output level Correction Filters for sound sources Type 4292 Type 4295 and Type 4296 Flat or Optimum Turn on time and Turn off Time Equivalent to RT 70 ms Repetition Period 175s Output Connector Output Socket Control See Measurement Control External Generator Selectable as alternative to Internal Generator Hand held Analyzers Types 2250 and 2270 User Manual For controlling external noise generator Levels 0 V Generator off 4 5 V Generator on Rise time and Fall time 10 us Control See Measurement Control Reverberation Time EDT T20 and T30 in octave or 1 3 octave bands Decays Measured and stored using averaging time of 5 ms Evaluation Range 0 to 10 dB for EDT 5 to 25 dB for T20 and 5 to
169. e Bee eee ete ee ete ee 98 Regular Re calibration ee eeeesesseeeseeeeeeceeseneceenecsnereseeeesaeessanessaneseeneeeenenenaes 98 Filter Calibration eiennenn Se Ea I ee 98 SEMVICE ANG EPA safe eae tence al eee rate Pace See eA Sed etd E aG 98 Hardware Maintenance and Repair eeeeeceeeseeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeseaeeeeseeeeeeeeees 98 Prenatal 5 2 22 tvec cock Cte iat ceciunte tee teehee re ee ae Se td geen 99 TPM Geshe estes eet eee tee eee eM a SEE a ea Ee SRE ache oad 99 CHAPTER 10 1 1 or 1 3 octave Frequency Analysis Optional Module s seeee 101 10 1 Setting up the INStrUMeNt 0 ee eee ee ene cence eeeeeeeeaeeseaeeeeaeeseeeeseaeeeeaeeeeeees 101 10 2 Controlling the Measurement eee eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeteaeeseaeeseeeeeeeneeseaeeeeaeees 102 10 3 Displaying the Results 000 eee eee eeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeaeeseaeeseeeeseneeseaeeeeaeees 102 Smileys veces Bae eel nee ee ee ee E a E N a a 106 10 4 Saving Results isic ccccteecte ite ti ened eis EE iai EE E EA EKN Eka 106 CHAPTER 11 Logging Optional MOdUule ccceecsseeeeeeeseneeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeseseeeeeesenneneeeeeees 107 11 1 Setting up the Instrument sseeeeseeesieeiesiieriierrierirerineiinsirneirnsinnsinnrrnnrinereneeen 108 11 2 Controlling the Measurement eee eee ceseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeaeeteaeeseeeeeteneesseeeeaeees 111 Annotating amp Project ireti irnar iaar inaran 112 Recording Sond is siepe ipere area opeen dai
170. e and the profile parameter Marker 1 Exclude is the topmost positioned marker The name of the marker is displayed if the marker overlaps the cursor position If a sound has been recorded then a Sound Marker Marker 6 is displayed above the profile the marker covers exactly the time of the sound recording You can browse through markers using the lt gt buttons in the profile The whole or any part of the sound recording can be played back once or repetitively see Chapter 12 for details To the right of the profile the broadband parameter Lap is displayed and updated regardless of the measurement status and the display freeze status Annotations are displayed below the profile as icons To select an annotation tap and hold the stylus at one side of the icon just above it then drag the stylus to the opposite side of the icon so it looks like the example in Fig 11 4 and remove the stylus from the display CHAPTER 11 Logging Optional Module 115 Fig 11 4 Selecting Annotations 01 30 47 32 7 dB 08 00 00 Spectrum Broadband s 22 21 42 A drop down menu appears select the required function e Open note or play commentary e Delete annotation e Move annotation to the position on the display where the stylus was removed from the display Scale the Y axis left hand vertical scale of the graphical display by tapping on the scale and accessing the drop down menu as in the Spectrum display
171. e setup will only be applied temporarily i e until you select another project template or open another project to re use the setup from that project However if you want the setup changes to be saved in the current template select the Template Explorer option from the Main Menu and tap the Save icon El Note If you make changes to the setup that you do not want to keep and you have not yet saved the template you can undo them by selecting the template again from the Project Template bar at the top of the screen a Hand held Analyzers Types 2250 and 2270 User Manual Preferences The Preferences screen is accessed from the Main Menu and gives you access to the instrument s preferences if Multi User is disabled or your own preferences if Multi User is enabled These include things such as regional settings appearance of the screen power management user profiles and language You can change these as required see section 5 4 6 For more information refer to section 8 1 When you have finished viewing or updating the parameters press J to return to the measurement screen Transducers The Transducers screen is accessed from the Main Menu you can view set which transducer is connected to the instrument and add new ones if required Details can be changed for existing transducers or entered for new ones see section 5 4 6 When you have finished viewing or updating the details tap EJ to return to the measurement screen
172. e slot for SD or CF cards see items 9 and 10 in Fig 2 2 You will be notified that a memory card has been inserted select Yes to change the default measurement path to the memory card 3 Tap the Main Menu icon and select Explorer from the list of options Create a job folder for the measurements and set the default measurement job path as described in Chapter 6 Note You cannot log data on the internal disk 4 Tap the Main Menu icon BH and select Setup from the list of options Set up the measurement as described for Logging in Chapter 11 steps 4 to 12 5 Under the Measurement Control parameters e set the Save Project Data at Continuous Logging and Report Period as required e select whether or not you want to save the Full Spectral Statistics for Reports Note all other measured broadband and spectral parameters are logged automatically per report period CHAPTER 12 Enhanced Logging Optional Module 123 Then you can select e Number of CICs e Desired time periods for calibration 6 Under the Logged Spectrum parameters you can choose to log Full Spectral Statistics per Logging Period or not Note Logging the full spectral statistics at a short logging period e g every second takes up a lot of space on the memory card 7 Under Triggers you can specify a Timer Trigger for periodically starting a sound recording e g 5 minutes per hour and you can specify up to four independent Level Triggers to be active at fou
173. e the DC Voltage parameter to Generator calibrate the connected equipment by setting the DC Output Use Generator parameter to output the signal specified by the Generator settings Note 1 If you do not want to output the signal then select Off to economise the power Note 2 X frequency weighting A or B A requires that the Broadband excl Peak parameter is set to AC or AZ B requires that the Broadband excl Peak parameter is set to BC or BZ Note 3 The Generator setting is only available for Frequency Analysis templates DC Output 20 mV dB 0 0 to 200 0 dB Source DC Voltage will output 0 V for DC Output 0 dB and 4V for DC Output 200 dB 208 Hand held Analyzers Types 2250 and 2270 User Manual Table A 18 Cont Output Socket Signal parameters Parameter Values Comment Output Gain Input 60 0 dB to 60 0 dB Output gain of the input signal Key in a gain value 0 1 dB resolution for the input signal Use to assign the new value for immediate response at the output or use the up down navigation keys to increment decrement the value in steps of 1 dB Note 0 dB means 1 V output for 1 V input a Not available for Reverberation Time Software BZ 7227 A 18 Lgen Periods Table A 19 Loge Periods parameters Parameter Values Comment Day Start 00 00 00 to 23 59 59 Determines the start of the day period for the Lgay calculation
174. e the stylus from the display A drop down menu appears and below the five markers you can select Add Comment Add Note or Add Image Type 2270 only to add a spoken comment write a note or capture an image When finished the Comment Note or Image is inserted in the profile and the cursors disappear Use of Pushbuttons Using the Commentary pushbutton during a pause means that the comment annotation will be added to the project instead of the profile The annotations can be viewed by tapping on the paperclip icon or tapping the Main Menu and selecting Explorer from the list of options See 3 5 Editing Annotations on Profiles To move an annotation 1 Tap and hold the stylus on the profile display at a position on one side of the annotation icon 2 Drag the stylus through the annotation icon to the position where you want the annotation moved to 3 Remove the stylus from the display and a drop down menu appears 4 Select Move Comment or Move Note or Move Image from the drop down menu 11 4 CHAPTER 11 Logging Optional Module 119 To delete an annotation 1 Tap and hold the stylus on the profile display at a position to the left of the annotation icon you want to delete 2 Drag the stylus to a position to the right of the annotation 3 Remove the stylus from the display and a drop down menu appears 4 Select Delete for the annotation you want to delete from the drop down menu Saving and Recalling Result
175. eaa aeiae sa igeri eant deneenieesstconsdeaee 8 Input Input Ch 2 tor Typa 2270 r i enie asi ee ed lad ecte detente cadeens daseoe eriei pine 8 External POW Omaan oa niae eaaa ech feseenusecasscted cea tvsceuseoes ao Aaaa taaie 8 Battery Charge IMNMdiCatOr rsisi enaren teienei caste bea cceetuyccus oly eea paige 8 Reset Button ant E Ea note ad NE E 8 Slot for Compact Flash CF Cards ccccceccceeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesneeeeessaees 8 Slot for Secure Digital SD Cards cccccceeeccceeeseceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeneeeeeenaees 9 LAN Socket Type 2270 only e ce eeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeneeeeaeeeeeeeeeeeeseaeeseaeeseaeeseeeeeeeneeeeaes 9 24 Hardwarg Setup i2ies edssccesd cecteec oie wid ei bak eedipeveved a aaa aaa aaa 10 2 5 Assembling the Analyzer ee cece ceeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeseaeeeeeeeeeaeeseaeeseneeeeeeeene 11 Charging the Battery for the First Time eee eeeeeeeseeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseaeeeeeees 11 Making Good Measurement eeceeeceeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeseeeeeeseeneeeeaeeseaeeeeneeeeeeeees 11 Alternative Measurement Method Extended Microphone 0 eeee 12 Measuring for Convenience ee eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeteaeeseaeeseeneeeeaeeseaeeeeeeeeeeeee 14 CHAPTER 3 Making your First Measurement eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenseneeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeneeees 15 3A MTPOAUCTION ats sete cess tes tictiac a naa aches ay este A AE AA Eaa A a ESAs vee ea aas 15 32 ROMANE SNOOT a
176. ected by the technician during calibration repair will be performed before returning the instrument to you Repair is available at a fixed price which includes a Conformance Test Certificate upon the return of your instrument no measurement data included CHAPTER 9 Updating and Upgrading Applications Maintenance Calibration and Troubleshooting 99 9 6 7 Rental To ensure optimal uptime you can rent a substitute Hand held Analyzer while yours is being calibrated To arrange rental please contact your local Briiel amp Kj r representative 9 6 8 Training Basic knowledge on sound and vibration measurement instrument training and application training are a few examples of what local training or consultancy hours can do for you To find out more about training and consultancy hours please contact your local Briiel amp Kj r representative a Providing this service is available from your local Briiel amp Kj r office 100 Hand held Analyzers Types 2250 and 2270 User Manual Chapter 10 10 1 1 1 or 1 3 octave Frequency Analysis Optional Module Frequency Analysis Software BZ 7223 enables you to make 1 l octave or 1 3 octave measurements and broadband sound level measurements simultaneously Check the About Menu to see whether you have the license to run the frequency analyzer The About Menu is accessed from the built in help tap gg on the shortcut bar then select About See Chapter 9 for instructions
177. ecting Diffuse field correction Even free field correction of a free field microphone will enhance the overall frequency response of the system Generally ISO requires free field conditions and ANSI requires diffuse field conditions Check your local standards for the setting you require No correction is made for unknown transducers 186 Hand held Analyzers Types 2250 and 2270 User Manual Table A 1 Input parameters Type 2250 Parameter Values Comment Loudness Free field Determines whether Loudness and Loudness Diffuse field Level are calculated based on Free field or Auto Diffuse field conditions Set to Auto to follow the setting of Sound Field Correction For an unknown microphone type you can set Loudness to the condition matching your request For outdoor measurements it is often necessary to mount a windscreen on the microphone to reduce the measured wind noise This has however a small impact on the overall fre quency response of the analyzer To compensate for this use the built in windscreen correc tion Table A 2 Input parameters with windscreen correction Parameter Values Comment Windscreen Auto Detect On Automatic detection of UA 1650 windscreen when Off mounted on the ZC 0032 microphone preamplifier The preamplifier should be connected to the top socket if necessary using a microphone extension cable This parameter is available for microphone types using ZC 0032
178. ed time of 100 ms and a logging period of 100 ms Lap and or Lag with a logging period of 100 ms irrespective of the other logging parameters 8 The Logged Spectrum parameter allows you to choose which spectra to log You can specify to log All None or up to 3 Selected spectra You can also choose to log Full Spectral Statistics per Logging Period or not 9 Under Markers you can specify the names of the five available markers The markers are predefined as follows e Marker 1 Exclude can be controlled by pressing the Back erase pushbutton 2 e Marker 2 Manual can be controlled by pressing the Manual Event pushbutton 3 e Marker 3 Level can be controlled by the Level Trigger detection e Marker 4 Marker 4 a Requires Frequency Analysis Software BZ 7223 109 110 Hand held Analyzers Types 2250 and 2270 User Manual Marker 5 Marker 5 Marker 6 Sound is set when recording sound requires Sound Recording Software BZ 7226 All markers can be controlled by the stylus in the Profile display You can set a Pre marker Time between 0 and 5 seconds This will start markers 1 2 or 3 the set number of pre marker seconds before the point where the Back erase pushbutton the Manual Event pushbutton or the Level Trigger respectively are pressed See 11 3 2 10 Under the Level Trigger parameters choose the settings for triggering the number 3 marker Level for
179. ee Section 7 4 Three different methods are available for connecting to the Analyzer e USB BZ 5503 connects to the analyzer through a USB cable e Modem BZ 5503 connects to the analyzer through modem BZ 5503 uses two modems one modem connected to the PC for dialling up and another modem connected to the analyzer e Network The analyzer is connected to a network local or Internet BZ 5503 or an Internet Browser will then be able to connect to the analyzer through TCP IP using the analyzer s global IP address In addition to connecting to the analyzer the analyzer itself can notify you by SMS or E mail based on various conditions see Section 8 4 Table 7 1 gives you an overview of the different connection possibilities including links to relevant chapters with more details a Table 7 1 Connection overview Hand held Analyzers Types 2250 and 2270 User Manual Connect from Connection Type Settings in Preferences Available Notifications Browser Mobile Phone with Internet Browser Ethernet cable Possibly settings in DynDNS Network Settings see Sections 8 2 and 8 3 BZ 5503 USB Modem Disabled N A see Section 8 2 BZ 5503 Modem Modem Auto Answer N A analogue PSTN see Section 8 2 BZ 5503 Modem GSM Modem Auto Answer sms see Section 8 2 see Section 8 4 BZ 5503 Modem Modem Auto Answer SMS GPRS EDGE HSPA see Section 8 2 see Section 8 4 BZ 5503 or Internet Net
180. eeeeeaeeeeaeeeeseeteseeessaeeeeneeeeneees 125 Saving and Recalling ReSuIts 00 eee eeeeeeseeeeseeeeeeeeeeaeeeeaeeseeeeeeeeeeeaeeneaes 125 CHAPTER 13 Sound Recording Optional Module s cccsceeeeeesseeeeeeeeeeneeeneeeeeeeeneeeeeees 127 13 1 Sound Level Meter and Frequency Analysis Software eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 127 Setting up the INStrUMent 0 0 tesina aaa a aa aa Eia 127 Controlling the Recording isesi iraan a aain 129 Playing the RECOrdinge cc2 titettetede TTET ET 129 13 2 Logging and Enhanced Logging Software eee eeseeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeees 129 Setting p the Instr menti eerie ieia a aa aaaea aa EEEE 130 Controlling the RECOrdiNg e ieee erae iaaa aanas ea a EAEE 131 Control Recording using the StylUS eeeeeeeseeseeeeeeeresirerirerrrerrrerrnerresrreereees 132 Playing he RECOrGING is ea aaa aea aaraa aa Malad ata aaaea aeaa aaea aaaea ERREA 133 Sound Recordings on the PC ssssssssessieseserieeriesrissirinriiesirsrrrerinernsinneinnsiensrennt 135 CHAPTER 14 Reverberation Time Software Optional Mod le iscsi ses anian oraina nnan aana aa maaa aAa nuances eee 137 141 IDtrod ctiorn oisein eea a a E A a a E a EEE 137 DO TIAITION ss tencss Lecteels te AE yee cael eee a a aa a aa a E a E o 137 How Do We Measure Reverberation Time cceseeseeeeeeeeneeeeneeeeeeeeeeneeees 138 14 2 Setting up the INStrUMENE 00 ee eee ee eeee cence eeeee tence teste eeaeeeeeneeeeaeeseaeeeeaeeeeaeees 141 Int
181. eeeees 227 Internal Battery Pack Interrupted Noise Method cece eee eeeeeeeee 142 Reverberation Time cccccecccccceeesssteeeeeeeeees 138 INtrOGDUCTION sessed ced wien crane vet hte a 1 Introduction to Reverberation Time 0c8 137 ISO 1996 2 Annex D Tone Assessment Calculations 0 c 158 ISO EU Occupational Health Parameters 216 219 LAN Interface LAN Socket q Level Average with Exchange Rates 4 5 or 6 Lays5 1ssssseee 38 Level Trigger 1 Parameters 202 Level Trigger 2 Parameters 203 Level Trigger 3 ParameterS ccceceeeeeeeeeeeees 203 Level Trigger 4 Parameters 203 Level Trigger Parameters Level Triggers Parameter Leyening seeresseteseseeeeeeieneateeeteneeeesntatenseneeneaneens Licenses How to Move Them Listening to Annotations Laight Peer ee eee eee eee ree rere reer r errr errr ree rere reer reer errr errr errr rere ret Locking the Pushbuttons and Display Logged Broadband 100 ms Parameters Logged Broadband Parameters cseeeeeee Logged Measurement Parameters Broadband Parameters ceeeeeeeeeeees 222 Equivalent Continuous Sound Levels 220 For Enhanced Logging Software BZ 7225 220 222 For Logging Software BZ 7224 220 222 Maximum Time weighted Sound Levels 220 Minimum Time weighted Sound Levels 220 Parameters Available Per
182. eeeeseeeeeneeeeneeeeeeseeeeeneees 40 Built in Hel Pis cccccscced pendent a hee eel e a eid pit et aai ii 40 5 3 What is Utility Software for Hand held Analyzers BZ 5503 ee eeeeeeeeeeee 40 5 4 Basic Principles when using the Analyzer esceesceeeseeeeeteeeeeteeeseneeeeeees 41 Navigation Principles Star Navigation Concept e eee eeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 41 The Display SereGNse sereine otini na iea e ia aee aen tia aTa eeta aa 45 Use of Pushbuttons for Controlling Measurement eeeeeeeeenerereeerneree 47 On screen Feedback and Traffic Light eee eesceeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeneeeeeees 48 Use of Stylus and Navigation Pushbuttons ccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenees 48 How to Change Parameter Values eeceeseeeeseeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeseaeeeeseeeeeeeeees 49 How to Personalise your Setup eecceeesceeseeeeneeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeseaeeenseeeeeeeeee 51 How to Manage the Project Templates eceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeseeeneeeenes 53 Locking the Pushbuttons and Display eceesseeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeees 54 CHAPTER 6 Data Manageme nit icici secs sad candntate ada thenidinatsteordoucusseaasadeantubialolaatienaeadskacdsderusewsaccue 55 6 1 Organising Measurement eeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeceeeeeeeeeeeeaeeseaeeeeeeseeneeseaeeseeeeeeees 55 Description of Jobs and Projects 00 0 eee eee eeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeseaeeeeeeeneeeeees 55 Navigating in
183. eeeseeeteeeeees 11 Image Adding to Current Measurement ee 44 Image Settings Type 2270 only nesese 244 Image to Current Measurement ceeceeees 24 Impulse Time Weighting 0 eee eee eeeeees 37 Impulse Trigger Parameter eee eeeeeeees 197 Impulsive Excitation Method Reverberation Time ccccccseceeeeteeeeeeteeeeeeee 140 Impulsive Method 0 0 cece cece eee cere eeeeeeeneeeneeeeaes 142 Indicator Status Aten Gaia nt ei ee 5 Indoor Colour SCHEME 1 0 0 eeeeceeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeteeeeeeaee 68 Initial Sound Level Meter Screen ceeeeees 17 INPUt oo eee cette eeeeees Input 1 Input CHi2 8 nan nna aa a na 8 Input for Microphone sssessssesreeresererresrrerrerrerrrerrer 6 Input Parameters Input Channel 1 for Type 2270 Input Parameters for Type 2250 Input Parameters for Type 2270 Input Channel 2 for Type 2270 Inserting Annotations Using Explorer Installing Updating and Upgrading Applications 89 Instantaneous Time weighted Sound Levels Laf 4 39 222 Instantaneous Measured Parameters 39 222 Instantaneous Measured Spectra ceeeeeeeees 222 Instantaneous Peak Sound Levels Lopeak ts 39 256 Hand held Analyzers Types 2250 and 2270 User Manual Instantaneous Sound Pressure Level 0 222 Instrument Component eceeeeeeeeeeeeeteeteeeeeeatees 3 Instrument Parameters ccccccececeeseeesseeee
184. ees Exposure TiIMG cccesesesrecsscsoseessecescesesseenseesseesoser Extended Low Frequency Parameter 00 187 Extended Microphone ceeeeeeeseeeeeeseeeeeeeees 12 External Power Socket essscsscesseeeeeeeeereeerenteeees 8 F ft Parameter enn A ee ows f2 Parameter Fast Time Weighting FB 0679 Hinged Cover sessies First Check Parametel ccccccsceeeeeteeeeeeeeteeeees Fourth Check Parameter Frequency Frequency Analysis 1 1 or 1 3 00taV sasseesnsesserrsseereeresnrerrensreereaes Displaying the Results 0 0 0 eee eeeeeeeees Frequency Analysis Project Template Frequency Analysis Software BZ 7223 39 101 Frequency Weighting cc cece 37 247 248 Frequency Weighting Parameters eeee 191 Frequency WeightingS c cee eeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeees 20 Full Spectral Stat for Reports Parameter eerren 194 G General Parameters esseceeseeseeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeee 217 Generator Setting UDe aana aT a wach ades eet 102 Generator Parameters c cecceseereeeeeereeneeeeeeneees 210 GIOSSANY APE EAA EE E E AEA E 245 H Hand held Analyzer ssesseseseseesieerrerresrrerrerrnerrens 38 Handling the Instrument 0 cece eeeeeeeeeees 97 Handswitch ee Hardware Overview ccccecseesseeeteeeeeeeeeeeeeeenees 10 Hardware Setup eceeeeseseesesseeeeesseeseeseeeeeeeaeeeees 10 Hardware Versi
185. ely to ever experience a large drift or change in sensitivity with the analyzer it is nevertheless good practice to perform regular calibrations normally before and after each set of measurements Often calibration is required by measurement standards such as IEC 61672 1 If you want your analyzer to remind you when the next Accredited Traceable calibration is due you can set it up on the Reminder tab of the Calibration screen See section 4 9 You can check the complete measurement chain during long term measurement using Charge Injection Calibration See section 4 10 Acoustic Calibration Acoustic calibration is the preferred calibration method when measuring with microphones particularly when standards and regulations require calibration before a measurement The method involves applying an acoustic signal of known magnitude and frequency to the microphone which calibrates all the instrument s components microphone preamplifier and electrical circuitry Sound Level Calibration To perform acoustic calibration use Sound Calibrator Type 4231 It provides a stable sound pressure at 1 kHz and has minimal susceptibility to environmental factors The procedure itself is relatively simple and on the analyzer the procedure is referred to as the Standard Calibration procedure The procedure for performing an acoustic calibration and instructions on how to fit the calibra tor are given in the following section 4 3 1 Fig 4 1
186. ement CHAPTER 3 Making your First Measurement 21 3 4 Save your Measurement When you have completed your measurement you need to save it By default the analyzer creates a job folder called JOB 01 Job folders represent the upper level of the data or file management system with individual measurements or sets of data represented by projects appearing under the relevant job By default the analyzer also creates a project called Project 00 under JOB OJ Subsequent measurements will be labelled Project 002 Project 003 etc under JOB 01 This will happen each time you have saved a measurement Check that the data path at the top of the screen displays VOB OJ Project 001 and save your measurement by pressing the Save pushbutton Y For more details refer to section 6 1 Note An asterisk will appear alongside the project at the top of the status field as soon as you start your measurement see Fig 3 7 This signifies that the measurement has not been saved It will disappear once you have saved the measurement Fig 3 7 Saving your measurement LAF l l 0 an 20 40 60 80 14 51 14 3 4 1 Viewing the Saved Measurement 1 To view the saved measurement tap project name or the Main Menu icon and select Explorer from the list of options Tap the name of your measurement Project 001 in this case and select View from the drop down that appears see Fig 3 8 Or just tap the measurement icon to the left of the nam
187. ement path As in the project template an x will appear next to the project name to indicate that the project has not been saved Press the Save pushbutton amp if you want to save the measurement or changed settings Smiley if applicable The PC icon indicates connection to a PC The commentary icon indicates when a spoken commentary is being recorded together with an indication of the available recording time The recording icon 59 indicates when the measurement signal is being recorded A paperclip icon indicates that a spoken or written comment is attached to the project Tap the icon to view or listen to the comment Second Line Measurement state represented as icons Stopped W Running _ and the Pause icon Elapsed time of the measurement Feedback on the action of pressing the following pushbuttons Reset Back erase 7 Start Pause and Save Y Indication that the measurement microphone is uncalibrated In this case the word Uncal appears in the Status Field When a microphone has been selected as input then four icons are used to represent whether or not the windscreen is fitted and whether you are measuring in a free field or diffuse field For example no windscreen fitted measuring in a free field no wind screen fitted measuring in a diffuse field s windscreen fitted measuring in a free field t windscreen fitted measuring in a diffuse field r t An accelerometer i
188. ements as required e Annotations Text attached to measurements as required e Annotations Image attached to measurements as required Type 2270 only e Sound Recordings attached to measurements as required The Project name is automatically created by combining the Project Name Prefix with a number starting from 001 i e Project 001 for the first project Project 002 for the next etc If preferred the Project Name Prefix can be changed from the default name of Project To do this tap the Main Menu icon EB then Preferences followed by Storage Settings to reveal the Project Name Prefix Tap the current name to reveal a keyboard for you to type in the required name Projects are saved in folders which are called jobs on your analyzer These are similar to folders in the Windows filing system a 6 1 2 Fig 6 1 The Explorer screen Hand held Analyzers Types 2250 and 2270 User Manual Jobs can be created in the internal memory on a Secure Digital SD Card or on a Compact Flash CF Card Navigating in Jobs On the analyzer a results browser called Explorer is used to navigate through the jobs and projects To view all jobs and projects tap the Main Menu icon and select Explorer from the list of options or simply tap the Project Name on the measurement screen A screen similar to Fig 6 1 will appear Time Project 002 28 11 2006 11 35 Project 003 28 11 2006 12 16 Project 005 29
189. ent has been left unused for the time specified in the Turn off Backlight parameter the backlight level will change to the dim level Minimum This state will hold for the time specified in the Turn off Backlight Dim parameter if still left unused If the instrument has been left unused for the time specified in the Turn off Backlight parameter plus the Turn off Backlight Dim time period then the backlight will be switched off completely Fig 8 4 Use the keyboard or tap the screen to switch the backlight on again Fig 8 4 a Standby Parameter Re Power Settings overview gt Turn off Backlight Turn off Backlight Dim Backlight off Parameter Parameter Time 040284 1 If the instrument is left unused not measuring and not communicating over the USB interface it will go to standby after the time specified in the Standby parameter If in standby mode you must press to switch the instrument on again The instrument will automatically switch off when it has been in standby mode without external power for more than 30 hours Note 1 If the instrument is powered externally the Standby After parameters are ignored and the instrument will never go to standby However if the instrument is left unused for more than Standby After time the Standby After setting will overrule the Backlight settings and the backlight will be switched off 70 8 1 3 Fig 8 5 Regional Settings screen 8 1 4 Hand he
190. ent to a default state where the user is set to 2250 for Type 2250 and 2270 for Type 2270 the project template is set to SOUND LEVEL METER and No Transducer is selected The existing SOUND LEVEL METER project template will be overwritten as will the preferences for user 2250 for Type 2250 and 2270 for Type 2270 To reset the instrument to the default state Press and hold the power on pushbutton for at least 5 seconds power off Press and hold down the Commentary and Save amp pushbuttons while switching on the instrument The display in Fig 9 3 will be shown Fig 9 3 Maintenance Mode initial screen Maintenance mode Please wait Within a few seconds the display in Fig 9 4 will be shown Fig 9 4 Update 2250 software screen Update 2250 Software Press to accept or any other key to cancel 96 Hand held Analyzers Types 2250 and 2270 User Manual Press any other pushbutton than the Accept pushbutton V to continue Fig 9 5 Reset to default settings screen Reset to default settings Press to accept or any other key to cancel Press the Accept pushbutton v to reset to default settings If the instrument now functions normally you should select the correct transducer again in the Transducers menu make your preferred settings in the Preferences menu adjust the touch screen again and make necessary changes to Setup all accessed via the Main Menu B If you experience
191. erated in the presence of flammable liquids or gases Warnings e Switch off all power to equipment before connecting or disconnecting their digital inter face Failure to do so could damage the equipment e Whenever it is likely that the correct function or operating safety of the apparatus has been impaired it must be made inoperative and be secured against unintended operation e Any adjustment maintenance and repair of the open apparatus under voltage must be avoided as far as possible and if unavoidable must be carried out only by trained service personnel Do not dispose of electronic equipment or batteries as unsorted municipal waste Itis your responsibility to contribute to a clean and healthy environment by using the appropriate local return and collection systems e Hazardous substances in electronic equipment or batteries may have detrimental effects on the environment and human health The symbol shown to the left indicates that separate collection systems must be used for any discarded equipment or batteries marked with that symbol e Waste electrical and electronic equipment or batteries may be returned to your local Briiel amp Kj r representative or to Briiel amp Kj r Headquarters for disposal Trademarks Microsoft Windows and Excel are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation PCL is a registered trademark of the Hewlett Packard Company Pentium is a registered trademark of Intel Corporation
192. eriod with A frequency weighting The level is based on statistical analysis of Laeg sampled at 1 s intervals into 0 2 dB wide classes The percentage is user definable The Sound Pressure Level maximum time weighted sound level during the latest second is available at any time A denotes that the A frequency weighting is used F denotes that the Fast time weighting is used Taktmaximal Mittelungspegel as defined by DIN 45641 Larteg has also been called LAFTm5 or Latm5F Average Sound Level with Time Weighting U F or S and Exchange Rate Q 4 5 or 6 This is a widely used occupational health noise parameter in the USA corresponding to the LAeq used otherwise Maximum peak sound level during a measurement C denotes that the C frequency weighting is used Used for assessing possible damages to human hearing caused by very high short duration noise levels Maximum peak sound level during the latest second is available at any time C denotes that the C frequency weighting is used Used for monitoring the peak levels Noise Indicators for describing the annoyance due to exposure to environmental noise Laen day evening night noise indicator Lgay day noise indicator Levening evening noise indicator and Lyight night noise indicator are defined by the European Union They are based on Lagg over different periods Lgay over the day period from 7 00 to 19 00 Levening over the evening period from 19 00 to 23
193. errupted Noise Method ee eeceeeceeeseeeeneeeeseeeeseesneeeeeeeeessaeeseeeeneeeeeeeeened 142 Impulsive Method idei ieren re a a ea a ea eea ieee 142 SOUNGIRECOAING s22 2 eee Peach E T T 143 Controlling the MeaSUreMeNt eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeaeeseaeeseeeeeseneetaes 143 Annotating Projects and Positions 000 eee eeceeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeaeeeeneeeeeeeeees 143 14 3 Displaying the Results 0 00 eee eeeee cess eeeeeeeeaeeeeaeeseaeeseaeeeteaeeseaeeeseeeeeees 144 OVEINVIOW asein il ecereh tacit gis naenda ea Mckee heptane Me eee Ghee 144 SPOCIUM piee erai ieai eeii haenar Gs aiena a aaaea icp ee Eh gee a 146 Decay aii tenia Daata eenaa aeaa ee a a anA Aae he eee tL sesh ae 148 14 4 Measurements with Graphical Position Management eeeececeeceeeeeeeee 150 14 5 Quality Indicators n t eaae naapi aapea an enata aiaa alias 154 14 6 Saving and Recalling Results seseeeeeseeseesreesresrrerirerrrerrnerrnerrnsirneirnsrensreeet 155 CHAPTER 15 Tone Assessment Option BZ 7231 1 3 octave Method sccccccssee 157 15 1 Generalnie aenieei idobsdivlvonextalvezed0i leanedededuyezewteed dasdyisteavli Ns Nostessceetarehs 157 15 2 Tone Assessment According to ISO 1996 2 Annex D cccccceeeeeeeeeetees 158 ISO 1996 2 Annex D Tone Assessment Calculations 00000 158 15 3 Tone Assessment according to Italian Law 0 eee eeeeeeeeneeteneeteneeeeeees 160 15 4 Setting up
194. esenessenessneseeeeeeeeeeenenerseneres 71 Multi User Facllity sci ee ea anae neea ae a ea ea e ai 72 Printer Settihg Since eae a e e e e delet 73 8 2 Modem DynDNsS Settings eee eeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeseaeeeaeeeeeeeeeeeaeessaeeeeneeeeeeeeee 73 Connection Through Modem 0 eeeeeeseeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeseaeeseeeseeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeees 74 Connection to Network using GPRS EDGE HSPA Modem c ceeeee 75 B DN E E E E site eet eat 76 8 3 NetWork Settings rei nni eei eean eai ti iaaeaie eee ghsaae sans adia ninapi wished 77 Parameters in Network Settings eeeeeeeeseeesieerieerrerirerrrerrrerrnerrnerrneirnsiresirresieene 78 8 4 Notifications ii e eaii enke ineen he Gast ie ehsdian cas Meee wate 80 8 5 WOb S0NVOr n ei ei aa eaaa Taensa Bee Gk anart asda naaran Dee egesteeaagtsedh owhatess 83 8 6 Preparing your Measurement eeeceeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeaeeseaeeeeeeeeeeeeee 84 Metadatars mints cccucchsccutshecesghs cath Gers onc ces Gh ieee ogdt Bes ibs doee sons E E T 85 Timers and Automatic Measurement eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeennees 86 CHAPTER 9 Updating and Upgrading Applications Maintenance Calibration and Troubleshooting ccccsssssesseeeeeeeeseeeeseeees 89 9 1 How to Install New Applications 0 cece cece eeeeeeeeneeeeneeeeeeeeeeneeseaeeseeeeeeeeeee 89 9 2 How to Update Upgrade Applications and Install New Languages 89 Update Upgrade using BZ 5508
195. eteeeeees 5 23 Comments Adding on Profiles cece ee eeeeeeeeeneeeee 118 Compact Flash CF Cards Slot ff sedcctata cennnwicisite tata ia trent 8 Compliance with Standards 183 Connecting Preamplifier and Measurement Microphone 12 Connecting a Microphone Extension Cable 13 Connector triaxial LEMO ere e o eera aren ap naaraat aea Eae cess Connector Panel of Type 2270 Continuous Logging Parameter 0 cceee Controlling Measurements c cccceeeeceeeeeeeeeseseeeeseneeetsaeees 47 the Frequency Analysis Measurement 102 the Reverberation Time Measurement 143 Conventions Used in this Manual eeee 1 Copying Jobs Projects s 57 Cover Current Transducer Parameter eeneeeeee 227 C weighting seseesesseseeeesiersensinsirrnnrnrinrnrrsrnsinrnsrnenne 37 C weighting filter oo ee ee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 245 D Daily CIC Parameter e eeeeceeeeeseeereereeteeeteetees 194 Daily Noise Exposure Levels Lep q or LEx gh 38 Data Management eee eee ee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 55 Data Viewer Decay Graphs in Reverberation Time Software 148 Decay Tab in Reverberation Time Software 148 Decibel OB eeeeceeeereeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeneeeeeaeees 245 Decimal Places NUMbE Of A AEEA E E 68 234 Default Measurement Job Path Selecting ena estes viveseteeeeuyeet Definition of Freque
196. ettings Colour Scheme Indoor amp Traffic Light Brightness Normal Keyboard BackLight Off Number of Decirnal Places i Adjust Touch Screen gt f Power Settings Regional Settings Storage Settings Headphone Settings be Users Printer Settings Maodem DynDNS Settings The colour schemes are e Indoor scheme for everyday use e Alhambra and Arcade schemes alternative colour schemes for everyday use e Outdoor scheme for very bright conditions where you need as much contrast as possible e Night scheme for measuring under very dark conditions where is needed night vision For each colour scheme you can select the optimum choice of brightness for the traffic light e g High for Outdoor in bright light conditions and Low for Night in dark conditions and whether to have backlight on the keyboard In very bright lighting conditions you will not be able to see the backlight set it to Off to save some power A link is also provided in Display Settings to adjust the touch sensitive screen Tap Adjust Touch Screen gt to display a full screen with guidance on how to tap a cross five times at different places on the screen At the end of the adjustment procedure you can save the values or cancel the adjustment To change the number of decimal places on your dB results readout tap Number of Decimal Places and set to either 1 or 2 decimal places as required This setting is for display only and has n
197. f The Ref mentioned here is the reference created by the very first manual CIC and is the one used as the reference to all subsequent CIC Ratio measurements see section 4 10 Note If a Level Trigger is active when the CIC is due to start then the CIC will not be done Annotating a Project Measurements can be annotated in the same way as you annotate Logging measurements See section 11 2 1 Recording Sound Sound Recording can be done in the same way as described under Logging measurements See section 11 2 2 Displaying the Results The Enhanced Logging measurement screen includes three tabs at the bottom Profile Spectrum and Broadband View as the Logging measurement screen does You view the data in the same way as in the Logging module You mark and annotate sound categories and edit markers and annotations in the same way as in the Logging module please see Chapter 11 The Result Selector first item in the third line of the status field determines whether results from the Total Logged Logged 100 ms or Report measurement are displayed If you need to display data from another day of the measurement then use Explorer to select and open the project from that day The Profile View The Profile view displays a profile of a logged broadband parameter dB versus time See Fig 12 1 CHAPTER 12 Enhanced Logging Optional Module 125 Fig 12 1 ENHANCED LOGGING Profile View in Enhanced Logging
198. f a timer is to initiate measurements in the absence of an operator Basically a timer will Switch on the analyzer at a preset time Load a preselected template Start a measurement as specified in the template Stop the measurement after a preset time defined by the Timer Setup Save the measurement Switch the analyzer off Repeat the above a preset number of times at preset intervals For a timer to work the analyzer must be in the switched off state A timer will never interrupt the analyzer if it is already in use manually If a switch on time is during the time the analyzer is in use the timer opportunity is lost You can control the analyzer during a timer initiated measurement as long as this does not affect the measurements If you try to change any parameters affecting the measurement you will be warned of this If you persist the analyzer will revert to manual control and timer control cannot be resumed The Timer Setup lists the timers that have been defined previously on the analyzer i e added by you or previous users Fig 8 10 tup Example Timer Setup BK BS l State Enabled Name Nightshift LOGGING Start Time 01 01 2069 00 00 00 Preset Time 01 00 00 No of Starts 1 Timer Dayshift Timer Timeshift Timer Big Bang J In the topmost line you can add other timers by tapping on the Add New Timer icon BX You can delete a timer from the list by tapping on the Delete Timer icon W O
199. f you think your instrument requires service please contact your Briiel amp Kjer representative e Do not allow the instrument to get wet e Protect the instrument from impact Do not drop it Transport it in the supplied carrying pouch 9 5 2 Cleaning the Instrument If the instrument casing becomes dirty then wipe it with a lightly dampened cloth Do not use abrasive cleansers or solvents Do not allow moisture to enter the microphone connectors or casing 9 5 3 Storing the Instrument e Keep the sound level meter in a dry place preferably within its carrying pouch e For long term storage remove the battery pack e Do not exceed storage temperature limits of 25 to 70 C 13 to 158 F a 9 6 9 6 1 9 6 2 9 6 3 9 6 4 9 6 5 9 6 6 Hand held Analyzers Types 2250 and 2270 User Manual Services at Bruel amp Kjzer for Types 2250 and 2270 Accredited Calibration For Types 2250 and 2270 you can order accredited calibration and choose between DANAK A2LA UKAS Eichamt Austria RVA ENAC NATA and Inmetro For Spain Primitiva is available The calibration will be performed in an ISO 17025 certified laboratory Initial Calibration To start the measurement history from day one if this is required for example for measurement use in public for customer audit or quality procedures we recommend you order accredited calibration together with the new instrument Regular Re calibration T
200. fer to Chapter 13 for information about the Sound Recording Option Note When Type 2250 2270 recordings are to be used for re analysis on a PC be sure to select Automatic Gain Control parameter to Off under the Sound Recording parameters and select the Recording Quality parameter to High Measuring Result Display Tone assessment is not performed until the Tone parameter is selected above the spectrum This is done by tapping one of the parameter fields in the two lines above the spectrum display and choosing Tone from the drop down menu Once selected tone assessment is carried out on the selected spectrum The results are updated during the measurement CHAPTER 15 Tone Assessment Option BZ 7231 1 3 octave Method 165 Fig 15 8 Selecting the Tone parameter above the spectrum display On the results display a blue marker is set at the top of each detected band with a tone Differences to the left and right of the frequency band selected by the main cursor are shown on the left and right in the tone parameter panel above the spectrum see Fig 15 9 The main cursor is moved using either the hard keys or the stylus Fig 15 9 FREQUENCY A The differences to the left TF and right of the selected frequency band are LZFmin at 1 25 kHz 45 shown in the tone gt i We 11 48 parameter panel in this 140 example there is a 11 4 dB difference to the left and a 3 9 dB difference to the right 102 65
201. ff Backlight DIM 68 TWA mt aani 252 TWA jist eed ar a A a i a a aN 252 Type 2250 Input Parameters seseseeseeseesrrerrsrreerrerreerrerreres Type 2250 Hand held Analyzer Type 2250 2270 Microphones s s Type 2270 Camera ss nhien en ai ridae ataei i Connecting Two Microphones sses High Speed USB and LAN Interfaces mage Settings eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeceseeeeeeeeteeeeeeneees Input Parameters seseseeseesessieerrerrerrnrrnernerneres Input Parameters Channel 1 Input Parameters for Channel 1 Input Parameters for Channel 2 Type 2270 Hand held Analyzer ecceeeeeeeeeeeeeee 1 Type 4189 Microphone cceceeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeeeeeeee 6 U UA 1673 Adaptor for Standard Tripod eee 6 US Occupational Health Parameters 217 219 221 USB Inteace i22 es eds Ake el ace 6 USB interface sc 28 deeseeiscenis eniin 76 USB Interface Socket cccccecceceseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 6 Use of Pushbuttons for Controlling Measurements 47 Stylus and Navigation Pushbuttons 48 Users Parameter ccccccecceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteneeeeeeaee 237 Utility Software for Hand held Analyzers BZ 5508 ee 40 V Version of Hardware and Software View and Control Instrument Web Page i View Instrument Web Page sesesssessseseerrererrnreen Viewing Data eee Viewing or Listening to Annotations Viewing the Saved Measurement WwW Warm
202. for CCLD Constant Current Line No Drive transducers otherwise set to No Set automatically for known Microphone Type Note Set Input to Rear Socket The CCLD input at the Rear socket will automatically be enabled when selecting a transducer requiring CCLD input 230 Hand held Analyzers Types 2250 and 2270 User Manual C 2 2 Calibration History Table C 3 Calibration History parameters Parameter Values Comment 1 Calibration date amp Time YYYY MM DD hh mm ss Initial 1 Sensitivity Double Initial mV Pa 1 Preamplifier ID No Text string Initial 1 User Text string Initial 1 Input Top Socket Rear Socket Initial 1 Calibration Type External Internal Initial 1 Calibrator Serial No Text string Initial 1 Comment Text string Initial 1 Analyzer Serial No Text string Initial 2 Calibration date amp Time YYYY MM DD hh mm ss 2 Sensitivity Double 2 Preamplifier ID No Text string 2 User Text string 2 Input Top Socket Rear Socket 2 Calibration Type External Internal 2 Calibrator Serial No Text string 2 Comment Text string 2 Analyzer Serial No Text string N Calibration date amp Time YYYY MM DD hh mm ss Current N Sensitivity Double Current N Preamplifier ID No Text string Current N User Text string Current N Input Top Socket Rear Socket Current N Calibration Type External Internal Current N Calibrator Serial
203. for pattern evaluation type approval purposes but have no bearing on normal use The additional technical documentation is given in a separate Briiel amp Kj r instruction BE 1712 manual 169 Hand held Analyzers Types 2250 and 2270 User Manual Type 2250 2270 Platform Specifications apply to Type 2250 2270 fitted with Microphone Type 4189 and Microphone Preamplifier ZC 0032 SUPPLIED MICROPHONE Type 4189 Prepolarized Free field 1 2 Microphone or Type 4190 Free field 1 2 Microphone Nominal Open circuit Sensitivity 50 mV Pa corresponding to 26 dB re 1 V Pa 1 5 dB Capacitance 14 pF at 250 Hz MICROPHONE PREAMPLIFIER ZC 0032 Nominal Preamplifier Attenuation 0 25 dB Connector 10 pin LEMO Extension Cables Up to 100 m in length between the microphone preamplifier and Type 2250 2270 without degradation of the specifications Accessory Detection Windscreen UA 1650 can be automatically detected when fitted over ZC 0032 MICROPHONE POLARIZATION VOLTAGE Selectable between 0 V and 200 V SELF GENERATED NOISE LEVEL Typical values at 23 C for nominal microphone open circuit sensitivity Weighting Microphone Electrical Total A 14 6 dB 12 4dB 16 6 dB B 13 4 dB 11 5dB 15 6 dB C 13 5 dB 12 9dB 16 2 dB Z 5 Hz 20 kHz 15 3 dB 18 3dB 20 1 dB Z 3 Hz 20 kHz 15 3 dB 25 5dB 25 9 dB KEYBOARD Pushbuttons 11 keys
204. g the Use as new Reference checkbox The CIC Reference Ratio and CIC Ref Date parameters display the results of the very first manual CIC and this will be used as the reference for all subsequent CIC Ratio measurements Note Each microphone in the transducer database has a CIC Reference Ratio If the CIC Ratio parameter deviates by more than 0 5 dB from the CIC Reference Ratio there may be a problem and it should be investigated see page 36 36 Hand held Analyzers Types 2250 and 2270 User Manual Fig 4 9 CALIBRATION CIC tab Ensure quie CIC Reference Ratio 38 07 dB CIC Ref Date 27 11 2008 22 13 49 CIC Ratio 38 10 dB CIC Ratio Date 01 12 2008 10 49 01 Deviation from Reference 0 03 dB CIC Result Passed Input Channel Ch 1 Remind 20 57 49 The result of the Charge Injection Calibration consists of four parameters e CIC Ratio e CIC Ratio Date e Deviation from Reference e CIC Result The CIC result can be either Passed Background noise too high or CIC Ratio deviates from Ref Chapter 5 5 1 Getting to Know Your Analyzer What is a Sound Level Meter A Sound Level Meter SLM is an instrument that is designed to measure sound levels in a standardised way A sound level meter comprises a microphone a preamplifier a main processor and a read out unit The microphone converts the sound signal into an equivalent electric signal The electric signal that the micro
205. ged broadband parameter dB versus time This is very convenient when marking sound categories on line or annotating the measurement See Fig 11 3 a Requires License for Sound Recording Software BZ 7226 Fig 11 3 Profile View showing extended status field CHAPTER 11 Logging Optional Module Releresii le LAeq 103 8 dB 140 Sound 110 80 me 20 Gl 20 32 57 20 33 47 20 34 37 Time Remaining 23 57 33 Profile Spectrum Broadband 38 20 3 Status Field The Status Field has been extended to include an extra line of information below the two existing lines of information covered previously in the Sound Level Meter and Frequency Analyzer see Fig 11 3 This extra line of information allows you to Select whether the results of the Total measurement from the Logged measurement or from the Logged 100 ms measurement are displayed Select Total to display the measurement parameters of the Total measurement in all the views the Broadband and Spectrum views will then display parameters or spectra similar to the Sound Level Meter or Frequency Analyzer The Profile View will be empty because the Total measurement contains only a single set of parameters Select Logged to display the measurement parameters from the logging intervals The cursor in the profile selects which logging interval is displayed in all the views Select Logged 100 ms to display the Lagg Lap or Las in the prof
206. hapter 2 and the analyzer has a fully charged battery see section 2 5 1 Point and Shoot Using the following basic procedure you will be able to start using your hand held analyzer immediately to make measurements and start the familiarisation process 1 Switch on by pressing and make sure the SOUND LEVEL METER Project Template is selected 2 Check that the data path at the top of the screen displays the correct job project i e where you want to save the new data See section 6 1 1 3 Set Measurement Mode to manual and change any setup parameters by tapping the Main Menu icon and selecting Setup from the drop down that appears 4 Press the Start Pause pushbutton then monitor the status indicator traffic light 5 Use the Start Pause Continue 4 Back erase and Reset pushbuttons to control the measurement 6 When measurement has finished press the Save pushbutton to save your data gt 3 2 1 3 3 3 3 1 3 3 2 Hand held Analyzers Types 2250 and 2270 User Manual 7 Add any spoken comments to the measurements by pressing the Commentary pushbutton and add any written comments by tapping the Main Menu icon and selecting Add Note to Current Measurement from the drop down that appears 8 To view and organise your data tap the Main Menu icon and select Explorer Note You are not required to set any measurement ranges on the analyzer the instrument has a dynamic range of more
207. he logging time in parallel with logging All broadband data statistics and spectra license for BZ 7223 required MARKERS One data exclusion marker and four user definable markers for on line marking of sound categories heard during the measurement Events can be set manually TRIGGERS Markers can be set and sound recordings can be started license for BZ 7226 required when a broadband level is above or below a specified level ANNOTATIONS On line annotations with spoken comments written notes or images Type 2270 only CIC CHARGE INJECTION CALIBRATION Injects an internally generated electrical signal in parallel with the microphone diaphragm A manual CIC can be performed whenever there is no measurement in progress An automatic CIC can be performed at the start and end of a logging measurement MEASUREMENT DISPLAYS Profile Graphical display of selectable measurement data versus time Fast display of next or previous marker Profile Overview of entire measurement Y axis Range 5 10 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 or 160 dB Auto zoom or auto scale available X axis Scroll facilities Cursor Readout of measurement data at selected time NOTIFICATIONS Alarm Conditions in addition to those specified for BZ 7222 CIC failed Trigger Level exceeded Software Specifications Enhanced Logging Software BZ 7225 The specifications for BZ 7225 include the specifications for Logging Software BZ 7224 BZ 722
208. herefore ready for post process ing and reporting back at the office using Utility Software for Hand held Analyzers BZ 5503 or other post processing software such as Noise Explorer Type 7815 Evaluator Type 7820 Protector Type 7825 or Microsoft Excel Check the About Menu to see whether you have the right license to run the Sound Recording module The About Menu is accessed from built in help tap on the shortcut bar then select About See Chapter 9 for instructions on installing the license for the Sound Recording Module Sound Level Meter and Frequency Analysis Software You can use the Sound Recording facility together with the Sound Level Meter Software and the Frequency Analysis Software You can record the sound for the whole measurement period or you can record sound for controlled parts of the measurement The recordings are attached to the project as annotations named Soundrec N where N is the number of the recording for the project section 3 5 and section 6 3 3 for a description of how to use annotations Note 1 Sound recordings can only be done during measurements Note 2 Sound recordings can only be done on projects saved on SD or CF cards Setting up the Instrument 1 Select a Sound Level Meter Project Template or a Frequency Analyzer Project Tem plate see section 3 3 1 for more details on templates 127 128 Hand held Analyzers Types 2250 and 2270 User Manual 2 Insert an SD or CF memory ca
209. ic Using Sound Calibrator Type 4231 or custom calibrator The calibration process automatically detects the calibration level when Sound Calibrator Type 4231 is used Electrical Uses internally generated electrical signal combined with a typed in value of microphone sensitivity Calibration History Up to 20 of the last calibrations made are listed and can be viewed on the instrument CHAPTER 16 Specifications 179 Signal Monitoring Input signal A C or Z weighted can be monitored using an earphone headphones connected to the headphone socket Headphone Signal Input signal can be monitored using this socket with headphones earphones Gain Adjustment 60 dB to 60 dB Voice Annotations Voice annotations can be attached to the Reverberation Time Project to Sources to Receivers and to measurements at each Position Playback Playback of voice annotations or sound recordings can be listened to using earphone headphones connected to the headphone socket Gain Adjustment 60 dB to 0 dB Text amp Image Annotations Text and image Type 2270 only annotations can be attached to the Reverberation Time Project to Sources to Receivers and to measurements at each Position Data Management Project Template Defines the display and measurement setups Project Measurement data for all positions defined in a room are stored with the Project Template Job Projects are organised in Jobs Explorer facilities for easy management of
210. ieceite uiia EA EAA aiia 30 4 7 Calibration History ee eee cece ceseeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeaeeseaeeeesaeeseaeeseaeeseaeesseeeeeeneeneaes 30 4 8 Transducer Database 200 eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeaeeseaeeeeeeeeeeaeeseaeeeeeeseeeeeeeaeeeeaes 31 4 9 Calibration Reminder ee eee eee eeeeeeeereeeeeeeeeaeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeaeeesaeeseeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeaes 33 4 10 Charge Injection Calibration cece eeceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeessaeeseeeeeeeeeeeaeeesaes 34 Theory of CCaserta a a aa no enc nevi eae 34 Performing a Manual CIC Calibration with your Type 2250 2270 eee 35 CHAPTER 5 Getting to Know Your Amal yZet ccecccseseeeeesseeeeeeeeseeeeeeeseeeeeeeseeeeeeseneneneeeees 37 5 1 What is a Sound Level Meter 00 eeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeaeeseseeseeneeeeaeeeseeeneees 37 5 2 Whatis the Hand held Analyzer cee eeeseeseeeeeneeseneeeeeeeeseeseseeeeeeeseneeeeneees 38 Sound Level Meter Software Module BZ 7222 o oo eeceeeceeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeees 38 Frequency Analysis Software Module BZ 7223 0 eeeeceeeseeeeeeeeneeeeseeeeeeeeee 39 Logging Software Module BZ 7224 ooo eeceeseeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeteaeeeeeeeeeeeeee 39 Enhanced Logging Software Module BZ 7225 oe eeeeeeeeseeeneeeeneeeeneeeeeeeeees 39 Sound Recording Option BZ 7226 ooo eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeseseeeseeeeseneeeeeees 39 Reverberation Time Software BZ 7227 0 eeecceeseeeseeeeneeeeneeseeeseseeteeneeeeaeeeeaes 40 Tone Assessment Option BZ 7231 oo eee eeceseseeeeneecen
211. ify a text identifying the analyzer or location of the analyzer The Location will be displayed on the PC together with the serial number of the analyzer when browsing for analyzers in BZ 5503 and when connected using the on line display Network Connection None CF Socket LAN Socket Set to None if no Ethernet CF Card is present in CF Socket Type 2250 only Set to CF Socket if Ethernet CF Card is present in CF Socket Set to LAN Socket if you want to use the built in LAN Socket Type 2270 only Set IP Address Automatically Manually Set to Automatically to obtain an IP address from a DHCP server if no server available then a Link local address will be set Set to Manually to set the IP address Subnet Mask and Default Gateway manually IP Address XXX XXX XXX XXK The IP address of the instrument Selectable if Set IP Address Manually Subnet Mask XXX XXX XXX XXX The Subnet Mask combined with the IP address identifies the network segment the analyzer is on Selectable if Set IP Address Manually Default Gateway XXX XXX XXX XXXK Address to a gateway for routing to another network Selectable if Set IP Address Manually Set DNS Automatically Manually Set to Automatically to automatically obtain the DNS Set to Manually to set the DNS Preferred DNS XXX XXX XXX XXX The IP address of the primary DNS server APPENDIX D Preferences
212. ig 14 15 Map based measurements displayed in a table REVERBERATION TIME lt 100Hz gt S1R1 S2R1 W sirR2 s2R2 Note You can move the data from one position to another Tap a position you want to move and select Cut from the drop down then tap the position where you want to paste it and select Paste This can be done on the map as well as in the table If you want to measure at a specific number of receiver positions per source then the map for one receiver position per source for example will look like Fig 14 16 Fig 14 16 REVERBERATION TIME Map based measurement showing one receiver per source 5 mw T30 lt 1 25 kHz gt s852 Spectrum Note there is only an Add Source icon Ei because the specified number of receivers is added automatically when adding a source 154 Hand held Analyzers Types 2250 and 2270 User Manual 14 5 Table 14 1 Overview of Quality Indicators and Smileys The Spectrum and Decay views function in the same way as when measuring without position managing The only difference is the indication of the position in the status field this is now a Source Receiver selector instead of a position number selector Quality Indicators There are Quality Indicators for each frequency band in each reverberation time spectrum and for each reverberation time spectrum These include letters symbols or smileys see Table 14 1 for an overview One of the quality in
213. ile from the 100 ms logging intervals This setting does not display spectra or parameters in other views View the start time of the measurement for Total or the start time of the current logging interval for Logged or Logged 100 ms if measuring and the profile is not frozen or the start time of the logging interval pointed out by the cursor Tap the start time in any of the views to select data from another logging interval View whether the display of the profile during the measurement is frozen or not When the icon is animated the display is being updated with new logged data during the measurement You can freeze the display update by tapping on the icon This also freezes the icon Tap the icon again to unfreeze the display Step forwards or backwards through the logging intervals on all displays using the R and icons The icons are also connected to the profile cursor so that any corresponding movement backwards or forwards through the intervals in one display will be reproduced in the other 113 114 Hand held Analyzers Types 2250 and 2270 User Manual Some interaction with the display will automatically freeze and unfreeze the display only while measuring e Tap the stylus on the profile This will set the profile cursor and freeze the display update of the profile You can move the cursor to any point in the profile by using the left and right arrow pushbuttons The profile will be scrolled automatically if neces
214. image annotations Tap the annotation name and select Open from the dropdown that appears or tap the icon to open the Image Viewer Tap the J icon to return to the previous screen Select the Metadata tab to see all metadata attached to the project Fig 6 5 You can change the metadata just by tapping on them and entering new values You can also edit the settings for the metadata and reuse specific metadata on new projects by tapping on the Edit icon for the specific metadata further information in section 8 6 K Comment 1 21 05 2010 10 44 K Comment 2 21 05 2010 10 45 Note 1 21 05 2010 10 45 21 05 2010 10 45 21 05 2010 10 45 21 05 2010 10 46 Metadata ad 10 47 34 Fig 6 6inserting Annotations Using Explorer In addition to inserting commentary text or image annotations on your current measurement see section 3 5 you can insert commentary text or image annotations on projects or jobs using Explorer Tap a job or project name and select Add note Add Comment or Add Image Type 2270 only from the drop down that appears Chapter 7 7 1 Connection to PC or Mobile Phone Introduction You can connect to your analyzer from a PC or mobile phone in a number of different ways using a wide range of different connection types e Use Utility Software for Hand held Analyzers BZ 5503 for full control of the analyzer see Section 7 2 e Use an Internet Browser for On line display and control of the analyzer s
215. ime weightings which are the required weightings according to the vast majority of international and national standards and guidelines Once the signal is processed through the weighting filters the resulting sound pressure level is displayed in decibels dB referenced to 20 uPa on the instrument s screen In the analyzer the sound pressure level values are updated at least once per second Assessing a fluctuating noise level means getting a value for a level that is in simple terms the average level The equivalent continuous sound level Leg is known around the world as the essential averaged parameter Leq is the level that had it been a steady level during the a 5 2 5 2 1 Hand held Analyzers Types 2250 and 2270 User Manual measurement period would represent the amount of energy present in the measured fluctuating sound pressure level It is a measure of the averaged energy in a varying sound level It is not a direct measure of annoyance though extensive research has shown that Leq correlates well with annoyance Leq is measured directly with a hand held analyzer such as the analyzer running Sound Level Meter Software BZ 7222 If an A weighting filter is used it is expressed as LAeq defined as the measurement of the equivalent continuous sound level using the A weighted filter network A full range of measurement parameters is given in Appendix B What is the Hand held Analyzer The hand held analyzer is a
216. in may be assessed Assessment is made as post processing i e when measurement is paused or stopped SETUP ACCORDING TO STANDARD Setups in violation of the standard are indicated as such on the display You can then accept to apply the default setup Tone assessment will be made if possible in spite of standard violations For tone assessment according to ISO 1996 2 Annex D you can set the division between the Low and Middle frequency range the division between the Middle and High frequency range and the limits for the level differences between adjacent bands For tone assessment according to DM 16 03 1998 the tones are tested against loudness contours Select between ISO 226 1987 Free field 1987 Diffuse field and 2003 Free field RESULTS Tones are indicated above the spectrum when Tone is selected as spectrum parameter The resulting adjustment can be viewed on the Value panel It is not saved with the measurement QUALITY INDICATORS On the display a quality indicator smiley will indicate that a hint is available for tone assessment quality Click on the indicator to see the hint Software Specifications Utility Software for Hand held Analyzers BZ 5503 BZ 5503 is included with Type 2250 2270 for easy synchronisation of setups and data between PC and Type 2250 2270 BZ 5503 is supplied on DVD BZ 5298 ON LINE DISPLAY OF TYPE 2250 2270 DATA Measurements on Type 2250 2270 can be controlled from the PC and di
217. ing Software BZ 7232 are pre installed on Types 2250 and 2270 In addition Dual channel Building Acoustics Software BZ 7229 are pre installed on Type 2270 However a valid license is required to run the software If you have purchased the instrument together with the software application s then the relevant license s will come pre installed on the instrument If you purchase a separate software application for your analyzer then you have to install the license on the instrument This is done using Utility Software for Hand held Analyzers BZ 5503 please consult the on line help included with the BZ 5503 software for instructions on how to install a license Tap g on the instrument s screen then About to get a list of installed software and licenses How to Update Upgrade Applications and Install New Languages When new versions of the analyzer software become available you may want to install the software on your instrument This is done using the Utility Software for Hand held Analyzers BZ 5503 or if the analyzer is connected to the Internet by the analyzer itself Some software versions will be free updates and some will be upgrades requiring that a new license is purchased 9 2 1 9 2 2 Hand held Analyzers Types 2250 and 2270 User Manual Update Upgrade using BZ 5503 BZ 5503 can be used for updating or upgrading new software applications on your analyzer It can even downgrade to specific software versions if
218. ing your request Extended Low Frequency On Off Use this parameter to extend the low frequency of the broadband measurements and the frequency analysis However be aware that the measurements will be more sensitive to very low frequency noise such as wind noise Extended Low Frequency Off Broadband Z weighting 6 3 Hz to 22 4 kHz 2 dB limits Frequency analysis 1 1 octave 16 Hz 16 kHz 1 3 octave 12 5 Hz 20 kHz Extended Low Frequency On Broadband Z weighting using Type 4189 or 4190 microphone 4 2 Hz to 22 4 kHz 2 dB limits Broadband Z weighting without microphone approx 1 Hz to 22 4 kHz 2 dB limits Frequency analysis 1 1 octave 8 Hz 16 kHz 1 3 octave 6 3 Hz 20 kHz APPENDIX A Setup Parameters 189 Table A 3 Input parameters Type 2270 Parameter Values Comment Trigger Inputa none This parameter should be set to match the equipment connected to the Trigger Input Socket on the connector panel of the analyzer Set it to None if not used MATRON Set Trigger Input to MATRON Handswitch if the Handswitch analyzer is being used in the MATRON system Voltage Level Voltage for Monitoring This setting should also be used if you want to use the handswitch ZH 0680 for manually triggering sound recordings Note This can only be used together with instruments with serial numbers above 2479652 Set Trigger input to Voltage Level if you
219. ion Level expressed in percentage Example If the Criterion Level is 90 dB and a person is exposed to a constant average sound level of 90 dB for 8 hours with Time Weighting S and Exchange Rate 5 then the DoseS5 is 100 A constant level 95 dB results in a DoseS5 of 200 and a constant level of 85 dB results in a doseS5 of 50 The Projected DoseS5 is the Noise DoseS5 based on measurement duration less than 8 hours assuming the sound level for the remaining time stays the same Sound Exposure is the energy of the A weighted sound calculated over the measurement time The unit is Pa h Exchange Rate is the increase in noise level that corresponds to a doubling of the noise level The Exchange Rate is used for calculation of Layyq TWA TWA DoseUQ and ProjDoseUQ where U F or S and Q Exchange Rate 4 5 or 6 dB Note Laeg is always based on an Exchange Rate 3 Exposure Time is the actual time that a person is exposed to noise during a workday Used for calculation of Leng and Lep d v A time weighting sometimes called a time constant defines how the exponential averaging in root mean square RMS measurement is done It defines how the heavily fluctuating sound pressure variations are smoothed or averaged to allow useful readings The standards define three time weightings F Fast S Slow and Impulse Most measurements are carried out using the F time weighting which uses a 125 ms time constant The
220. is set to BC or BZ NOX a Not available in Reverberation Time Software BZ 7227 b Requires Frequency Analysis Software BZ 7223 A 6 Bandwidth Table A 7 Bandwidth parameters Parameter Values Comment Bandwidth 1 1 octave Bandwidth of frequency analysis 1 3 octave Bottom F for Special Leq 6 3 Hz to Top 1 1 octave 8 Hz 16 kHz Frequency 1 3 octave 6 3 Hz 20 kHz Note The lower limit of the parameter depends on Extended Low Frequency Top Freq for Special Leq Bottom 1 1 octave 8 Hz 16 kHz Frequency to 1 3 octave 6 3 Hz 20 kHz 20 kHz a Requires Frequency Analysis Software BZ 7223 or Reverberation Time Software BZ 7227 b For BZ 7223 BZ 7224 and BZ 7225 only A 7 Statistics Table A 8 Statistics parameters Parameter Values Comment Broadband Statistics based on LyXeg The broadband statistics are based on sampling LxF the broadband parameter Lyp or Lyg each 10 ms Lys or Lxeq each second Note X frequency weighting A or B A requires that the Broadband excl Peak parameter is set to AC or AZ B requires that the Broadband excl Peak parameter is set to BC or BZ APPENDIX A Setup Parameters 193 Table A 8 Cont Statistics parameters Parameter Values Comment Spectral Statistics based on LXF The statistics are based on sampling the LXS instantaneous spectrum every 100 ms 200 ms for Exte
221. itation method Fig 14 4 Typical RT measurement cycle for the interrupted noise method dB Sound Level Trigger Level Impulse Start Excitation Time Await Level to exceed l Trigger Level Decay Time i 1s Impulse measurement 060209 Fig 14 4 shows a typical RT measurement cycle performed by the analyzer where the different steps are described as follows 1 After Start the analyzer waits for the level to exceed the Trigger Level indicated on the analyzer in 3 places by the Traffic Light giving a short green flash every second 2 The impulse excitation is made e g a pistol is fired or a balloon is burst Caution the use of hearing protection is highly recommended CHAPTER 14 Reverberation Time Software Optional Module 3 The impulse measurement is started 1 s before the level exceeds the Trigger Level 4 The impulse measurement stops after the analyzer detects the background noise level again automatically measured by the analyzer 5 The analyzer performs backward integration of the impulse measurement 6 The reverberation time spectra EDT T20 and T30 are calculated and displayed on the screen The measurement can be in octaves or 1 3 octaves in parallel over a selectable frequency range In each frequency band the decay is sampled 200 times each second The impulse response is backward integrated according to the Schroeder method In theory the resulting deca
222. kderrentintaah eari k EU Eun NA EnA PAMER INNEN ANPE AREKEA 252 TOMPlale piini ineei 16 Template Explorer Text Icon Theory of CIC ee 84 Third Check Parameter cecceseseeseeseeeees 194 Threshold LeVEl cccccccccccesesssseeeeeeeesssssteeeeeeeeees 252 Time for Peak Sound Levels Tcpeak 1 38 Time Weighted Average TWA 1 38 Time WeightingS c ee 37 247 Timed Measured ParameterS cccceseeeeeeeeeeees 38 Timer Event Parameter a e 204 Timer Period Parameter Timer Setup t 4ai nae ein anne 45 87 Timer Trigger Parameter c eee eee eeeeeees 123 Tone Assessment According to ISO 1996 2 Annex D 0 0 158 According to Italian Law Meas ting iain naida aeeiiaii Result Display sssseseesseseeseesreerresreernerreernerenens Smiley s Status Codes cccceeeeeeeeees Tone Assessment Option BZ 7231 1 3 octave Method n 157 Top Freq for Special Leq Parameter 00 192 TOPiSOCKEH nsee iaeia 5 6 Total Measurement Parameters Equivalent Continuous Sound Level 216 For Enhanced Logging Software BZ 7225 216 For Frequency Analysis Software BZ 7223 216 For Logging Software BZ 7224 ccceeeeees 216 For Sound Level Meter Software BZ 7222 216 Maximum Time weighted Sound Levels 216 Peak Sound Level
223. klight Dim After 1 min Select optimum value for Backlight After 2 min Dim period running after the Backlight After 5 min On period has elapsed The Backlight After 10 min Brightness will be at Minimum in the After 30 min dim period When Backlight Dim Never period has elapsed the backlight is switched off Standby After 1 min Select optimum value for on period After 2 min before the instrument is set After 5 min automatically to standby After 10 min After 30 min Never Note If the instrument is externally powered then the settings will be ignored APPENDIX D Preferences D 3 Regional Settings Table D 3 Regional Settings Parameter Values Comment Decimal Point Select your preferred decimal point Date separator Select your preferred date separator Date Format yyyy MM dd HH mm ss dd MM yyyy HH mm ss MM dd yyyy HH mm ss yy MM dd hh mm ss XX dd MM yy hh mm ss XX MM dd yy hh mm ss XX Select your preferred date format HH 24 hour hh 12 hour XX AM or PM Time Zone GMT 12 Select the time zone of your region GMT GMT 13 Language English A number of different languages are available for your the analyzer Select your preferred language if it is not in the list then it might be available for installation using BZ 5503 Keyboard United Kingdom 33 different keyboards Select your preferred keyboard D 4 Storage Settings Table D 4
224. late again from the Project Template bar at the top of the screen Shortcut Bar The Shortcut Bar at the bottom of the screen displays a number of fixed icons that are always accessible These include Main Menu icon Ee giving access to the Main Menu This allows you to navigate to a specific function see description earlier under Navigation Principles Backlight icon EE allows you to select a backlight level Help icon g a quick way to get context sensitive help from any screen by tapping on the icon at the bottom Closing the help window will return you to the previous screen Battery power status icon shows the condition of the battery All green shows a fully charged battery while red means power levels are low Tap the icon to get more details of the battery condition When the Power Supply lead is connected the icon will be displayed in place of the battery icon The clock in the lower right corner displays the current time Tap the readout to get details of the time and date or to set the clock 5 4 3 Use of Pushbuttons for Controlling Measurements The design of the analyzer is such that the layout of the pushbuttons has been optimised for single handed operation Reset Pushbutton Use the Reset pushbutton gt to reset a measurement i e to reset all detectors averagers maximum and minimum hold etc If the measurement is paused i e Pause icon is displayed in the status field then the measurement re
225. layed back afterwards for identifying the cause of measurements differing from each other or if Excitation Impulse for further analysis of the measured impulse response by post processing software like DIRAC Room Acoustics Software Type 7841 The recordings will contain the signal from when you press the Start pushbutton until the measurement stops The recording will be attached to the measurement as an annotation Note Sound Recording requires a license for the Sound Recording Option BZ 7226 To exit the setup screen tap the E icon Controlling the Measurement The measurement is controlled in the same way you would control a normal sound level meter measurement using Start Pause Continue Reset and Save pushbuttons see Chapter 3 for more details Note the following exceptions e Pressing Start initiates a measurement cycle slightly more complex than a standard SLM measurement see Fig 14 3 and Fig 14 4 for details The results are the same however a set of measurement data in this case the reverberation decays at one position Creating a new Reverberation Time Project e The measured data is stored at a position and you can have several positions in one project Therefore starting a complete new project cannot be done by pressing Reset and then Start as when measuring using the SLM template because this will measure the decays at a single position within the Project a new project is initiated by selecti
226. ld Analyzers Types 2250 and 2270 User Manual Note 2 Please use the Display Settings in conjunction with the Power Settings to save power during measurements and extend the battery operating time When you have made your choices tap Power Settings or to collapse the list Regional Settings Tap Regional Settings or next to Regional Settings to expand the list of available regional settings see Fig 8 5 PREFERENCES Display Settings Power Settings Decimal Point Date Separator Date Format 02 07 2009 15 11 26 Time Zone GMT 01 00 Madrid Paris Language English Keyboard US International Storage Settings i Headphone Settings Users Printer Settings lL Modem DynDNS Settings q 7 16 50 19 Select your preferred settings for Decimal Point and Date Separator and select your preferred date time format from the six different formats provided in the drop down Then select your time zone from the list A number of different languages are available for your analyzer Select your preferred language if it is not in the list then it might be available for installation using BZ 5503 Built in help is provided in the more commonly used languages if your particular language is not covered English will be chosen automatically Select a keyboard matching the one you prefer when using your PC When you have made your choices tap Regional Settings or on the minus icon a to co
227. le A 21 Cont Generator Parameters Parameter Values Comment Sound Source Unknown This setting optimises the frequency Type 4292 Optimum Type 4295 Optimum Type 4296 Optimum Type 4292 Flat Type 4295 Flat Type 4296 Flat response of the internal generator output to the connected sound source The Flat setting optimises the output for a flat power response the Optimum setting optimises the power difference between adjacent 1 1 or 1 3 octave bands while maintaining a boost at low frequencies Select a type matching your sound source Type 4292 or 4296 OmniPower Sound Source or Type 4295 OmniSource Sound Source Select Unknown if you are using another sound source or don t want to correct the frequency response Escape Time 0 to 60s Set the Escape Time to allow the operator to leave the room before the generator is turned on and the measurement starts Build up Time 1 to 20s Set the Build up Time to allow the sound pressure in the room to settle after the sound source is switched on Bottom Frequency 50 Hz to Top 1 1 octave 63 Hz 8 kHz Frequency 1 3 octave 50 Hz 10 kHz Note The settings of Bottom and Top Frequency control the bandwidth of the noise from the internal noise generator Top Frequency Bottom Frequency to 10 kHz 1 1 octave 63 Hz 8 kHz 1 3 octave 50 Hz 10 kHz a Available for Frequency Analysis Software BZ 7223 and Reverberation Time Software
228. level Lagg The first evaluation of audible tones in noise is most often carried out by the human ear But for comparative analysis results and documentation an objective analysis may be needed Tone Assessment can be performed using the ISO 1996 2 2007 standard Determination of environmental noise levels Annex D Objective method for assessing the audibility of tones in noise Simplified method This method uses 1 3 octave measurements The selection of method depends on local legislation which may refer to ISO 1996 2 or a local method Find more information about rating level and assessment of environmental noise in ISO 1996 2 and in Briiel amp Kj r s Environmental Booklet ISO 1996 2 Annex D Tone Assessment Calculations The ISO method searches a measured time averaged Leq spectrum for level differences between adjacent 1 3 octave bands If the level difference between a 1 3 octave band and the band either side of it are higher than a certain limit an adjustment for audible tones may be added to the L Aeq level when calculating the rating level L In ISO 1996 2 Annex D the spectrum is divided into three frequency ranges Low Middle and High In each frequency range a specific limit for the level differences leading to an adjustment is defined see Fig 15 1 CHAPTER 15 Tone Assessment Option BZ 7231 1 3 octave Method 159 Fig 15 1 Definition of frequency ranges and level differences Le
229. llapse the list Storage Settings Each time you save the results of a measurement the analyzer suggests a project name and number for the project The Project Name Prefix can be generated automatically from the start date of the project as Year Month Date in the format YYMMDD e g 051112 as 2005 November 12th or you can specify a Project Name Prefix max 8 characters using the standard full character keyboard that pops up when you tap the current name set as the CHAPTER 8 Advanced Use of the Analyzer Tips and Tricks 71 project name prefix see Fig 8 6 The field where you type in the project name prefix will appear at the top or bottom of the pop up keyboard depending on how many settings you have expanded in the list The project suffix number will be generated automatically Fig 8 6 Storage Settings screen PREFERENCES Headphone Settings Users Printer Settings Modem DynDNSs Settings Network Settings Notification Settings Web Server Settings 7 16 40 05 8 1 5 Headphone Settings The headphone settings allow you to control the output to the headphone socket on the connector panel see item 2 in Fig 2 2 Commentary annotations on measurements can always be heard on the headphones regardless of the options chosen in Headphone Settings In addition to the commentary annotations you can listen to the measured signal for monitoring purposes Select between A B weighted C weighted or Z weighted A B
230. lt in help tap g on the shortcut bar then About See Chapter 9 for instructions on installing the license for the Logging Module 11 1 Setting up the Instrument 1 Select the LOGGING Project Template 3 3 1 for more details on templates The Project Template is displayed on the black banner at the top of the screen If this banner does not display LOGGING tap the banner and select LOGGING from the drop down that appears Note The Logging Project Template assumes you have a license for the Frequency Analysis Software If not then select the LOGGING SLM Project template instead 2 Insert an SD or CF memory card in the slot for SD or CF cards see items 9 and 10 in Fig 2 2 You will be notified that a memory card has been inserted select Yes to change the default measurement path to the memory card 3 Tap the Main Menu icon and select Explorer from the list of options Create a job folder for the measurements and set the default measurement job path as described in Chapter 6 Note You cannot log data on the internal disk 4 Tap the Main Menu icon and select Setup from the list of options The Setup screen will appear see Fig 11 1 Set the Input Frequency Weightings Bandwidth and Statistics parameters as required for the Sound Level Meter and Frequency Analyzer measurement see Chapter 3 and Chapter 10 respectively These settings are common to both the logging and the total measurement a Requires Frequency Analy
231. lt string of characters gt If your modem needs extra commands for initialization they can be defined in Extra Init Dialup Networking APN lt string of characters gt Access Point Name is an identifier required by the Network Operator Examples are Internet public and www vodaphone de Please consult your network operator User Name lt string of characters gt Set User Name as required by your network operator Typically this can be left empty Password lt string of characters gt Set Password as required by your network operator Typically this can be left empty Domain lt string of characters gt Set Domain as required by your network operator Typically this can be left empty DynDNS Active No Set to Yes to make the update of IP Yes address at DynDNS com active Set to No if you don t use this service Hostname lt string of characters gt Set the Hostname defined in your account at DynDNS com User Name lt string of characters gt Set the User Name for your account at DynDNS com Password lt string of characters gt Set the Password for your account at DynDNS com The password will be displayed until you press Enter then it will be replaced by Hand held Analyzers Types 2250 and 2270 User Manual D 9 Network Settings Table D 9 Network Settings Parameter Values Comment Location Up to 20 characters Use Location to spec
232. ly You setup the IP address manually This will typically be the case in a private network without a DHCP Server Parameters in Network Settings Location Use the Location parameter to specify a text up to 20 character long identifying the analyzer or location of the analyzer The Location will be displayed on the PC as well as the serial number of the analyzer when browsing for analyzers in BZ 5503 and when connected using the on line display Note The location parameter is useful for both USB and LAN connections Network Connection Type 2270 LAN Socket Use the built in LAN socket as connection CF Socket Use an Ethernet CF Card in the Compact Flash Socket This setting is only available if an Ethernet CF Card is present The LAN Socket is disabled if an Ethernet CHAPTER 8 Advanced Use of the Analyzer Tips and Tricks 79 CF Card is present Network Connection Type 2250 None If no Ethernet CF Card is present CF Socket If an Ethernet CF Card is present Set IP Address Automatically This will obtain an IP address from a DHCP server if no server available then a Link local address will be set Manually You have to set the IP Address Subnet Mask and Default Gateway IP Address The IP address of the instrument Selectable if Set IP Address Manually Subnet Mask The Subnet Mask combined with the IP address identifies the network segment the analyzer is on Selectable if Set IP Address Manually Default
233. me you use will always be updated to reflect the correct IP address The analyzer supports DDNS provided by the world wide DDNS service provider DynDNS com The analyzer can then be configured to notify DynDNS com each time the global IP address is set or changed When BZ 5503 or an Internet Browser connects to the analyzer it then uses a hostname defined by DynDNS com From DynDNS com it then gets the updated IP address You need to make an account at DynDNS com specifying a user name and a password for the account and a hostname e g MyBK2250 dyndns org identifying the analyzer In the analyzer you need to specify the Hostname Username and Password and set Active to Yes in Preferences under Modem DynDNS settings Each time the analyzer detects a change in the IP address it notifies DynDNS com Note To avoid too much traffic at DynDNS com the analyzer ensures that this service doesn t allow updates of settings more frequently than every 10 minutes So you may experience up to a 10 minute wait for DynDNS settings to update Network Settings The analyzer can be connected to a LAN Local Area Network through an Ethernet interface or to WLAN Wireless Local Area Network using equipment conforming to the TEEE 802 11a b g standard This connection can be used to synchronise measurement and setup data with a host PC using BZ 5503 78 8 3 1 Hand held Analyzers Types 2250 and 2270 User Manual Type 2270 has a built
234. mendment 1 1993 02 and Amendment 2 2000 10 Type 1 IEC 60804 2000 10 Type 1 DIN 45657 1997 07 e ANSI S1 4 1983 plus ANSI S1 4A 1985 Amendment Type 1 e ANSI S1 43 1997 Type 1 Note The International IEC Standards are adopted as European standards by CENELEC When this happens the letters IEC are replaced with EN and the number is retained Type 2250 2270 also conforms to these EN Standards CHANNELS Type 2270 only All measurements are made from either Ch 1 or Ch 2 TRANSDUCERS Transducers are described in a transducer database with information on Serial Number Nominal Sensitivity Polarization Voltage Free field Type CCLD required Capacitance and additional information The analogue hardware is set up automatically in accordance with the selected transducer CORRECTION FILTERS For microphone Types 4189 4190 4191 4193 4950 4952 and 4184 A BZ 7222 is able to correct the frequency response to compensate for sound field and accessories Sound Field Free field or Diffuse field for Types 4952 and 4184 A only 0 Top reference direction and 90 Side reference direction Accessories Types 4189 and 4190 only None Windscreen UA 1650 or Outdoor Microphone Kit UA 1404 Accessories Types 4191 and 4193 only None or Windscreen UA 1650 Accessories Type 4950 only None or Windscreen UA 0237 For Accelerometer Types 4397 A 4513 4513 001 4513 002 4514 4514 001 4514 002 8341 8324 and 6
235. minal A stable CIC Ratio means a healthy system and assures stable operation of the micro phone cable preamplifier and remaining measurement system CHAPTER 4 Calibration 35 Fig 4 8 Charge Injection Calibration Low leakage resistance capacitor C is set in parallel with the microphone and fed with voltage e The ratio e e is constant when g Co Cm and C are constant Changes to preamplifier gain g cable parameters microphone capacitance Cm etc will change e e and hence indicate probable changes in calibration Microphone Preamplifier Cable Generator 970294e 4 10 2 Performing a Manual CIC Calibration with your Type 2250 2270 CIC is only available for microphones connected to the Top Socket of the Analyzer and with Logging Software BZ 7224 and Enhanced Logging Software BZ 7225 Tap the Main Menu icon and select Calibration from the list Click the CIC tab to view the various CIC parameters that are available The available parameters will include the results of the latest manual CIC together with the reference see Fig 4 9 The status field at the top of the screen informs you how to perform the CIC Press the Start CIC button to start the CIC After approx 10 secs you will see the result Normally the CIC Reference Ratio is set the very first time a CIC is performed however you should update the CIC Reference Ratio if you change the microphone preamplifier You do this by checkin
236. mines whether the measurement is under Automatic Manual control fully controlled by the Reset and Start Pause pushbuttons or Automatic control start of measurement controlled by the Reset and Start Pause pushbuttons end of measurement automatically controlled by the instrument when preset time has elapsed Preset Time 00 00 01 to Fixes the duration of a measurement from start to 24 00 00 automatic stop in hours minutes and seconds Any pauses made during the measurement via the Start Pause pushbutton are not counted in the preset time 194 Hand held Analyzers Types 2250 and 2270 User Manual Table A 9 Cont Measurement Control parameters for BZ 7222 to BZ 7225 Parameter Values Comment Save Project Data at 00 00 00 to Determines the time for automatic save of the 23 59 59 project and start of a new project Continuous Logging On Determines whether the logging will run continuously Off or for a time set by Preset Logging Time Preset Logging Time 0 00 00 01 to Fixes the duration of a measurement from start to 31 00 00 00 automatic stop in days hours minutes and seconds Logging Period 00 00 01 to Sets the period of the logging in hours minutes 24 00 00 and seconds Report Period b 00 01 00 to Sets the period of the reports in hours and minutes 24 00 00 Full Spectral Stat for Yes Determines whether the full spectral statistics are Reports b No logged in the
237. mp f Kj r representative for futher infor mation O Do not ask remind again You can set the Calibration Interval parameter to either 12 months or 24 months depending on your local requirements You can disable the facility by selecting the Automatic Calibration Reminder parameter to Off Charge Injection Calibration Theory of CIC If an external sound source is not available for example during short or long term monitor ing you can check the calibration of the analyzer using the Charge Injection Calibration CIC facility This is done automatically during a logging measurement see section 11 2 and section 12 2 Unlike an internal calibration the Briiel amp Kjer patented CIC technique enables a complete measurement chain to be verified including the microphone preamplifi er cabling and analyzer Each verification measurement is compared to an initial reference measurement As the name implies the CIC method injects an internally generated charge into the micro phone and preamplifier input circuit and the ratio between the measured signal and the injected signal is measured CIC Ratio see Fig 4 8 This method is based on the detection of changes in impedance at the input terminal It was developed for monitoring of microphone channels and requires a preamplifier with a small extremely stable built in capacitor which enables the application of an electrical signal to a preamplifier and microphone input ter
238. n Build up time to allow for a steady state to be reached 3 The decay measurement starts The level for the first second or so labelled About 1s on Fig 14 3 is used to identify the excitation sound level as the 0 dB reference level 4 The noise generator is switched off and the Decay time starts 139 140 Hand held Analyzers Types 2250 and 2270 User Manual 5 The decay measurement ends when only the background noise level is measured automat ically detected by Type 2250 2270 6 Steps 2 to 5 are automatically repeated a chosen number of times and the measured decays are averaged together to reduce the uncertainty of the measurement 7 The reverberation time spectra EDT T20 and T30 are calculated and displayed on the screen The measurement can be in octaves or 1 3 octaves in parallel over a selectable frequency range allowing you to focus sound power on the relevant range In each frequency band the decay is sampled 200 times each second for reverberation times as long as 20 seconds Impulsive Excitation Method With Impulsive Excitation all you need to carry is Type 2250 F 2270 F a tripod and a balloon or other impulsive source such as a starting pistol After you start the analyzer and pop the balloon the analyzer will start measuring analyse the decay and display the RT spectrum and decay The single input range means that trial measurements are not necessary when using the impulsive exc
239. n is 1s for calculation of Dose and ProjDose and 10 ms for calculation of TWA TWA DoseUQ and ProjDoseUQ Used for calculation of Dose ProjDose TWA TWAv DoseUQ ProjDoseUQ U Time Weighting for Lav F or S Q Exchange Rate for Lav 4 5 or 6dB Criterion Level 0 to 140 dB Criterion Level is the sound level allowed for an 8 hour period and would yield a 100 dose The criterion level must be set according to the legislation with which you will have to comply Used for calculation of Dose ProjDose DoseUQ ProjDoseUQ U Time Weighting for Lav F or S Q Exchange Rate for Lav 4 5 or 6dB PeaksOver Level 0 to 200 aB Any peak levels that exceed the level set here will be counted Used for calculation of XPeaks gt NNNdB X A B C or Z set by Setup Input Broadband Peak NNN is the PeaksOver Level Note Two other peak counters are preset to count peaks over 135 dB and 137 dB respectively Exchange Rate for Lav 4 dB 5 dB 6 dB The increase in noise level that corresponds to a doubling of the noise level is determined by Exchange Rate for Lav Set Exchange Rate for Lav as required by your local standards Used for calculation of LavUQ TWA TWA DoseUQ ProjDoseUQ U Time Weighting for Lav F or S Q Exchange Rate for Lav 4 5 or 6 dB Note TWA and TWA requires U S and Q 5 210 Hand held Analyzers Types 2250 and 2270 User Manual Table A 20 Co
240. n arrow T to select the value you want and press the Accept pushbutton y to activate it Use the left arrow to cancel the selection Number Keyboard When activating a number a number keyboard appears see Fig 5 4 Fig 5 4 SOUND LEVEL METER Number keyboard as it appears on the screen LAF 20 40 60 60 100 120 CHAPTER 5 Getting to Know Your Analyzer 51 Tap the digits or use up arrow 4 down arrow Y to increment decrement the number Use left arrow right arrow to select other digits if necessary Press the Accept pushbutton vy or tap the Vv button on the screen to enter the number for the parameter Tap the K button on the screen or outside the number keyboard to cancel the change of value Character Keyboard When activating a text value a standard full character keyboard appears on the screen see Fig 5 5 Fig 5 5 Character keyboard as it appears on the screen HK j 4189 1234567 The character keyboard has all the functionality of a normal keyboard enter text as required by tapping the individual keys with the stylus Tap the Enter key e to accept the changes or tap outside the keyboard to cancel 5 4 7 How to Personalise your Setup Setup contains all the settings for the measurement and some settings for post processing Select Setup from the Main Menu and the Setup screen appears see Fig 5 6 52 Hand held Analyzers Types 2250 and 2270 User Manual Fig 5 6 The Setup screen
241. n the default setup A weighing is selected However this is not described in the ISO method so no warnings will be generated if you select other frequency weightings ltalian Law When tone assessment according to Italian Law is selected the analyzed spectrum must be the Z weighted minimum level measured in each 1 3 octave band L7pmin The Lzpmin parameter is automatically selected on the measurement page when you select DM 16 03 1998 The test for loudness contours is set by default to the 1987 Free field option of the ISO 226 contour parameters You can also select the 1987 Diffuse field and 2003 Free field options from the ISO 226 contour parameters if required See Fig 15 6 Fig 15 6 Setting the loudness contour options 15 4 3 Setting up the Measurement using the Default Setup CHAPTER 15 Tone Assessment Option BZ 7231 1 3 octave Method 163 Output Socket Signal Occupational Health Generator Tone Assessment Tone Assessment On Tone Standard DM 16 03 1998 ISO 226 Quick t Select the Tone parameter above the spectrum and start the measurement by pressing the Start Pause pushbutton If the selected setup parameters do not comply with the selected tone assessment method the following pop up window will be displayed Fig 15 7 Pop up window for tone measurement setup check standard settings Reset to tone standard settings O Do not ask again The pop up window can be de a
242. n when the battery is fully charged Also refer to section 9 4 3 2 5 2 Making Good Measurements The fact that you are using your Type 2250 or Type 2270 which fully complies with the IEC 61672 1 standard ensures you always make good measurements The analyzer should be set up using the following recommended assembly instructions This is to minimise the influence of acoustical reflections during measurements All the components described below are shown in Fig 2 1 and Fig 2 3 Another set of instructions are provided in section 2 5 3 for situations where you need to position the microphone at a distance from the instrument while still complying with the standard Placing the Measurement Microphone The measurement microphone must be placed away from shielding reflecting or absorbing objects In a diffuse sound field absorbing objects will reduce the measured sound levels In a free sound field reflecting objects can change the measured sound levels Typically the sound level 0 5 m from a plane reflecting wall is 3 dB higher than if there was no wall The operator of the system may be personally shielding absorbing and reflecting and can be an additional noise source Measure downwind in dry conditions with a windspeed less than 5 m s The optimum position for the microphone is best found by trying different positions and observing the resulting sound levels Mounting the Measurement Microphone Before mounting the measurement mi
243. nalyzer Tips and Tricks 77 and you want to connect to the instrument from a place outside the local network then you need to know e global IP address of the instrument or e the global IP address of the DSL modem router and ensure that correct port forwarding in has been set the router details in the on line help for BZ 5503 In some cases the global IP address is static and will never change so you connect to the instrument using BZ 5503 or an Internet Browser by using this IP address Normally when you browse to addresses using an Internet Browser you don t use the IP address itself but a hostname for it e g you would use the hostname www google com instead of 74 125 77 99 This requires a DNS Domain Name System provider which is a kind of Internet phone book that translates hostnames to IP addresses for you However for a GPRS EDGE HSPA or even a DSL router then often the global IP address is renewed at each new connection or at certain time intervals e g every two weeks In this case you will have to change the IP address in BZ 5503 or the Internet Browser accordingly To avoid this a service like DDNS Dynamic Domain Name System can be used DDNS is a network service that provides the capability for a modem router computer system to notify a domain name system provider to change in real time ad hoc the active DNS configuration of its configured hostnames and IP addresses This will ensure that the hostna
244. ncy Ranges Definition of Reverberation Time Deleting Jobs Projects cee eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees Description of Inputs OUtpUtS eeceeeeeeeeteeeeee Description of Jobs and Projects eee Disconnecting Preamplifier and Measurement Microphone 12 Display LOCKING Sires chance a iatseieetia dinates 54 Display Colour Schemes 68 Display Screen 5 45 Display Settings 67 68 Display Settings Parameter seee 233 Display Settings Screen ce eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeneeneeenes 68 Displaying Noise Indicators 125 Displaying the Frequency Analysis Results Displaying the Results in Reverberation Time Software eseese 144 Dual 10 pole Adaptor JP 1041 eeceeeeeeeeeeeeetees 6 Duration Parametelr cccccccsssceeceescssssteeeeeeeeeees 202 E Earphone Socket ceccecesseeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeaeeaeeees Economising On Power Editing Annotations on Profiles Elapsed Time sirinin ariris Enhanced Logging Measurement Screen 124 Enhanced Logging Project Template 0 16 Enhanced Logging Software BZ 7225 Template 167 Enhanced Logging Software Module BZ 7225 39 Equivalent Continuous Sound Level 008 37 Equivalent Continuous Sound Level Lagg 38 Exchange Rato ennnen ainser ainin aaeain aai Exclude Marker Explorer Screen cccecesecceseeeeeeeeeeeeseeaeeseeteeeeaeeae
245. nded Low Frequency set to On The time weighting for the spectrum is either F or S The frequency weighting X is determined by the Frequency Weighting Spectrum parameter Percentile N1 0 1 to 99 9 User defined percentile level where the value of Lyn1 is exceeded for N1 of the elapsed time Percentile N2 0 1 to 99 9 User defined percentile level where the value of Lyne is exceeded for N2 of the elapsed time Percentile N3 0 1 to 99 9 User defined percentile level where the value of Lyng is exceeded for N3 of the elapsed time Percentile N4 0 1 to 99 9 User defined percentile level where the value of Lyn4 is exceeded for N4 of the elapsed time Percentile N5 0 1 to 99 9 User defined percentile level where the value of Lyns is exceeded for N5 of the elapsed time Percentile N6 0 1 to 99 9 User defined percentile level where the value of Lyng is exceeded for N6 of the elapsed time Percentile N7 0 1 to 99 9 User defined percentile level where the value of Lynz is exceeded for N7 of the elapsed time a Not available for Reverberation Time Software BZ 7227 b Requires Frequency Analysis Software BZ 7223 The percentile levels N1 to N7 are common to broadband and spectral statistics and can be changed after the measurement has been done A 8 Measurement Control for BZ 7222 to BZ 7225 Table A 9 Measurement Control parameters for BZ 7222 to BZ 7225 Parameter Values Comment Measurement Mode Manual Deter
246. nected can be deleted The calibration history will also be deleted When you have finished tap EJ to return to the measurement screen Calibration Reminder The Calibration Reminder tab see Fig 4 6 allows you to keep track of when you need to run your next Accredited Traceable calibration and shows you the date of your last calibration Reminder for Accredited Traceable Calibration Next Calibration 01 07 2007 02 00 00 Last Calibration 01 07 2006 02 00 00 Calibration Interval 12 months Automatic Calibration Reminder On To order a calibration please contact your local Briel amp Kj r representative Details Reminder q 7 m 12 45 24 Zalibration The automatic calibration reminder facility will pop up a reminder approximately 2 months before your next calibration and keep on reminding you every week until you do one of the following actions e Send your instrument for Accredited Traceable Calibration and update the Last Calibra tion date e Check the Do not ask remind again checkbox in the reminder pop up e Disable the automatic calibration reminder a Fig 4 7 Reminder pop up 4 10 4 10 1 Hand held Analyzers Types 2250 and 2270 User Manual An example of a reminder pop up is shown in Fig 4 7 Hand held Analyzer Type 2250 INFORMATION Reminder for Accredited Traceable Calibration Last Calibration 28 05 2007 Next Calibration 28 05 2008 Please contact your local Briel a
247. ng a new project template or the same again This will create a new project Annotating Projects and Positions While using the reverberation time software you can annotate the reverberation time project using the normal method of adding annotations to a project The annotations can then be viewed by tapping on the paperclip icon or tapping the Main Menu icon BH and selecting Explorer from the list of options See section 3 5 However your project can contain a lot of measurements one per position so you can annotate any position in the project Sound recordings are automatically attached as annotations to the positions Annotations at positions are managed in the Overview display described in the next section 143 144 14 3 Hand held Analyzers Types 2250 and 2270 User Manual Displaying the Results The Reverberation Time measurement screen includes three tabs at the bottom Overview Spectrum and Decay The tabs allow you to choose different ways of displaying the measurement results e Overview Shows the measurement positions in a table one position per row Use this to get an overview of your measurements to include exclude positions from the spatial average of all positions in the room and to manage annotations sound recordings at the positions e Spectrum Shows the reverberation spectra graphically or as a table for one position or for the room average Alternatively it can show the instantaneous sound press
248. ng only E http okflemmingathome dyndns org display z x Google 2 Eile Edit View Favorites Tools Help We afe Flemming at home 227004 Type2270 m M By h lE Page v G Tools v Br el amp Kj r We help our customers improve the quality of sound and vibration and related human comfort Downloads Service Help LOGNING Downloading picture http b Internet Protected Mode Off Q Leia 3 ai 97 66 Hand held Analyzers Types 2250 and 2270 User Manual The instrument can be viewed by several people at the same time however the instrument response time will increase with the number of connected browsers The View and Control Instrument Web Page Fig 7 4 shows the View and Control Instrument web page where you have an on line display and keyboard for full control of the instrument The on line display can be used for monitoring the measurement The keyboard on the screen has the same functions as the instrument s keyboard Click on the display with the cursor to control the instrument as you do when tapping on the screen of the instrument Fig 7 4 On line display and Flemming at home 227004 Type2270 Windows Internet Explorer provided by Bruel amp Kjaer S amp V roe faa keyboard for full control G z z EA ey T http bkflemmingathome dyndns org display v 4 x Google Pr of the instrument gt Ve Be Q Flemming at home 227004 Type2270 B
249. nk the Software Update screen appears see Fig 9 land Fig 9 2 Note This can be done remotely if you connect to the on line display using either BZ 5503 or an Internet Browser 2 Click on the Check for Updates button to check for the latest updates This will connect to the Briiel amp Kj r update server if a new software version is available the build version will be displayed and you can start the update you will be warned if the new version requires a new license or decline the update If the versions that are available are not later than those already installed you will be told so and the update will be terminated 3 If you choose to update the analyzer will start downloading the new software on the CF or SD card required already inserted in the analyzer You need at least 100 MByte of free space on the memory card Depending on the speed and quality of the Internet connection this can take from a few minutes to several hours If the connection is lost then the download will automatically continue when connection is established again Note The analyzer can continue measuring during the download period 4 When download is complete the measurement is paused and normal use of the instrument is prevented Connections to the instrument are terminated and the upgrade of the CHAPTER 9 Updating and Upgrading Applications Maintenance Calibration and Troubleshooting a instrument will start This will take 10 15 minutes
250. nly timers created by the current user can be deleted to delete a timer defined by another user you have to logon as the other user and then delete the timer 88 Hand held Analyzers Types 2250 and 2270 User Manual For each timer you can specify State Enable or disable the timer Name Name the timer Template Select the template you want to use for the measurement Note Reverberation Time templates are not available for timer control Start Time Set the start time at least 3 minutes ahead of current time Preset Time Set the preset time for the measurement regardless of the settings in the template used by the timer Stop Time The time when the measurement stops for information only No of Starts Set to the total number of times you want to start the measurement Start Every The time interval between the start of each successive measurement This interval must be greater than Preset Time 3 minutes User The user who specified the timer Cannot be changed Chapter 9 Updating and Upgrading Applications Maintenance Calibration and Troubleshooting 9 1 9 2 How to Install New Applications Sound Level Meter Software BZ 7222 Frequency Analysis Software BZ 7223 Logging Software BZ 7224 Enhanced Logging Software BZ 7225 Sound Recording Option BZ 7226 Reverberation Time Software BZ 7227 Building Acoustics Software BZ 7228 FFT Software BZ 7230 Tone Assessment Option BZ 7231 and Noise Monitor
251. nt For Sound Level Meter Software BZ 7222 Frequency Analysis Software BZ 7223 Logging Software BZ 7224 and Enhanced Logging Software BZ 7225 The following parameters are measured within the Elapsed Time Equivalent Continuous Sound Levels LxXeq j Lyeq LceqLAeq Sound Exposure Level Peak Sound Level Lypeak e TVpeak Maximum Time weighted Sound Levels LyxFmax Lyxsmax Lyxtmax LyFmax Lysmax e Lytmax Minimum Time weighted Sound Levels LxFmin Lxsmin Lyxtmin LyFmin Lysmin e Lytmin ISO EU Occupational Health Parameters S Lep d j Lep d v E e Dose e ProjDose e VPeaks gt xxx dB APPENDIX B Measurement Parameters 217 VPeaks gt 137 dB VPeaks gt 135 dB US Occupational Health Parameters Lavra TWA TWA DoseRQ ProjDoseRQ General Parameters Overload in Start time Stop Time Elapsed Time excl pauses Time Remaining for the current measurement taking available diskspace into account Special Parameters Lx Ieq also called Lyxqm Lyteq Lateq LAeq L AFTeq also called Larrms LarteqLAeq SIL average of Lzeq octave band levels 500 Hz 1000 Hz 2000 Hz and 4000 Hz PSIL average of Lzeq octave band levels 500 Hz 1000 Hz and 2000 Hz SIL3 average of Lzeq octave band levels 1000 Hz 2000 Hz and 4000 Hz Lweq f1 f2 average of power values for Lyeg frequency bands from f1 Hz to f2 Hz Noise Indicators Laay L
252. nt Occupational Health Parameters Parameter Values Comment Time Weighting for Lav F Lav will be time weighted in accordance with this parameter Used for calculation of LavUQ TWA TWAy DoseUQ ProjDoseUQ U Time Weighting for Lav F or S Q Exchange Rate for Lav 4 5 or 6 dB Note TWA and TWA requires U S and Q 5 a Not available for Reverberation Time Software BZ 7227 A 20 Generator Table A 21 Generator Parameters Parameter Values Comment Generator Type Internal Set to Internal to use the internal noise External generator as specified below Set to External to switch an external generator on off using a logic signal On 4 5 V Off 0 V The generator signal appears at the Output Socket Note 1 For Reverberation Time Software BZ 7227 set Measurement Control Excitation Interrupted Noise to enable the generator parameters Note 2 For Frequency Analysis Software BZ 7223 set Output Socket Signal Source Generator to enable the generator parameters Noise Type Pink The type of noise from the internal generator White The bandwidth of the noise will be adjusted to the frequency range from Bottom Frequency to Top Frequency Level re 1 V 60 0 to 0 0 dB This sets the internal noise generator attenuation in dB referenced to 1 V This level stays at the set level irrespective of the frequency range APPENDIX A Setup Parameters 211 Tab
253. ntents of the analyzer in the Instrument Task as if you had made the connection via USB You then have the same possibilities for transferring data to the Archive and organising data on the analyzer as if you were connected via the USB connector Modems can be used for connection in two different ways e BZ 5503 connects to the analyzer through modem BZ 5503 uses two modems one modem connected to the PC for dialling up and another modem connected to the analyzer The setup of the modem connected to the analyzer is described in section 8 2 1 please refer to the BZ 5503 on line manual for dial up and connection details e The analyzer is connected to the Internet through a modem BZ 5503 or an Internet Browser will then be able to connect to the analyzer through TCP IP using the analyzer s global IP address The setup of the modem connected to the analyzer is described in section 8 2 2 please refer to the BZ 5503 on line manual for details of how to make a connection The modem connected to the analyzer should either be a Compact Flash modem or a modem with an RS 232 serial interface to be connected via a Compact Flash to Serial converter 74 8 2 1 Hand held Analyzers Types 2250 and 2270 User Manual Connection Through Modem Hayes compatible modems serial GSM or standard serial analogue PSTN modems are supported To use the modem all you need to do is to set the Modem parameter to Auto Answer in the Modem Din
254. ntinue Reset and Save pushbuttons see Chapter 3 for more details When the measurement signal is being recorded the recording icon oD is displayed in the status field The recording is attached to the project as an annotation The paperclip icon is then displayed to indicate that the project has been annotated When Recording Control is set to Automatic the recording will start when the measurement is started and last for the Maximum Duration or the Elapsed Time whichever is smallest If you continue a paused measurement then a new recording is started When Recording Control is set to Manual Event the recording will start the first time you press the Manual Event pushbutton during the measurement and stop the second time you press it if you press it a second time before the Minimum Duration has elapsed then the recording will continue until Minimum Duration has elapsed if you press it a second time after Maximum Duration has elapsed then the recording has already been stopped when Maximum Duration elapsed and the pushbutton will initiate a new recording instead When Recording Control is set to External Event and Trigger Input is set to Voltage Level then recording is started when the voltage level is high and stopped when voltage level is low details in Appendix A Duration Limit has no effect on this setting When Recording Control is set to Image Event Type 2270 only then you will record 1s plus the Pre and Po
255. nts above become active and stop when all events are inactive again If Pre recording Time has been set then the recording will start this time before the Event appears This is possible because the recording is done continuously in an internal buffer ready to be saved as a wave file The Pre recording Time is limited by this buffer size and the Recording Quality details in Appendix A Note Very long sound recordings will be split into wave files containing maximum 10 minutes i e a 35 minute sound recording will consist of 4 wave files three with 10 min utes of sound and one with 5 minutes of sound Control Recording using the Stylus If Recording Control is set to any of the events or to All Events the recording can also be controlled using the stylus directly on the profile in the same way as you mark sound catego ries details in Chapter 11 22 41 10 22 42 00 yectrum aad 22 42 31 The small triangle above the profile indicates the amount of sound you have in the internal buffer ready for storage in a wave file You will have sound from this triangle to the right hand side of the profile The triangle is updated every second To make a sound recording using the stylus you tap and hold the stylus on the profile display and drag it to the position where the sound recording should end then you remove the stylus and get a drop down menu with the possibility of setting one of the six markers 13 2 4 Fig 1
256. nually while measuring when the Back erase pushbutton is pressed and record until pressing the pushbutton again however take Maximum and Minimum Duration into account Set to External Event to start recording using external equipment connected to the Trigger Input Socket Set to Level Trigger Event to record while the level trigger conditions are fulfilled however take Maximum and Minimum Duration into account Set to Timer Event BZ 7225 only to record while the timer trigger conditions are fulfilled however take Maximum and Minimum Duration into account Set to All Events to record while any of the events above are active however take Maximum and Minimum Duration into account If you don t want to record the input signal then set Recording Control to Off to economise on power For Reverberation Time Software BZ 7227 the values are limited to Off and Automatic Set to Automatic to make sound recordings during the measurements Set to Image Event Type 2270 only to make a recording of 1s Pre recording Time Post recording Time Table A 17 Cont Sound Recording parameters APPENDIX A Setup Parameters 205 Parameter Values Comment Recording Quality Low Fair Medium High This setup determines the quality of the recording by adjusting the sampling rate The amount of space required for the recording on the memory card will depend on the selected quality Quality Sampling Upper freq
257. number of pressure variations per second Frequency is measured in hertz Hz The normal hearing for a healthy young person ranges from approximately 20 Hz to 20000 Hz 20 kHz Our hearing is less sensitive at very low and very high frequencies In order to account for this weighting filters can be applied when measuring sound The most commonly used weighting is the A weighting which approximates the human ear s response to low medium noise levels 248 Hand held Analyzers Types 2250 and 2270 User Manual Frequency weighting cont LAFmax LAFmin LAF90 0 A C weighting curve is also used particularly when evaluating very loud or low frequency sounds f gt Frequency 10 20 50 100 200500 Ik 2k 5k 10k 20k Hz 000055 Sound Exposure Level sometimes abbreviated SEL and sometimes called Single Event Level is the Sound Exposure expressed as a level The letter A denotes that the A weighting has been included A widely used noise parameter that calculates a constant level of noise with the same energy content as the varying acoustic noise signal being measured The letter A denotes that the A weighting has been included and eq indicates that an equivalent level has been calculated Hence LAeq is the A weighted equivalent continuous noise level The instantaneous time weighted sound level Lp is available at any time A denotes that the A frequency weighting i
258. o identify the sound source it contains all the audible content of the signal but reduces the low frequency noise from wind etc 8 Set Automatic Gain Control to On if you don t know the dynamic of the signal before hand or the dynamic is very high then the 120 dB dynamic range from max input level and down will be converted to 40 dB Otherwise set it to Off and specify the Peak Recording Level Under Input you specify Trigger Input if you want to start the recording using an external trigger signal See details in Appendix A To exit the screen tap the g icon Controlling the Recording The measurement is controlled in the same way you would control a normal logging measure ment using Start Pause Continue Reset and Save pushbuttons see Chapter 11 for more details When the measurement signal is being recorded then the recording icon oD is displayed in the status field The recording is attached to the profile as a Marker 6 Sound If you set Recording Control to Automatic the recording will start when the measurement is started and last for Maximum Duration or Elapsed Time whichever is smallest If you continue a paused measurement then a new recording is started If you set Recording Control to Manual Event the recording will start the first time you press the Manual Event pushbutton during the measurement this starts a Manual Event marker and a Sound marker and stop the second time you press it if you p
259. o effect on the measurement precision or resolution Tap Display Settings or a to collapse the list Power Settings The analyzer has an advanced power management function that takes care of supplying the different circuits with adequate power and switches off circuits that are not in use These power management functions can be changed via the Power Settings screen Fig 8 3 Tap Power Settings or next to Power Settings to expand the list of power settings Turn Off Backlight e Turn Off Backlight Dim e Standby CHAPTER 8 Advanced Use of the Analyzer Tips and Tricks 69 Fig 8 3 Power Settings screen PREFERENCES Display Settings Power settings _ _ _ Turn off Backlight After 1 min Turn off Backlight Dim After 5 min Standby After 5 min Regional Settings Storage Settings Headphone Settings Users Printer Settings Modem DynDNS Settings Network Settings Notification Settings l Web Server Settings p The backlight will be switched on as soon as you operate the instrument either by using the keyboard or stylus on the touch sensitive screen The backlight brightness will be one of the 6 levels set by tapping be at the bottom of the screen Select Minimum for minimum brightness and power consumption and Maximum for maximum brightness and power consumption Once you have chosen the level select Close to save the settings When the instrum
260. o fulfil requirements for public measurements and to minimise the cost of errors due to faulty or inaccurate measurements we can arrange for calibration every year in an ISO 17025 certified laboratory at Briiel amp Kj r With annual data you will have an unbroken history to use as reference either for internal requirements for audit required by authorities or at the request of your customers And not least you can follow the history of sensitivity for your instruments over time Filter Calibration e You can order calibration of filters Please specify at the time of ordering e Calibration of filter response for octave and 1 3 octave filters according to IEC 61260 Service and Repair The hand held analyzer is designed and constructed to provide many years of reliable operation However if a fault occurs that impairs the analyzer s correct function then remove the battery pack and disconnect any external power supply to prevent risk of further damage For more information about preventing faults or damage to your sound level meter see section 9 5 Hardware Maintenance and Repair You can minimise the risk of unexpected costs by purchasing the hardware maintenance with a five years warranty Minor repairs such as those resulting from damage caused by unauthorised use of the instrument can be performed at the same time as the instrument is being calibrated at Briiel amp Kj r This will save you time If any other errors are det
261. ocket of the hand held analyzer see item 17 in Fig 2 1 and push gently until it snaps into position Connecting Two Microphones Type 2270 only To connect two microphones to a Type 2270 use the Dual 10 pole Adaptor JP 1041 two extension cables AO 0697 D 030 3 m long or AO 0697 D 100 10 m long and two Preampli fiers and two Microphones 1 Gently screw the Microphones onto Preamplifiers ZC 0032 see items 1 and 2 in Instrument components Fig 2 1 2 Insert the preamplifiers into the female plugs of the extension cables and push gently until into position 3 Insert the male plugs of the extension cables into the female plugs of the dual 10 pole adaptor and push gently until they snap into position Note Channel 1 is tagged CH 1 and Channel 2 is tagged CH 2 on the dual 10 pole adaptor 4 Insert the male plug of the dual 10 pole adaptor into the top socket of Type 2270 see item 17 in Fig 2 1 and push gently until it snaps into position Mounting the Measurement Microphone on the Microphone Holder and Tripod Mount the microphone and preamplifier combination onto Microphone Holder UA 1317 and Small Tripod UA 0801 as follows 1 Set Small Tripod UA 0801 in the required position and adjust to the required height 14 Hand held Analyzers Types 2250 and 2270 User Manual 2 Screw Microphone Holder UA 1317 onto the threaded stud on the tripod ball joint and position the holder as required 3 Push the microphone and pre
262. octave before making the measurement To exit the screen tap the J icon SETUP q amp Input gt Frequency Weightings Broadband excl Peak Broadband Peak Spectrum Bandwidth Bandwidth Statistics Measurement Control Sound Recording Output Socket Signal Occupational Health Generator Quick Controlling the Measurement The measurement is controlled in the same way you would control a normal sound level meter measurement using Start Pause Continue Back erase and Reset pushbuttons see Chapter 3 for more details The measurement can control a generator connected to the Output Socket on the Connector Panel see Fig 2 2 Enable the generator by setting the Source parameter to Generator in Setup Output Socket Signal then set up the generator settings in Setup Generator The generator will be controlled using Escape Time and Build up Time as described in Fig 14 3 Displaying the Results The frequency analyzer measurement screen includes three tabs at the bottom Spectrum Broadband and XL View Extra Large View The tabs allow you to choose different ways of displaying the measurement results All but the Spectrum tab have been covered in Chapter 3 However a quick recap is provided below The Broadband view shows an instantaneous Lap readout with associated bar graph and four measurement parameters followed by two measurement setup par
263. ogether with the A and C weighted broadband levels see Fig 14 7 When displaying LZF you can tap the LZF selector and select Display Reverberation Time to display the reverberation time spectra When starting a measurement the graph will automatically display the sound level spectrum when finished it will display the reverberation time spectrum CHAPTER 14 Reverberation Time Software Optional Module 147 Fig 14 7 Spectrum view when measuring 500 Hz 41 6 dB T20 400 Hz 1 25 kHz T20 Pos 400 Hz 1 25 kHz The Main Spectrum Graph on the display the one with bars is selected using the parameter selector on the second line of the two shown above the graph LZF in Fig 14 7 The Smiley s below the spectra if there are any belong to the main spectrum The parameter selector for the main spectrum is linked to the selector on the Overview tab and the parameter selector for the main decay on the Decay tab The Reference Spectrum on the display the one displayed as small lines above the bars in Fig 14 6 is selected using the parameter selector on the first line of the two shown above the graph T30 in Fig 14 6 The parameter selector for the reference spectrum is linked to the parameter selector for the reference decay curve in the Decay view The cursor is linked to the frequency selectors on the Overview and Decay tabs Tap the Y axis to select e Auto Zoom to adjust the range of the Y axis for best fit of the measured
264. oira 5 POWET ON sesssssssiseesiessrinssrirtssinsstinstrnsternnnsrennerennnt 5 Q Quality Indicators in Reverberation Time Software cccccccceeseee 154 Quick Stait Guid yivs0iesceli ein eri is 15 RC Classification Parameter RC Parameter c ee Rear Socket ceeseeeeseeeteeeeees Recalibration of Battery Charge Indicator 93 Recalling Measurements Recalling Saved Measurements Recording Sound l s os Reference Time cccccceeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees Regional Settings cececeeseeeeseeeeeeneeereeneeeeeaees Regional Settings Parameter 2 Regional Settings Screen eseese Reminder Pop up cceeceeeeeeeseeseeeeseeeeeeeees Re paif siirsin terian tai Report Period Parameter n Reset Button Reset Measurement Pushbutton s 5 Reset Options sessieseeieieieereeisirensinsinrnsinrnernernrnernns 94 Reset Pushbutton 00 ceceeceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeteaees 47 Result Display Tone Assessment cc cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeneeeees Result SeQl Ctor ceccecceeecececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeees Re using Setups from Projects cceeeeeeeees Reverberation Time 0 Impulsive Excitation Method a Interrupted Noise Method cceeeeeeees Reverberation Time Definition ceeeeees 137 Reverberation Time Introduction eee 137 Reverbe
265. om to 10 kHz 1 1 octave 63 Hz 8 kHz 1 3 octave 50 Hz 10 kHz a Requires Reverberation Time Software BZ 7227 A 22 Tone Assessment Table A 23 Tone Assessment Parameters APPENDIX A Setup Parameters 213 Parameter Values Comment Tone Assessment On Set Tone Assessment to On to enable tone Off assessment functionality then select the Tone parameter above the spectrum to display the results Tone Standard ISO 1996 2 2007 Set the Tone Standard in accordance with DM 16 03 1998 your requirements ISO 1996 2 2007 Annex D is the objective method for assessing the audibility of tones in noise simplified method This method uses 1 3 octave spectra DM 16 03 1998 assesses tone using 1 3 octave spectra according to Italian Law Ministero dell Ambiente Decreto 16 marzo 1998 Adjustment 0 0 to 200B This is the adjustment you should add to Laeg if audible tones are found in the spectrum The resulting adjustment can be read below the spectrum Note the adjustment is fixed to 5 dB in the DM 16 03 1998 standard Low Freq Last Band 12 5 Hz to 315 Hz Set the frequency for the last band of the low frequency range of the assessment Default is 125 Hz The low frequency range is from the lowest measured frequency band to the value of the Low Freq Last Band parameter Note Only available if Tone Standard parameter is set to SO 1996 2 2007 Middle Freq Last Band 160 Hz to 20 kHz
266. on cccccccsesceeseseeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeess 40 Headphone Settings 0 0 00 eececeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeseeeeneenrees 71 Headphone Settings Parameter bes FIO ik ceaiveterceasecvssok E T FOND ICON eenei aas aea AA aea AEA EEES High Frequency Range High Speed USB and LAN Interfaces Hinged Cover FB 0679 neee HISS E ETA A A E Hold Off Parameter ccceeceeeeeeeeeeteees How Do We Measure Reverberation Time 138 How to Change Parameter Values ee How to Install New Applications 00 0 ee INDEX 255 How to Manage the Project Templates 25 53 How to Move a License cceceeeceeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeneeeees 92 How to Update Upgrade Applications 008 89 How to Use this Manual BeQINNGIS seana eared Experienced USers ceceesceseeseeeeeeeseeeeeenees l Icon Backlig itici 47 Battery power Status eeeeeeeeeee 47 Commentary iiini iena 46 Help 40 47 LOUASPEAKEM 2 veevcsecweeacecesnieeeee detent 23 Main M nUi si seives enna cen 47 No Windscreen Fitted 46 OQvetl se cceccctiers canna a aaa ak 46 Paperclip 23 46 Pause ienne einne at ered tides nets 46 Power Supply Connected 47 RUNNING eeseeeeeseesieeseesierieernerinsinerinrrnsrrernnereerrnerent Stopped TEXT aa a a aao aa E Aa a Tea Windscreen Fitted Diffuse Field ee 46 Windscreen Fitted Free field cece 46 IEC 61672 1 standard cccccceeseeseee
267. on Stem and Tripod Mount the analyzer onto the Tripod Extension Stem UA 1651 and Small Tripod UA 0801 as follows 1 Screw Tripod Extension Stem UA 1651 onto the threaded stud of the ball joint on Small Tripod UA 0801 Secure the ball joint roughly in a vertical position i e in line with the tripod until ready to follow the instruction in step 4 2 Screw the Extension Stem UA 1651 into the instrument using the threaded socket situated on the underside of the instrument at the back see item 18 in Fig 2 1 3 Set Small Tripod UA 0801 including the instrument in the required position and adjust it to the required height Ensure that one of the three legs is pointing roughly in the same direction as your instrument needs to point We will refer to this leg as the front leg 4 Position the extension stem at an angle of 45 to the horizontal and vertically in line with the front leg of the tripod this is to ensure the whole setup is stable Note The procedure is the same if Tripod UA 0587 is used instead of Small Tripod UA 0801 Once you have carried out these instructions you are ready to start measuring see Chapter 3 Alternative Measurement Method Extended Microphone The measurement microphone can be placed a distance from the instrument by connecting an extension cable and fitting the microphone to a microphone holder or to Outdoor Kit UA 1404 The instrument should be set up using the following assembly instructions
268. on installing the license for the frequency analyzer Setting up the Instrument The frequency analyzer measures the following spectrum parameters together with full spectral statistics during timed measurements 5 LxXeq LyFmax Lxsmax e LxFmin Lxsmin where X is the frequency weighting A B C or Z These spectra and the spectral statistics are saved in the project together with the measured sound level meter broadband parameters The spectral statistics can be viewed as Lyyn percentile spectra where Y is the time weighting F or S and N can be one of 7 defined percentiles In addition the instantaneous spectra Lyp and Lxg are always available 1 Select the FREQUENCY ANALYZER Project Template See section 3 3 1 for more details on templates The Project Template is displayed at the top of the screen if it does not display FREQUENCY ANALYZER tap the black bar at the top of the screen and select FREQUENCY ANALYZER from the drop down that appears 101 102 Hand held Analyzers Types 2250 and 2270 User Manual Fig 10 1 Setting the frequency weighting and bandwidth parameters 10 2 10 3 2 Tap the Main Menu icon and select Setup from the list of options Set the Broadband and Spectrum parameter to A B C or Z as required A B weighting is determined by setting the parameter in Setup Frequency Weightings Broadband excl Peak Then under Bandwidth set the Bandwidth parameter to 1 1 octave or 1 3
269. one extension cable This parameter is available for microphone types using ZC 0032 only Windscreen Auto Detect On Off Windscreen Correction None UA 1650 UA 1404 If Windscreen Auto Detect is set to Off you can manually select a windscreen correction suitable for the windscreen in use Correction is automatically made for the windscreen on Types 4952 and 4184 A No correction is made for unknown transducers A 5 Frequency Weightings Table A 6 Frequency weighting parameters Parameter Values Comment Broadband excl Peak AC All broadband parameters except Lpeak are AZ measured simultaneously with two different BC frequency weightings select the weightings here BZ Broadband Peak One broadband peak parameter Lpeak is measured select the frequency weighting here Note X frequency weighting A or B A requires that the Broadband excl Peak parameter is set to AC or AZ B requires that the Broadband excl Peak parameter is set to BC or BZ 192 Hand held Analyzers Types 2250 and 2270 User Manual Table A 6 Frequency weighting parameters Parameter Values Comment Spectrum The frequency analysis 1 1 octave or 1 3 octave will be frequency weighted in accordance with this parameter Note X frequency weighting A or B A requires that the Broadband excl Peak parameter is set to AC or AZ B requires that the Broadband excl Peak parameter
270. one in two ways e Tapping once on the item on the screen will select and activate it or e Moving the field selector around using the navigation keys until the item you want is high lighted then pressing the Accept pushbutton v to activate it You can choose to use the stylus or the pushbuttons depending on your preference and the measurement situation For instance if the amount of noise generated by the instrument needs to be kept to an absolute minimum consider using the pushbuttons rather than the stylus this is because tapping of the stylus on the touch sensitive screen may create extra noise However if speed is of major importance the stylus can navigate through the setup and measurement screens quicker Throughout the manual we have described how to perform the measurement procedures using the stylus only but you may also use the alternative method using the Navigation and Accept pushbuttons if you prefer 5 4 6 How to Change Parameter Values Most parameter values are changed by selecting a new value from a drop down list which appears when the parameter field is selected See the example in Fig 5 3 50 Hand held Analyzers Types 2250 and 2270 User Manual Fig 5 3 Changing parameter values Broadband excl Peak Broadband Peak 10 51 03 Stylus Usage Tap the value you want in the drop down or tap outside the list to cancel the selection Pushbutton Usage Use the navigation pushbuttons up arrow 4 or dow
271. only by data memory and power supply An overview showing the options available during a typical enhanced logging task has been provided in Table 12 1 a b Requires Frequency Analysis Software BZ 7223 Requires Sound Recording Option BZ 7226 122 Hand held Analyzers Types 2250 and 2270 User Manual Table 12 1 Overview of options available during a typical enhanced logging task Selection Period Broadband Broadband Spectral Spectral Parameters Statistics Parameters Statistics Logged is 24h 1 to 10 None 0 3 None or All 32 or Full or All 5 or Full Logged oim None Laeq LAF None None None 100 ms and or Las available available available Periodic None Reports 1m 24h All 45 Full All 5 or Full ae Elapsed All 50 Full All 5 Full Time 12 1 Check the About Menu to see whether you have the right license to run the Enhanced Logging module The About Menu is accessed from built in help tap g on the shortcut bar then About See Chapter 9 for instructions on installing the license for the Enhanced Logging Module Setting up the Instrument 1 Select the ENHANCED LOGGING Project Template section 3 3 1 for more details on templates The Project Template is displayed on the black banner at the top of the screen If this banner does not display ENHANCED LOGGING tap the banner and select ENHANCED LOGGING from the drop down that appears 2 Insert an SD or CF memory card in th
272. onnector is referred to as the Rear Socket Type 2250 or Rear Socket Channel 2 Type 2270 also in the software External Power A CAUTION Use specified battery charger only 2 3 9 2 3 10 2 3 11 Charging below 0 C 32 F is not recommended Note If you charge the battery pack below 0 C the lifetime of the batteries will be reduced Do not charge battery pack in temperatures above 60 C Do not dissassemble or expose battery pack to fire or water The instrument is powered by an internal rechargeable battery pack An indication of available charge is shown by the battery icon at the bottom of the screen If the charge remaining is low or empty the batteries can be recharged by connecting Mains Power Supply Part No ZG 0426 to the Ext Power socket see item 6 in Fig 2 2 When the power supply lead is connected the icon will be displayed in place of the battery icon Battery Charge Indicator A battery charge light LED indicates when the battery pack is being charged from external power see item 7 in Fig 2 2 It shows a steady green light when external power is applied and the battery is charging and a flashing green light when charging has finished Reset Button Located above the USB connector see item 8 in Fig 2 2 it is used to reset the instrument if you have problems with the instrument and cannot get it to operate To reset press the button with the point of the stylus see chapter 9 for trou
273. ons appearing on the screen are indicated by italics for example Measurement Mode Path Denotations Indicated by capitals for example SETUP BZ7222 oae 1 2 2 1 2 3 Hand held Analyzers Types 2250 and 2270 User Manual Beginners Before you read the rest of this manual read Br el amp Kj r s primer on Measuring Sound This will give you a basic idea of acoustic measurements It can be found on the www bksv com Web site by typing Primer in the search window The Web site also con tains lots of other information you might find useful Further information is available in the On line Help installed on the analyzer Experienced Users of Acoustic Measurement Equipment The manual is designed so that you don t have to read all of it to be able to use the instrument It is built around the most frequently used operations these are as follows e Assembling your Analyzer see Chapter 2 e Making your First Measurement see Chapter 3 e Getting to Know Your Analyzer see Chapter 5 e Calibration see Chapter 4 e Data Management see Chapter 6 e Connection to PC or Mobile Phone see Chapter 7 e Advanced Use of the Analyzer Tips and Tricks see Chapter 8 e Updating and Upgrading Applications Maintenance and Troubleshooting see Chapter 9 However it is recommended that you read the entire manual for appropriate procedures on how to use the analyzer to obtain accurate sound level measurement results
274. ooo ee cece eeneeeneeeeee tees eeeeeeeeaeeseaeeeseeeeneeeenes 90 Update Through the Internet eee eeeeeeeneeseeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeseaeeseaeeseeeeneeeeee 90 Downgrade to an Earlier Version eeeeeeceeeeeeeeneeeeseeeeseeseeeeeeeaeeseaeeenneeeeseeene 91 9 3 How to Move a LiCONSe eee eee cece eeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeaeeseaeesesneeeeneeseaeeeeneeeeseeeees 92 9 4 Troubleshooting 2 c cccceecceescececeeesedeseeeceesceeesetessueceeesceesetessceenesneneestensbedenceeness 92 Analyzer Measurement ec eeececeseeceeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeaeeeeaeeseaeessnesesaeeseaeeseaeeenaeees 92 SD and GE Gardsiceetcact rate oot hes See ees On hae et 93 Battery Pack and Recalibration of Battery Charge Indicator 0 eee 94 TOUCH Serge Mi aea ieee Sieve rt ele yd ghee doe 94 Reset OptON Sisa iasan a a Ais aie pa ei cet ete a a aa 94 9 5 Care Cleaning and Storage 0 0 eee eeceeeeeeeseeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeseaeeseaaeeeeeesseeeseeeeeaes 97 Handling the INStrUMent ee eee eeeeceee cess eeeeeeeeaeeeeaeeeeaeeseeeeseaeeseaeeeneeeneeeee 97 Cleaning the InstrUMent eee eee eee eeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeteaeeseaeeseeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeees 97 Storing the INStrUMENL ee eee eee e cence eeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeaeeeeeneeseaeeseaeeseeeeeeaeeseaeeeeaeees 97 9 6 Services at Briel amp Kj r for Types 2250 and 2270 98 Accredited Calibration eecceeeceeesseeeeeeeeseeseeeeeeaeeeeaeeseaeeeseneeeeaeeseaeeeseeeeeees 98 Initial Calibration scc coc eeet yes ee
275. or Optimum Repetition Period 175s Output Connector Output Socket CHAPTER 16 Specifications 175 EXTERNAL GENERATOR Selectable as alternative to Internal Generator To control external noise generator set Levels 0 V Generator off 4 5 V Generator on e Rise time and Fall time 10 us The noise generator is turned on and off automatically during the measurement Escape Time 0 to 60s Build up Time 1 to 10s The generator can be turned on and off manually for checking equipment and sound levels Software Specifications Logging Software BZ 7224 The specifications for BZ 7224 include the specifications for Sound Level Meter Software BZ 7222 BZ 7224 adds MEASUREMENTS Logging Measurement data logged at pre set periods into files on external SD or CF cards Logging Period From 1 s to 24 hours with 1 s resolution Fast Logging Lar Las and Laeg can be logged every 100 ms irrespective of logging period Broadband Data Stored at each Logging Interval All or up to 10 selectable broadband data incl Trig Input Voltage Broadband Statistics Stored at each Logging Interval Full distribution or none Spectrum Data Stored at each Logging Interval All or up to 3 selectable spectra license for BZ 7223 required Spectral Statistics Stored at each Logging Interval Full distribution or none license for BZ 7223 required Logging Time From 1 second to 31 days with 1 s resolution Measurement Total For t
276. p Br el amp Kj r Hand held Analyzer amp View Instrument S View and Control Instrument Done Internet Protected Mode Off R10 v Press the Help link to get more detailed help on using the web page Press the View Instrument button to enter the web page for viewing the instrument only You might be prompted for the Guest Username and Guest Password defined for the web server see Section 8 5 CHAPTER 7 Connection to PC or Mobile Phone 65 Press the View and Control Instrument button to enter the web page for full access to the instrument You will be prompted for the Username and Password defined for the web server Fig 7 2 Prompt for username and password The server 192 168 0 150 at B amp K Analyzer requires a username and password Warning This server is requesting that your username and password be sent in an insecure manner basic authentication without a secure connection User name si X Password eee V Remember my password Coc ne The View Instrument Web Page Fig 7 3 shows the View Instrument web page where you have an on line display of the instrument You can use the on line display for monitoring the measurement only you cannot change the display or setup parameters or start and stop measurements etc Fig 7 3 On line display 4 Flemming at home 227004 Type2270 Windows Internet Explorer provided by Bruel amp Kjaer S amp V ojee for monitori
277. phone creates is at a very low level so it is made stronger with the help of a preamplifier before it is processed by the main processor Processing includes applying frequency and time weightings to the signal as specified by international standards such as IEC 61672 1 to which Type 2250 and Type 2270 conform Frequency weighting adjusts how the sound level meter responds to different sound frequencies This is necessary because the human ear s sensitivity to sound varies according to the sound s frequency The most commonly used frequency weighting is A weighting which adjusts a signal in a way that best resembles the human ear s response at medium range levels It is the weighting required for nearly all environmental and workplace noise measurements and is specified in international and national standards and guidelines All of the analyzer s measurement parameters apply A or B weighting and a choice of C or Z weighting except for the measurement of peak levels where a single weighting typically the C frequency weighting is applied In this case C weighting is used to take into account the energy present at low frequencies even when they are not particularly annoying Time weighting specifies how the sound level meter reacts to changes in sound pressure It is an exponential averaging of the fluctuating signal providing an easy to read value The analyzer applies the Fast Slow and Impulse or F S and I t
278. pically be done if the analyzer is connected through LAN or by a GPRS EDGE HSPA serial modem see section 8 2 2 and 8 3 Go to Preferences Notifications E mail and setup details for the E mail account under the To parameter The details consist of the SMTP server name the SMTP port used whether SSL TLS is required or not the Account the Username and Password for the account please consult Appendix D Section D 10 and your e mail provider for more details Set Notification to E mail and a notification will be sent by e mail when any of the alarm conditions are met You can test the system by tapping on the Main Menu icon and selecting Send Notifi cation via E mail Example of e mail Subject E mail from 2479719 Abbey Road Test Manual e mail Test Manual e mail 29 04 2009 12 51 16 Instrument 2479719 Abbey Road SD Card 383 MB 483 MB Internal Battery Charging Trigger Input Voltage 13 5V Measurement Status Running No of Sound Recordings 13 CIC Result Passed LAF 45 8dB Web server To connect to the instrument using an Internet Browser the following conditions must be fulfilled e The instrument must be connected to a network as described in Sections section 8 2 2 section 8 2 3 and section 8 3 e The Internet Browser must support Java scripts a4 8 6 Hand held Analyzers Types 2250 and 2270 User Manual The web page of the instrument has been tested on the following Internet Browsers e Microsoft Internet Explo
279. ponse of the internal generator output for either a flat power response or optimum power difference between adjacent 1 1 or 1 3 octave bands thereby eliminating the need for an equalizer to smooth the response in most cases Select a type matching your sound source select Unknown if you are using a non Briiel amp Kj r sound source or don t want to make a correction to the frequency response Go to step 16 Impulsive Method 14 Set Trigger Level low enough to be sure the impulse will be triggered but high enough to avoid triggering on the background noise A level between 80 and 100 dB is normally adequate 15 If you have selected Automatic Save yes then Trigger Repeat can be set to yes to automatically start a new measurement when a measurement has been saved This allows you to go to another position and make a new impulse without the need for controlling Type 2250 2270 between the measurements Observe how the Traffic Light indicates the status of the measurement see Table 5 2 and Fig 14 4 making it easy for you to change position and generate the impulse synchronised with the measurement procedure Press the Start Pause 4 pushbutton to stop the measurement when the last measurement has been saved 14 2 3 14 2 4 14 2 5 CHAPTER 14 Reverberation Time Software Optional Module Sound Recording 16 Set Recording Control Automatic if you want to record the sound during the measurement The recordings can be p
280. ppear Note The tabs at the bottom of the screen allow you to choose different ways of displaying the measurement results e The Broadband view shows an instantaneous Lap readout with associated bar graph and four measurement parameters followed by two measurement setup parameters The first parameter is displayed in a larger font size for better readability see Fig 3 4 e The XL View increases the size of the first parameter readout to a 4 digit full screen display including decimal point 20 Hand held Analyzers Types 2250 and 2270 User Manual 6 Set Measurement Mode to Automatic and choose a preset time for your measurement Then repeat steps 3 and 4 The measurement will automatically pause after the preset time This allows you to either save your measurement or continue measuring as required 7 Tap the Main Menu icon and select Setup from the list of options see Fig 3 5 Fig 3 5 SOUND LEVEL METER Main Menu options F Ca Pro LA AF LLL f 30 50 Change the broadband weighting parameters by tapping on the plus icon next to Frequency Weightings then on the weighting parameter field on the right hand side of the screen A weighting drop down menu will appear see Fig 3 6 Change the parameters as required Fig 3 6 Changing the broadband frequency weightings 10 51 03 8 Return to the bar graph screen of the SOUND LEVEL METER template by tapping x and you are ready to make a new measur
281. problems selecting the correct transducer again or selecting another template or you login as another user then note which step causes the problem You might need to delete a transducer or delete reconfigure templates or users A WARNING If you delete a transducer the calibration history will be lost You can delete a transducer from the transducer database by tapping the Delete Transducer icon ME see section 4 8 To delete reconfigure templates or users you can use Utility Software for Hand held Analyzers BZ 5503 with the instrument connected to the PC using the USB interface cable AO 1476 or a modem connection Please consult the on line help included with the BZ 5503 software for instructions on how to configure the analyzer Re installing Software If the instrument still does not work normally after performing the Reset to Default Settings procedure then the software might need to be re installed This can be done in two ways 1 If the connection to Utility Software for Hand held Analyzers BZ 5503 works with the instrument connected to the PC using a USB cable then the software can be re installed and re configured through the USB cable Please consult the on line help included with the BZ 5503 software for instructions on how to re install software on the analyzer 2 If the connection to the PC does not work then you need a Compact Flash card size at least 64 Mbytes and a Compact Flash card reader for the PC You can
282. produce audible rattling in lightweight building elements The rating is defined in ANSI S12 2 1995 252 Hand held Analyzers Types 2250 and 2270 User Manual SIL PSIL SIL3 Sound Sound level or sound pressure level Std Dev Topeak Threshold Level TWA TWA Z weighting SIL Speech Interference Level is the arithmetic average of the 500 Hz 1 kHz 2 kHz and 4 kHz octave band levels PSIL Preferred Speech Interference Level is the arithmetic average of the 500 Hz 1 kHz and 2 kHz octave band levels Used for evaluating the interference of noise upon speech communication SIL3 Speech Interference Level based on highest 3 octaves is the arithmetic average of the 1 kHz 2 kHz and 4 kHz octave band levels Note Though SIL PSIL and SIL3 are defined for octave band levels they are also calculated for 1 3 octave band levels by summing the power values in the three bands within each octave before doing the averaging Any pressure variation that the human ear can detect Just like dominoes a wave motion is set off when an element sets the nearest particle of air into motion This motion gradually spreads to adjacent air particles further away from the source Depending on the medium sound extends and affects a greater area propagates at different speeds In air sound propagates at a speed of approximately 340 m s In liquids and solids the propagation velocity is greater 1500 m s in water and 5000 m
283. profile is also available For Reverberation Time Data the second line shows the Position Selector Fig 6 3 The Viewer for Logging and Enhanced Logging data 86 9 dB 131 2 dB LAF10 0 93 9 dB LAF90 0 57 9 dB LAFmax 103 7 dB LAFmin 49 9 dB LCeq 93 1 dB Overload 0 0 Start Time 09 11 2005 14 00 00 01 00 00 Calibration 18 48 42 pectrum All the measured values are displayed below the top two lines Sound Level Meter data on the Data tab and spectrum information Frequency Analysis only on the Spectrum tab Tap the spectrum parameters or broadband parameters to select other parameters CHAPTER 6 Data Management 59 The Calibration tab allows you to view the calibration details for the measurement You can view data on projects without disturbing the ongoing measurement To exit the Viewer tap the 3 icon 6 3 2 Re using Setups from Projects Use Explorer to locate the project with the setup you want to re use then tap the project name and select Open from the dropdown that appears This will stop and reset the current measurement and load the project including all setups and data You are now using the same screens as the ones you were using just before you saved the data Use the screens to browse the results Pressing Start Pause will start a new measurement using the setups from the project You can save the setup information in a template by tapping the Template Bar on the top of
284. r types of card please consult your local Briiel amp Kj r representative Remember to regularly re format the card especially before a long unattended measurement this will ensure the best performance of the card a 9 4 3 9 4 4 9 4 5 Hand held Analyzers Types 2250 and 2270 User Manual Battery Pack and Recalibration of Battery Charge Indicator The software keeps the capacity of the battery pack updated Over time the total capacity of the battery pack decreases If you find that the Time Remaining estimate tap the battery icon to get this information does not match the real time remaining e g the instrument switches off automatically because of lack of power while the Time Remaining estimate indicates at least 1 2 hour then you should manually re calibrate the capacity of the battery pack This is done using the following method e Drain all the power from the battery Switch the instrument on Disconnect external power Disconnect the instrument from the PC Inthe Preferences menu under Power Settings set Standby After to Never You may want to set Backlight On to Always in the same menu and select the maximum level of display backlight in order to drain the battery faster use the Backlight icon be at the bottom of the screen Leave the instrument until the battery voltage becomes so low that the instrument switches itself off e Charge the battery fully at least 10 hour
285. r Name is typically the e mail address of the e mail used for sending the e mail Examples myaddress gmail com myaddress hotmail com If the e mail account is part of a domain then it might be necessary to specify the domain as part of the user name Example Domain UserName Password lt string of characters gt Insert the password required for the account The password will be displayed until you press lt Enter gt then it will be replaced by APPENDIX D Preferences 243 Parameter Values Comment SMS Active No Set to Yes to activate the first phone number Yes otherwise set to No Name lt string of characters gt Name identifying first phone number Phone Number Number The number of the first SMS recipient Active No Set to Yes to activate the second phone number Yes otherwise set to No Name lt string of characters gt Name identifying second phone number Phone Number Number The number of the second SMS recipient Please consult your e mail provider D 11 Web Server Settings Table D 11 Web Server Settings Parameters Parameter Values Comment Web Server Disabled Set Web Server to Enabled to enable Enabled display and control of the analyzer on a web page see Section 7 4 Set to Disabled to disable the web server functionality User Name lt string of characters gt Define the user name required for full access to the web page i e view and
286. r different times during the day Each level trigger works as specified in section 11 1 In addition you can specify a Hold Off period this means that during this period new triggers are inhibited You also have the ability to trigger Lyq fl f2 Note you can trigger on a specific frequency band by setting f1 f2 8 Under Lgen Periods parameters you can set up the day evening and night periods and the penalties in accordance with your local legislation To exit the screen tap the a icon 12 2 Controlling the Measurement The measurement is controlled in the same way you would control a normal sound level meter measurement using Start Pause Continue Reset and Save pushbuttons see Chapter 3 for more details However during the measurement data are automatically saved in projects one per day The projects are automatically saved at the time specified in the Save Project Data at parameter in the Setup Measurement Control menu The next project is automatically started immediately after the first one without any data loss Note When Preset Logging Time has elapsed or you pause the measurement then the project will not be saved automatically This has to be done manually In the case of power failure or other failures the software is rebooted automatically This means that the measurement data collected up until the time of the reboot is saved in a project and a new measurement is started The new measurement is started
287. ration Time Project Template 16 Reverberation Time Software Decay Tab ipinnu aas 148 Overview Fab eerdere aas 144 Spectrum Tabi anisan inyars dienes 146 Reverberation Time Software BZ 7227 asese 40 Rumble Running Icon a A AEEA E E E A E E S Save Project Data at Parameter ceee 122 Save Pushbutton c cc ccccccecsseeeeseeeeesseeeeeseees 21 48 Save your Measurement cecceeceeeeeeceeeeeeeeeneeees 21 Saved Measurement VISWNG i ina ii aa aii 21 Saving and Recalling Results with Reverberation Time Software 155 Saving Frequency Analysis Results 0 0 0 eee 106 Saving Your Measurement ecseeeseeeeeteeeeeeeeees 57 Screen Display c vccsccscereseececceveenscvecascrecsecevcerssnvevecneteaces SD Cards vsccctsaiinra ital cain aati SDHC Memory Card ceceecescseceseeeeeeneeeeeseeeeeeeeaes Second Check Parameter Secondary Microphone ceceeceseeeceeeeeereeeeeeeeeeeeaes Secure Digital SD Cards Soto e aie nintetieai eee eae Secure Digital High Capacity Memory Card Selecting Default Measurement Job Path i Selecting the Tone Assessment Option Service Agreement ce eeceeeeseeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeees Service and Repair ceceeeeceeeeseeeeeeneentees Set the Sound Level Meter Project Template Setting up a Tone Assessment Measurement using the Default Setup eneee 163 Setting up a Tone Assessment Measurement Manually ISO 1
288. rd in the slot for SD or CF cards see items 9 and 10 in Fig 2 2 3 Tap the Main Menu icon and select Explorer from the list of options Navigate to the memory card create a job folder for the measurements and set the default measure ment job path as described in Chapter 6 Note You cannot record sound on the internal disk 4 Tap the Main Menu icon and select Setup from the list of options Set all the parameters as required for the Sound Level Meter or Frequency Analyzer measure ment see Chapter 3 and Chapter 10 respectively 5 Under Sound Recording you can specify the Recording Control parameters as follows e Automatic if you want to start the recording when you start the measurement and stop when you pause the measurement and to limit the recording to Maximum Duration if Duration Limit is set to On e Manual Event if you want to start and stop the recording using the Manual Event pushbutton during the measurement and to limit the duration of the recording if Duration Limit is set to On In this case the recording will be at least Minimum Dura tion long but no longer than the Maximum Duration Use Pre recording Time and Post recording Time to specify how much extra you want to be recorded before and after the event e External Event if you want to start and stop the recording using an external trigger signal connected to the Trigger Input See details in Appendix A e Image Event Type 2270 only if you want to make a
289. re recording Time Duration Post recording Time Level Trigger 15 Trigger On Set to On for setting Marker 3 Level when Off the Trigger Parameter fulfils the Level Trigger conditions see below The conditions are checked every second Sound Recordings can also be controlled by these settings see Setup Sound Recording Recording Control Start Time 00 00 00 to Start Time defines when the level trigger is 23 59 59 enabled Triggering is limited to the enabled time Stop Time 00 00 00 to Stop Time defines when the level trigger is 23 59 59 disabled Triggering is limited to the enabled time Hold Off 00 00 00 to Hold Off specifies a time after a level trigger 01 00 00 where level triggering is disabled Can be useful in reducing the number of triggers Start Slope Rising Set to Rising to start when level goes above Falling Start Level and then stop when level goes below Stop Level Set to Falling to start when level goes below Start Level and stop when level goes above Stop Level Start Level 100 to 200 dB Start trigger conditions are fulfilled when level crosses Start Level in accordance with Start Slope for at least Start Duration seconds set Start Level here Start Duration 0 to 15s Start trigger conditions are fulfilled when level crosses Start Level in accordance with Start Slope for at least Start Duration seconds set Start Duration here Stop Level 100 to 200 dB Stop trigger condi
290. reen to view the calibration details see Fig 4 2 Fig 4 2 Calibration details screen LCF TT 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 15 11 2006 11 24 21 43 86 mY Pa 0 00 dB This screen displays the following information e Details of the last calibration date sensitivity deviation from last calibration and devia tion from initial calibration e The connected transducer type and serial number Note you select a new transducer by tapping on the Main Menu icon and select ing Setup followed by Input e Max Input Level the maximum sinusoidal input level to be measured without overload indi cation e A Calibration History link which is provided to enable you to view a history of transducer and calibration settings see below The calibration settings can be adjusted as follows e Calibrator select between Type 4231 and a custom calibrator gt 4 4 4 5 4 6 4 7 Hand held Analyzers Types 2250 and 2270 User Manual e Calibration Level type in the specific level of your custom calibrator If you are using Type 4231 calibrator and the microphone being used is connected to the top socket then the level of the calibrator is automatically detected shown as Auto detect on the screen Note The Auto detect setting enables the calibration process to automatically detect the calibration level For free field types of microphones like Types 4189 and 4190 the calibration level from a Type 4231 Calibrator is either 93 8
291. rement Control parameters for BZ 7222 to BZ 7225 195 Parameter Values Comment Fourth Check 00 00 00 to Set time of day for fourth CIC check 23 59 59 Note The Check times must be separated from each other by at least one minute They should also differ by at least one minute from the time set in the Save Project Data at parameter a For Sound Level Meter BZ 7222 and Frequency Analyzer BZ 7223 templates only b For Enhanced Logging BZ 7225 templates only c For Logging BZ 7224 and Enhanced Logging BZ 7225 templates only A 9 Measurement Control for Reverberation Time Software BZ 7227 Table A 10 Measurement Control parameters for Reverberation Time Software BZ 7227 Parameter Values Comment Map Based Measurement No Yes If Map Based Measurement Yes you can define the source positions and receiver positions graphically on a map otherwise the measurements are just numbered from position number one Pos 1 onwards Meas All Pos for Each Source No Yes Parameter only available if Map Based Measurement Yes Set to Yes for measuring all positions for each source position Set to No for measuring a specific number of receiver positions per source position No of Positions per Source 1 to 10 Parameter only available if Meas All Pos for Each Source No Set number of receiver positions you want to measure per source Increment So
292. rement equipment access Camera GPS unit Duct tape Mobile phone Flashlight Personal safety equipment When you have finished typing in your note tap the icon to accept the changes and save it as a text annotation See section 3 5 for more details on annotations Metadata For easy and convenient use of metadata it is an advantage to define the settings for the metadata entered and displayed on the Annotations screen see section 3 5 in advance Define settings for each of the 10 metadata Tap the Edit icon in front of the metadata you want to edit Fig 8 9 to define e Metadata Enabled visible and editable on the Annotations screen or Disabled invisible on the Annotations screen e Name Insert a name preceding the metadata value when displayed on the annotations screen e Type Select a type suitable for your medatadata Select between Text The metadata is the text you enter or edit using the alphanumeric keyboard Pick List The metadata are selected from a list of up to 15 user defined texts Number The metadata number is entered using the numeric keyboard Index The metadata number is automatically incremented after creating the project Not defined The metadata are removed from the project This will be the initial state of metadata for old projects without metadata e Entry No For Type Pick List The entry number for the text to be defined in the pick
293. renainee native 7 Output Socket Signal Parameters at Overload ICOM si alan eea te eidees 46 Overload Parameter c cccccesceeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeees 198 Overview of Multi user Facility 0 0 0 0 ee eeeeeereeeees 72 Overview of Options Available During a Typical 258 Hand held Analyzers Types 2250 and 2270 User Manual Enhanced Logging Task 106 122 154 During a Typical Logging Task 108 Overview of Quality Indicators Overview of Smiley Indicators and Associated Remedies ee eee Overview Of Smileys Overview of Type 2250 2270 Microphones 231 Overview Tab in Reverberation Time Software 144 P Paperclip ICON ssassessseseesnnesnssrnesnrnnseensrneenerrusene 23 46 Parameters in Network SettingS eeceeeeeeee 78 Pasting Jobs Projects 2 D7 Pause ICOM sonhei daane tare ane 46 PC Icon ICOM PG irene aera E E A 46 Peak Sound Levels 0 222 Peak Sound Levels Lepeak 1 38 Percentile Levels LAF90 0 wa 38 Performing a Manual CIC Calibration 0026 35 Periodic Report Parameters Equivalent Continuous Sound Level 218 General Parameters senen 219 Maximum Time weighted Sound Levels 218 Minimum Time weighted Sound Levels 219 Peak Sound Level ceeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeaees Sound Exposure Level Lae Special Parameters
294. report or not Synchronize with Clock Yes Select Yes to synchronise the logging and reporting No intervals with whole minutes or hours e g if Logging Period is set to 00 01 00 1 minute and Report Period is set to 01 00 00 and you start the measurement at 8 12 33 then the first logging interval will be from 8 12 33 to 8 12 59 27 seconds the second will be from 8 13 00 to 8 13 59 60 seconds etc and the first Report interval will be from 8 12 33 to 8 59 59 48 min and 27 seconds the second will be from 9 00 00 to 9 59 59 1 hour etc Select No if you want every logging and reporting interval to be exactly the specified Logging Period Charge Injection Calibration On Set to On for making a CIC at the start and end of Off Logging An Exclude marker is set on the profile and Total parameters are not updated during the CIC Daily CIC None Determines whether a Charge Injection Calibration Once is performed one to four times a day or not An Twice Exclude marker is set on the profile and Periodic Three times Reports and Total parameters are not updated Four times during the calibration The results are saved together with the Total parameters First Check 00 00 00 to Set time of day for first CIC check 23 59 59 Second Check 00 00 00 to Set time of day for second CIC check 23 59 59 Third Check 00 00 00 to Set time of day for third CIC check 23 59 59 APPENDIX A Setup Parameters Table A 9 Cont Measu
295. required by type approving authorities Using BZ 5503 you can also install your preferred language and you can install licenses for the specific applications Installation requires a USB connection between BZ 5503 and the analyzer The BZ 5503 software will clearly indicate if the new software version is an update free of charge or an upgrade license fee Please consult the on line help included with the BZ 5503 software for instructions on how to install upgrades updates of the software together with your preferred language Tap g on the instrument s screen then About to get a list of installed software and licenses Update Through the Internet The analyzer can update software by itself if it is connected to the Internet see section 7 1 This method is particularly useful if the analyzer is used for long term monitoring and you don t want to go to the measurement site for servicing ie you want to disturb the measurement as little as possible Note The method is used for updating the software with the latest version available from the Br el amp Kj r web site The languages already installed will be updated at the same time but you cannot install new languages or licenses to do this use BZ 5503 The update procedure is as follows 1 Tap g on the instrument s screen then About to get a list of installed software and licenses Scroll down to the bottom of the screen and tap the Check for updates on the web gt li
296. rer from version 7 e Mozilla Firefox from version 3 e Google Chrome from version 2 e Apple Safari from version 4 You may also be able to connect to the instrument using Internet Browsers on mobile phones and iPhones Password Protection Connection to the instrument is password protected There are two levels of protection e Guest for viewing only e Administrator for viewing and controlling the instrument Username and Password Under Preferences you set the Username and Password individually for the Guest and for Administrator accounts You need to specify Username and Password for the administrator however you can speci fy whether the guest requires a login or not Preparing your Measurements You can prepare your measurements in advance by making job folders setting up the correct measurement parameters in the templates defining settings for metadata and by making checklists see example in Fig 8 8 either as memos containing addresses and phone numbers of relevant people or notes that have been partly filled in beforehand where you just have to fill in the final information on location The notes can be attached to jobs as annotations and can be copied onto projects when necessary Fig 8 8 Example notes screen 8 6 1 CHAPTER 8 Advanced Use of the Analyzer Tips and Tricks 85 What to bring List of telephone nurmbers contacts Map of area Previous measurements if any Measu
297. ress it a second time before Minimum Duration has elapsed then the recording will continue until Minimum Duration has elapsed if you press it a second time after Maximum Duration has elapsed then the recording has already stopped when Maximum Duration elapsed and the pressing the button will have no effect on the sound recording the Manual Event marker however is stopped If you set Recording Control to Exclude Event the recording will start the first time you press the Back Erase pushbutton during the measurement this starts an Exclude Event marker and a Sound marker and stop the second time you press it the behaviour will be similar to control by the Manual Event pushbutton When Recording Control is set to External Event and Trigger Input is set to Voltage Level then recording is started when the voltage level is high and stopped when voltage level is low details in Appendix A Duration Limit has no effect on this setting 132 Hand held Analyzers Types 2250 and 2270 User Manual 13 2 3 Fig 13 1 Example Logging display showing internal buffer marker If you set Recording Control to Level Event the recording will start controlled by the level trigger see Chapter 11 for details When Recording Control is set to Image Event Type 2270 only then you will record 1s plus the Pre and Post recording Time If you set Recording Control to All Events the recording will start when any of the eve
298. reviously saved projects or view logged data as a profile use the Open command in Explorer this will recall the project template display settings and measurement setup used on the saved results along with the results This will however stop and reset the current measurement 6 3 1 Viewing Data Use Explorer to locate the project with the results you want to view then tap the project name and select View from the dropdown that appears or simply tap the project icon This will open the Viewer Fig 6 2 a Fig 6 2 The Viewer for Sound Level Meter data Hand held Analyzers Types 2250 and 2270 User Manual x 83 0 LCpeak 125 4 dB LAF9O 0 51 5 dB LCpeak 125 4 dB LAFmax 103 1 dB LAFmin 44 0 dB LCeq 85 5 dB Overload 0 Start Time 28 11 2006 13 23 14 Stop Time 28 11 2006 13 29 18 Calibration The project name is displayed at the top of the Viewer along with two buttons Eq and Ba These are used to view results on the previous or next project in the job folder For Sound Level Meter and Frequency Analysis data the line below this shows the start time and elapsed time for the measurement For Logging and Enhanced Logging data the second line shows the Result Selector se lects between Total Logged 100 ms and Report data and the start time for the measure ment along with two buttons lt and EJ These are used to view results on the previous or next interval in the project see Fig 6 3 The Overview
299. ritten by a standard installation New or renamed templates will be deleted if you install using the option Install and reset settings to default 5 4 8 How to Manage the Project Templates The Project Templates containing all the display and measurement settings required to perform a measurement are selected in the Project Template Bar at the top of the display screen see Fig 5 2 You can save changes to the project template create new templates rename templates or delete templates from the Template Explorer screen Select Template Explorer by tapping on the Project Template Bar at the top of the screen or from the Main Menu and the screen shown in Fig 5 8 will appear Fig 5 8 Template Explorer A ENHANCED LOGGING 0 FFT ANALYZER alt FREQUENCY ANALYZER da FREQUENCY ANALYZER ADV 4 LOGGING LOGGING SLM REVERBERATION TIME SOUND LEVEL METER SOUND LEVEL METER ADV Qu ick 9 13 47 18 The topmost line in the status area SOUND LEVEL METER in Fig 5 8 contains the name of the current template If you make any changes to the settings in the current template an will appear next to the template name to indicate that the new settings have not been saved The next line contains icons for saving the settings Tap the Save icon H to save the settings in the current template Tap the Save As icon Ei to save the settings in a new template Use the keyboard that pops up to define the name of
300. rm Conditions e Disk Space below set value e Trig Input Voltage below set value e Internal Battery enters set state e Change in Measurement State e Reboot of instrument Software Specifications Frequency Analysis Software BZ 7223 The specifications for BZ 7223 include the specifications for Sound Level Meter Software BZ 7222 BZ 7223 adds STANDARDS Conforms with the following National and International Standards e IEC 61260 1995 07 plus Amendment 1 2001 09 1 1 octave Bands and 1 3 octave Bands Class 0 e ANSI S1 11 1986 1 1 octave Bands and 1 3 octave Bands Order 3 Type 0 C e ANSI S1 11 2004 1 1 octave Bands and 1 3 oc tave Bands Class 0 CHANNELS TYPE 2270 ONLY All measurements are made from either Ch 1 or Ch 2 CENTRE FREQUENCIES 1 1 octave Band Centre Frequencies 8 Hz to 16 kHz 1 3 octave Band Centre Frequencies 6 3 Hz to 20 kHz MEASUREMENTS X frequency weightings A B C or Z Y time weightings F or S Data for Storage Full Spectral Statistics Spectra for Display and Storage Lxeq LxSmax LxFmax LxSmin LxFmin Spectra for Display Only Lxs LxF LxyN1 Lxyn2 LxyN3 Lxyn4 Lxyn5 Lxyne Lxyn7 Single Values SIL PSIL SIL3 Lxeq f1 f2 NR NR Decisive Band RC RC Classification NCB NCB Classification NC NC Decisive Band Loudness Loudness Level a where f1 and f2 are frequency bands in the spectrum MEASURING RANGES When using Microphone Type 4189 Dynamic
301. rnal battery enters the Low set state Critical Hand held Analyzers Types 2250 and 2270 User Manual Parameter Values Comment Trigger Input Voltage 20 0 V to 20 0 V A notification is sent if voltage level at trigger input drops to or below this setting Note This alarm requires Setup Input Trigger Input is set to Voltage for Monitoring Disk Space 0 to 100 A notification is sent if free disk space drops to or below this setting Level Trigger Events Disabled A notification is sent if Level Trigger specified in Enabled Setup Level Trigger in Logging or in Setup Triggers in Enh Logging is exceeded E Mail To lt string of characters gt The e mail address of the recipient of the e mail Example recipient gmail com SMTP lt string of characters gt Name of SMTP Simple Mail Transfer Protocol Server Examples gmail smtp gmail com hotmail smtp live com SMTP Port 0 to 65535 Port used by SMTP Server Typically this is 25 but for gmail and hotmail it is 587 SSL TLS No Secure Socket Layer Transport Layer Security Yes Set to Yes if required by e mail provider otherwise No SSL TLS is required by gmail and hotmail Account lt string of characters gt The account is typically the e mail address of the e mail used for sending the e mail Examples myaddress gmail com myaddress hotmail com User Name lt string of characters gt The Use
302. rs is converted into a manageable scale from 0 dB at the threshold of hearing 20 Pa to 130 dB at the threshold of pain 100 Pa 246 Hand held Analyzers Types 2250 and 2270 User Manual Our hearing covers a surprisingly wide range of sound pressures a ratio of over a million to one The Dose ProjDose dB scale makes the numbers manageable PRESSURE PRESSURE LEVEL 000 LEAI The Noise Dose is the equivalent averaged A weighted Noise Level taking the Threshold Level into account using Exchange Rate 3 for an 8 hour period reference duration relative to the maximum allowed the Criterion Level expressed in percentage Example If the Criterion Level is 85 dB and a person is exposed to a constant sound pressure level of 85 dB for 8 hours then the Dose is 100 A constant level 88 dB results in a Dose of 200 and a constant level of 82 dB results in a dose of 50 The Projected Dose is the Noise Dose based on measurement duration less than 8 hours assuming the sound level for the remaining time stays the same DoseUQ ProjDoseUQ Exchange Rate Exposure Time F S or T time weighting Frequency Frequency weighting APPENDIX E Glossary The Noise Dose is the averaged A weighted Noise Level taking the Threshold Level into account with Time Weighting U F or S and Exchange Rate Q 4 5 or 6 for an 8 hour period reference duration relative to the maximum allowed the Criter
303. s Connect the Mains Power Supply ZG 0426 to the instrument Switch the instrument on and leave it on and remember to reset the Standby After and Backlight On to your preferred settings Tap the battery icon and a pop up appears giving details of the battery condition This will indicate Calibrating Battery initially Let the battery charge until the battery charge indicator just below the power socket starts flashing and the Calibrating Battery indication has disappeared from the pop up window Touch Screen If tapping with the stylus on the screen seems to be getting more inaccurate you can adjust the touch sensitive screen as follows e Inthe Preferences menu under Display Settings activate the link Adjust Touch Screen This displays a full screen with guidance on how to tap a cross five times at different places on the screen The adjustment procedure ends with saving the values or canceling the adjustment Reset Options Reset Button A WARNING Unsaved data or setups will be lost when you reset the instrument If your analyzer stops responding to pushbutton presses or stylus taps e Reset and reboot the instrument by pressing the reset button located on the connector panel see Fig 2 2 in Chapter 2 with the point of the stylus CHAPTER 9 Updating and Upgrading Applications Maintenance Calibration and Troubleshooting 95 Instrument Reset If you still experience problems e Reset the instrum
304. s Measurements are saved and can be viewed later in the same way as described for the Sound Level Meter Project in Chapters 3 and 6 Note The viewer only displays the results as one set of data per logging interval you can browse through all data To display the data as a profile and see or hear annotations or even edit the markers or insert new markers and annotations you must Open the saved project instead of Viewing it 120 Hand held Analyzers Types 2250 and 2270 User Manual 121 Chapter 12 Enhanced Logging Optional Module Enhanced Logging Software BZ 7225 enables you to measure and save data periodically on SD or CF cards The module is optimised for unattended use which means that the module will measure and save data in an efficient way without the requirement for an operator to be present In addition to measuring broadband parameters see Chapter 3 and spectra see Chapter 10 it simultaneously logs the following parameters see Chapter 11 e Broadband Parameters including broadband statistics e Broadband Parameters every 100 ms e Spectra including spectral statistics e Record the measured signal Finally the Enhanced Logging module can also log with a different period periodic reports for example every hour for reporting e Broadband Parameters including broadband statistics e Spectra including spectral statistics The Enhanced Logging module can measure continuously limited
305. s displayed as an icon below the sound profile Annotating During the Measurement The measurement parameter is displayed as a progressing profile 117 118 11 3 5 Hand held Analyzers Types 2250 and 2270 User Manual Use of Pushbuttons Press and hold down the Commentary pushbutton and talk to the instrument to make your comment Release the button when finished This will insert a comment annotation in the profile at the time when the button was pressed Use of Stylus Tap and hold the stylus in the profile display at the position where you want the annotation to start This will freeze the display and display a cursor at the position of the stylus Then drag the stylus a little to the left or right and raise it again A drop down menu appears and below the five markers you can select Add Comment or Add Note or Add Image to add a spoken comment or write a note or capture an image When finished the Comment or Note or Image is inserted in the profile the cursors disappear and the profile unfreezes and progresses as before tapping on the screen Annotating While the Measurement is Paused The measurement parameter is displayed as a profile while the measurement is paused Use of Stylus to Annotate the Sound Tap and hold the stylus in the profile display at the position where you want the marker to start This will display a cursor at the position of the stylus Next drag the stylus a little to the left or right and remov
306. s in steel The level in decibels of the pressure variation of a sound See also decibel The Std Dev is calculated as the Standard Deviation of the noise samples used for statistics This is either Lar or Lag sampled every 10 ms or Laeq sampled every second The time when the peak sound level occurred C denotes that the C frequency weighting is used Any sound levels below the threshold level do not contribute to the Dose measurement data For example if you set the threshold level to 80 any sound levels below 80 dB are not taking into consideration by the instrument when it calculates doses and time weighted averages Used for calculation of Dose ProjDose TWA TWA DoseSQ ProjDoseSQ The Time Weighted Average is the average A weighted sound level for a nominal 8 hour working day with Time Weighting S and Exchange Rate 5 TWA is calculated from the measured LavS5 taking Threshold Level into account and a Reference time of 8 h Mainly used in the USA for assessing the noise exposure for a worker during a working day The Time Weighted Average for a user defined reference period TWA is calculated from the measured LavS5 taking Threshold Level into account and the Reference Time Used for example for calculating a Weekly Time Averaged Level by setting the Reference Time to 40 h Zero frequency weighting is without any frequency weighting that is equivalent to Linear LIN or FLAT Index 253 Symbols
307. s triaxial LEMO connector see item 3 in Fig 2 2 is used to output the conditioned input signal for monitoring purposes or to output the generator signal Use cable AO 0440 D 015 LEMO to BNC 2 3 5 Trigger Input This triaxial LEMO connector see item 4 in Fig 2 2 is used for the external trigger input or start stop signals to the instrument or for monitoring an external voltage Using BZ 7222 BZ 7223 BZ 7224 or BZ 7225 software you can control sound recording this requires a license for the BZ 7226 option If you want to start and stop the recording using an external device connect it to this input See details in Appendix A Fig 2 2 Connector panel of Type 2270 070138 8 2 3 6 2 3 7 2 3 8 Hand held Analyzers Types 2250 and 2270 User Manual Input 1 Type 2270 only This triaxial LEMO connector see item 11 in Fig 2 2 is used for AC or CCLD inputs to Channel 1 It can be used when analysing electrical signals from for example transducers or sound recordings Use cable AO 0440 D 015 LEMO to BNC Note This connector is referred to as the Rear Socket Channel 1 also in the software Input Input Ch 2 for Type 2270 This triaxial LEMO connector see item 5 in Fig 2 2 is used for AC or CCLD inputs to Type 2250 or to Channel 2 of Type 2270 It can be used when analysing electrical signals from for example transducers or sound recordings Use cable AO 0440 D 015 LEMO to BNC Note This c
308. s used F denotes that the Fast time weighting is used Maximum time weighted sound level measured with A frequency weighting and Fast time weighting It is the highest level of environmental noise occurring during the measurement time It is often used in conjunction with another noise parameter for example LAeq to ensure a single noise event does not exceed a limit Minimum time weighted sound level measured with A frequency weighting and Fast time weighting It is the lowest level of environmental noise occurring during the measurement time time resolution is 1 s The noise level exceeded for 90 of the measurement period with A frequency weighting and Fast time weighting The level is based on statistical analysis of a parameter LAF or LAS sampled at 10 ms intervals into 0 2 dB wide classes The percentage is user definable An analysis of the statistical distributions of sound levels is a useful tool when assessing noise The analysis not only provides useful information about the variability of noise levels but is also prominent in many standards as the basis for assessing background noise For example Largo is used as an indicator of background noise levels while Lari or Lars are sometimes used to indicate the level of noise events Lago 0 LaF sPL LaFteq Lavua Lcpeak LCpeak 1 s Laen Lday Levening Laight Ln Lep d APPENDIX E Glossary The noise level exceeded for 90 of the measurement p
309. sary Unfreeze by tapping on the GD icon e Tap and hold the stylus on the profile display and drag it to the left or right This will freeze the display and show two cursors Next remove the stylus from the display and a drop down menu appears with the possibility of setting or editing a marker or annotation see below Select the required function from the drop down menu When the function has been carried out the profile unfreezes automatically and progresses as it did before you tapped on the screen The logged data are displayed as two profiles The Profile Overview with the entire profile and the Profile with 100 logging samples The Profile Overview An overview of the entire profile is displayed across the screen on the topmost part of the graph area The overview is based on Lyeq s X A or B depending on the Broadband excl Peak Frequency Weightings parameter The Y axis is auto zoomed When you have logged for more than 4 minutes then each pixel on the X axis will cover more than 1 s The overview will then display from the minimum Lyeq 1s to the maximum Lyeq 1s within the interval covered by the pixels on the X axis Tap in the Profile Overview to select the part of the entire profile to display in the Profile below The Profile The Profile displays a hundred samples of the logged data Select which parameter to view by tapping the parameter field in the line above the profile Markers are displayed between the profil
310. send an INFO SMS to the analyzer and ask for an SMS notification after which you will get a notification within 5 minutes You need to setup a Phone Number in Preferences Notifications SMS and set Active to Yes for the SMS You can also add a Name for the number for easier identification You can setup two individual SMS phone numbers for sending the SMS notification to two recipients Set Notification to SMS and a notification will be sent by SMS to the active phone numbers when any of the alarm conditions are met or if the analyzer receives an INFO SMS You can test the system by tapping on the Main Menu icon and selecting Send Notification via SMS Note 1 Two to three SMS s will be used to send the complete notification depending on the content and language settings 8 5 CHAPTER 8 Advanced Use of the Analyzer Tips and Tricks 83 Note 2 SMS s cannot be sent or received while the analyzer is connected to BZ 5503 or On line display Note 3 If you don t want the ability to connect to the analyzer using BZ 5503 and prefer to use the SMS Notification facility then you can set Modem Disabled in which case the SMS Notification functionality will still be available After having sent an INFO SMS to the analyzer a notification will be sent out within 30 seconds E mail Notifications E mail notifications can be used if the analyzer is connected to a network with access to a mail server This can ty
311. sentative for further information Note When recording sound for further analysis in PULSE be sure to record the Z weight ed signal and select Automatic Gain Control to Off under the Sound Recording parameters and select the Recording Quality to match your needs for frequency content see details on sampling frequency in Appendix A When Automatic Gain Control is set to Off then the calibration information is stored in the wave files allowing PULSE to analyse the sound recordings taking the calibration into account 135 136 Hand held Analyzers Types 2250 and 2270 User Manual Chapter 14 14 1 14 1 1 Reverberation Time Software Optional Module Introduction Reverberation Time Software BZ 7227 enables you to measure reverberation time in 1 1 octave or 1 3 octave Check the About Menu to see whether you have the license to run the reverberation time software The About Menu is accessed from built in help tap g on the shortcut bar then About See Chapter 9 for instructions on installing the license for the Sound Recording Module Definition Reverberation Time RT is the most important parameter describing the acoustic quality of a room or space It is important for sound levels speech intelligibility and the perception of music In addition it is used to correct for the effects of RT on building acoustics and sound power measurements RT is the decay time for sound in a room after the excitation
312. setting should also be used if you want to use the handswitch ZH 0680 for manually triggering sound recordings Note This can only be used together with instruments with serial numbers above 2479652 Set Trigger input to Voltage Level if you want to control sound recording by a voltage level Voltage Level generated by external equipment The Voltage Level should generate at least 2 V for On and less than 1 V for Off The duration of the steady level Voltage for should be at least 1 s so it can be recognised by Monitoring the analyzer Set Trigger Input to Voltage for Monitoring if you want to monitor the voltage at this input This setting can be used together with Notifications see Section 8 4 This setting cannot be combined with MATRON Handswitch or Voltage Level a Not available in Reverberation Time Software BZ 7227 b Requires Frequency Analysis Software BZ 7223 188 Hand held Analyzers Types 2250 and 2270 User Manual A 2 Input for Type 2270 Table A 3 Input parameters Type 2270 Parameter Values Comment Input Channel Ch 1 Determines whether Input Ch 1 or Input Ch 2 is Ch 2 used for the measurement Loudness Free field Determines whether Loudness and Loudness Diffuse field Auto Level are calculated based on Free field or Diffuse field conditions Set to Auto to follow the setting of Sound Field Correction For an unknown microphone type you can set Loudness to the condition match
313. sis Software BZ 7223 Fig 11 1 The Setup screen CHAPTER 11 Logging Optional Module Frequency Weightings Bandwidth Logged Broadband 100 ms Logged Spectrum Markers f Level Trigger Sound Recording k Output Socket Signal Y 5 Under the Measurement Control parameters set the Measurement Time and Logging Period as required Set Synchronize with clock to Yes if you want the logging to synchronise with whole minutes or hours For example if Logging Period is set to 1 minute and you start the measurement at 8 12 33 then the first logging interval will be from 8 12 33 to 8 12 59 27 seconds the second will be from 8 13 00 to 8 13 59 60 seconds etc Set Synchronize with clock to No if you want every logging interval to be the specified Logging Period exactly Set Charge Injection Calibration to On if you want to validate the complete measurement chain by performing CIC at the start and end of the logging measurement refer to 4 10 6 Under the Logged Broadband parameters choose which broadband parameters you want to log in accordance with the Measurement Control parameters You can choose to log Full Statistics per Logging Period or not You can also choose to log all the measured Broadband Parameters or a Selected number of parameters If you choose Selected then you can specify up to 10 parameters 7 The Logged Broadband 100 ms parameter allows you to log Leg With an elaps
314. splayed on line with the PC using the same user interface on the PC as on Type 2250 2270 DATA MANAGEMENT Explorer Facilities for easy management of Instruments Users Jobs Projects and Project Templates copy cut paste delete rename create Data Viewer View measurement data content of projects Template Editor Editor for changing setups in Project Templates Synchronisation Project Templates and Projects for a specific user can be synchronised between PC and Type 2250 2270 USERS Users of Type 2250 2270 can be created or deleted EXPORT FACILITIES Excel Projects or user specified parts can be exported to Microsoft Excel Type 7810 12 15 16 20 25 30 31 Projects can be exported to Predictor Type 7810 Lima Type 7812 Noise Explorer Type 7815 Acoustic Determinator Type 7816 Evaluator Type 7820 Protector Type 7825 or Qualifier Light Type 7830 7831 CHAPTER 16 Specifications 181 TYPE 2250 2270 SOFTWARE UPGRADES AND LICENSES The utility software controls Type 2250 2270 software upgrades and licensing of the Type 2250 2270 applications INTERFACE TO TYPE 2250 2270 USB ver 1 1 or Hayes compatible GSM or standard analogue modem LICENCE MOVER To move a license from one analyzer to another use BZ 5503 together with the License Mover VP 0647 see Section 9 3 for details PC REQUIREMENT Operating System Windows 7 Vista or XP all in 32 bit or 64 bit versions Microsoft NET 3 5 Recommended PC
315. st recording Time If Pre recording Time has been set then the recording will start this time before you hit the Manual Event pushbutton This is possible because the recording is done continuously in an internal buffer ready to be saved as a wave file The Pre recording Time is limited by this buffer size and the Recording Quality details in Appendix A Note Very long sound recordings will be split into wave files containing maximum 10 minutes i e a 35 minute sound recording will consist of 4 wave files three with 10 min utes of sound and one with 5 minutes of sound 13 1 3 Playing the Recording Sound recordings are attached to the measurement project as annotations The paperclip icon is displayed in the status field to indicate this Tap the paperclip to open the list of annota tions Tap the annotation to play it back details in Chapter 3 and Chapter 6 13 2 Logging and Enhanced Logging Software You can use the Sound Recording facility together with the Logging and Enhanced Logging Software You can record the sound for the whole measurement period or you can record sound for controlled parts of the measurement The recordings are attached to the profile as sound markers The sound recordings can be controlled by the Manual Event pushbutton the 130 13 2 1 Hand held Analyzers Types 2250 and 2270 User Manual Back erase pushbutton an external trigger signal or by the level of the measured signal You can also
316. starting a sound recording and for sending an SMS or e mail see Chapters 8 4 and 12 Set Level Trigger Control to On to enable the level trigger facility or Off to disable the facility Set Trigger Parameter to the parameter you want to monitor e g L Aeq see Appendix A for the total list of parameters Set Start Slope to Rising if you want to start when the Trigger Parameter exceeds Start Level and stop when it goes below Stop Level or to Falling if you want to start when the Trigger Parameter goes below Start Level and stop when it exceeds Stop Level Set Start Duration for the number of seconds the Trigger Parameter must fulfill the trigger condition before the trigger point is acknowledged Set Stop Duration for the number of seconds the Trigger Parameter doesn t fulfill the trigger condition anymore to acknowledge the end point of the trigger See the relationship between the trigger parameters in Fig 11 2 CHAPTER 11 Logging Optional Module Fig 11 2 Relationship between trigger parameters 11 2 Leg 100 dB 90dB Trigger Parameter Lpeq Start Slope Rising 80 dB 70dB Start Duration lt gt 60 dB l lt Stop Duration l 50dB Start Level 50dB l l l 40 dB Stop Level l Trigger Point 30 dB 20 dB 10 dB 4 gt l 0 Pre recording BZ 7226 only Post recording BZ 7226 only Time in secs 050208 1 11 Under the Sound Recording parameters choose the settings
317. stops It is the time for a 60 dB drop in level but the decay is usually evaluated over a 10 20 or 30 dB drop using the measurements within these ranges to make a regression line which is then extrapolated to the 60 dB range see Fig 14 1 RT may be labelled EDT T20 and T30 respectively for those three evaluation ranges EDT is used in room acoustics only while T20 and T30 may be used for Building Acoustics Sound Power and Absorption Coefficient measurements as well RT is measured in 1 1 or 1 3 octave frequency bands some of which may be averaged to provide a single number result for the most significant bands RT may range from 0 1 seconds or less in anechoic chambers to 10 or more seconds in large public spaces 137 138 Hand held Analyzers Types 2250 and 2270 User Manual Fig 14 1 Definition of Reverberation Time RT Evaluation range of 30dB for calculation of 14 1 2 T30 indicated A dB Regression Line 0dB Excitation Level 5dB Evaluation Range Background Noise Level Reverberation Time 060210 RT varies between positions in a room so it is usually measured at several positions The spatial average Room average for all positions gives an overall assessment and the position results may be used to indicate the acoustic quality as a function of location The Room average can either be made as an average of the RT spectra or calculated for the averaged decays ensemble aver
318. surement External Event if you want to start and stop the recording using an external trigger signal connected to the Trigger Input Level Event if you want to start and stop the recording based on the level trigger set tings during the measurement All Events if you want to start and stop the recording based on any of the events Note When Recording Control set to any of the events you can limit the duration of the recording if Duration Limit is set to On In this case the recording will be at least Minimum Duration long but no longer than the Maximum Duration Use Pre recording Time and Post recording Time to specify how much extra you want to be recorded before and after the event Image Event Type 2270 only if you want to make a short recording together with capturing an image The recording will be Pre recording Time Post recording Time 1 seconds long See details in Appendix A Off if you don t want to record sound 13 2 2 CHAPTER 13 Sound Recording Optional Module 6 Set Recording Quality to High Medium Fair or Low in accordance with your needs note however that the high quality requires more disk space than low quality details in Appendix A 7 Set Recorded Signal to either Input A B weighted Input C weighted or Input Z weighted A B weighting is determined by setting the parameter in Setup Frequency Weightings Broadband excl Peak Input C weighted is suitable for recordings used afterwards t
319. t Bands BZ 7231 software calculates the level difference between a 1 3 octave band and two adjacent 1 3 octave bands with lower levels The difference is calculated between the band in the middle and the highest of the adjacent bands 160 Hand held Analyzers Types 2250 and 2270 User Manual 15 3 Fig 15 2 Example display from Evaluator Type 7820 7821 showing an L4 Fmin spectrum and loudness level contours 15 4 15 4 1 Tone Assessment according to Italian Law Tone Assessment in Italy is performed on normal 1 3 octave spectra but with an option to use narrow bands such as FFT in case of doubt The method described in the Italian Decreto 16 marzo 1998 states that the 1 3 octave L7pmin spectrum is used for evaluation of tones in noise The analysis must be performed in the frequency range from 20 Hz to 20 kHz and a tone is present if the level of a band is more than 5 dB higher than the levels in the adjacent bands The adjustment K which should be added to the measured L Aeq will only be applied if the band with the tone touches or exceeds a loudness level contour touched by another frequency value of the spectrum Examples of loudness level contours from Evaluator Type 7820 7821 are shown in Fig 15 2 The size of the adjustment K is defined as 3 dB Overload LAeq LAFMax LAFMin 4B dB dB SAWMILL 06 03 2001 15 47 14 0 01 03 00 568 703 437 25 Pure Tone 06 03 2001 15 34 41
320. t icon in the annotation to view the comment a For Logging Software BZ 7224 and Enhanced Logging Software BZ 7225 annotations can be added di rectly to the measurement profile during the measurement see section 11 2 24 Hand held Analyzers Types 2250 and 2270 User Manual Fig 3 11 Example of a written 6 8 th cloud cover annotation that is gt light wind from north attached to a measurement Remark Only 80 percent of full pow A fourth method is to attach an image Type 2270 only Similar to adding notes or comments adding an image can also be done before during or after saving the measurement by a tap Main Menu icon and then a tap Add Image to Current Measurement in the list of options The Viewfinder display will then appear showing what is coming through the camera lens The camera has fixed focus and automatically adjusts the light sensitivity you just have to position the analyzer so that the object you want to capture is visible in the Viewfinder and then press the Manual Event pushbutton or tap the icon to capture the image see Fig 3 12 Fig 3 12 Viewfinder When captured the image is presented as a still picture and you can save the captured image by pressing the Save amp pushbutton or by closing the Images view or you can reject the image by pressing the Back erase pushbutton Fig 3 13 Viewfinder 3 6 CHAPTER 3 Making your First Measurement 25 11 50 01 Note When
321. t of telephone numbers contacts Map of area ANN S Ri Previous measurements if any Measurement equipment access L Comment 1 21 05 2010 10 44 K Comment 2 21 05 2010 10 45 21 05 2010 10 21 05 2010 10 45 A image1 21 05 2010 10 45 I Soundrec 1 21 05 2010 10 46 Shortcuts Broadband excl Peak Broadband Peak Measurement Control Logged Broadband Logged Broadband 100ms Output Socket Signal Full Manual Timer Night shift State Enabled Name Nigh LOGGING Start Time 29 01 0001 23 00 00 Preset Time 08 00 00 t if i 7 00 No of Starts n f F Serial No d at Top LLL Name 40 60 Description 15 09 2004 13 27 dl Preamplifier ID No Time 15 09 2004 13 27 47 Family Persitivity 50 00 m r Deviation from last Microphone Type Preamplifier t User 2250 Input Top Socket suet catratn Calibration Type Manually adjusted Calibrator Comment Calibration Calibration History gt CHAPTER 5 Getting to Know Your Analyzer 43 This configuration gives you immediate access to screens you need most i e those you will need to perform save and document your measurements The Main Menu allows you to navigate to the following screens e Explorer e Setup e Preferences e Transducers e Calibration e Add Note to Current Measurement e Add Image to Current Measurement Type 2270 only
322. ter and the accelerometer type is known to the analyzer then the parameters Nominal Sensitivity CCLD and Weight are set automatically In the top line of the status field you can select which transducer is currently connected to the analyzer This can also be done via the Setup screen by selecting Input then selecting the transducer in the Transducer Used field In the first line of the status field you can select whether the transducer is connected to the top socket or the rear socket of the analyzer This can also be done via the Setup screen by selecting Input then selecting the socket in the Input field 4 9 Fig 4 6 Calibration Reminder tab CHAPTER 4 Calibration 33 For Type 2270 only In the second line you also have a Channel Selector To change which input the transducer uses to connect to the analyzer tap the Main Menu icon and select Setup from the list next tap the Input value field and finally choose the required input from the drop down list Top socket or Rear Socket Rear Socket refers to the Input socket on the connector panel of the analyzer At the bottom of the parameter list you can select the calibration history for the currently selected transducer by tapping on the Calibration History link See section 4 7 and Fig 4 2 You can delete a transducer by tapping on the Delete Transducer icon and selecting the transducer to delete from the drop down that appears Note Only transducers that are not con
323. than 120 dB from 140 dB down to the noise floor of the microphone if the microphone has nominal sensitivity Congratulations You should now be familiar with the basic principles of the the analyzer If you need more help the following section goes into the measurement process in more detail If not please refer to Chapter 1 Making a Measurement What is a Project Template A Project Template contains all the common display settings and measurement setups required to perform a noise measurement The template does not contain any measurement data this data is saved as individual projects stored in job folders see section 6 1 1 The Project Templates covered by this manual are e Sound Level Meter Project Template included in BZ 7222 software e Frequency Analysis Project Template included in BZ 7223 software e Logging Project Template included in BZ 7224 software e Enhanced Logging Project Template included in BZ 7225 software e Reverberation Time Project Template included in BZ 7227 software Note 1 Sound Recording Option BZ 7226 does not contain a specific template the sound recording options are available in all templates Note 2 Tone Assessment Option BZ 7231 does not contain a specific template the tone assessment options are available in all templates included in BZ 7223 24 25 30 If you make any changes to the settings in a Project Template an x will appear next to the template name to indi
324. the menu Hint a quick way of auto zooming is to tap anywhere in the spectrum and then press the Accept v pushbutton twice Some parameters are calculated based on the spectra e SIL PSIL SIL3 and LXeq f 1 f2 are calculated during the measurement and saved together with the other measurement data e The Noise Parameters NC NR RC NCB Loudness and Loudness Level are for display only and calculated based on measured Lxq spectra This means that whenever you have a LxXeq Spectrum you can also calculate and display these parameters NC NR RC and NCB are defined for 1 1 octave LZeq spectra however NC NR RC and NCB are calculated for any frequency weighting and any octave bandwidth A B and C weighted spectra are converted to Z weighted spectra and 1 3 octave spectra are converted to 1 1 octave spectra before the calculation e Loudness and Loudness Level are calculated for 1 3 octave spectra with any frequency weighting A B and C weighted spectra are converted to Z weighted spectra before the calculation If 1 l octave Lzeq spectra have been measured then you can display a Noise Curve together with the Lzeq spectrum see example in Fig 10 5 Fig 10 5 Displaying a Noise Curve together with the Lzeq spectrum 16 Hz 59 5 dB For RC and NCB you also have the possibility of displaying the limit curves for Rumble and Hiss and for Rattle and Vibration together with the 1 l octave Lzeq spectrum 106 10 3 1 Smile
325. the Accept v pushbutton 104 Hand held Analyzers Types 2250 and 2270 User Manual Fig 10 3 Scaling the Y axis on the Spectrum display FREQUENCY ANALYZER LZFmax 7 630 Hz LZeq ah 630 Hz f m 20k AC 1 3 octave 2006 15 47 54 3 Select Auto Zoom to adjust the range of the Y axis for best fit of the measured spectrum 4 Select Zoom In Zoom Out to adjust the zoom 5 Select Scale Up Scale Down to adjust the full scale value on the Y axis or select Auto Scale to select the best scaling for viewing the spectra without adjusting the zoom 6 Spectrum Table displays the spectrum in tabular form as in Fig 10 4 Press the Table Format icon E at the top of the screen to select between three different viewing formats Fig 10 4 Spectrum table Two Parameters for displaying values from both spectra One Parameter for displaying values from the main spectrum only available for Reverberation Time Software only One Parameter wrap for displaying values from the main spectrum only but with the columns wrapped on the display to allow as many values as possible on the screen Spectrum Table CHAPTER 10 1 1 or 1 3 octave Frequency Analysis Optional Module 105 7 To exit the Spectrum Table tap the J icon 8 Auto Zoom and Auto Scale automatically close the drop down menu otherwise select Close tap outside the drop down list or use the left arrow pushbutton to close
326. the Frequency analyzer and you want a template of this type again then you either have to open a project made with this template and save the template or you have to use the BZ 5503 Utility Software for Hand held analyzers to transfer a template of this type to the analyzer Locking the Pushbuttons and Display The pushbuttons and display can be locked to prevent inadvertent operation To Lock Select the Lock Keys and Screen option from the Main Menu Ea To Unlock Press the left arrow pushbutton followed by the right arrow pushbutton gt then the Accept pushbutton y If you attempt to press a pushbutton or tap the screen while the instrument is locked an infor mation window pops up with instructions on how to unlock it Chapter 6 6 1 6 1 1 Data Management Organising Measurements Description of Jobs and Projects When saving a set of measurement results they are organised together with setup informa tion calibration information annotations and sound recordings in a project A project contains the following e Measurement results Broadband values for example L Aeq Larmax Larmin gt amp tc Frequency spectra if Frequency Analysis Software BZ 7223 is enabled on your analyzer and you have selected a Frequency Analyzer template e Measurement Setup e Display Setup parameters you have selected e Information on the microphone e Calibration e Annotations Commentary attached to measur
327. the template a 5 4 9 Hand held Analyzers Types 2250 and 2270 User Manual The rest of the screen is used for listing the defined templates with an icon a template name and possibly an annotation icon paper clip 1 Tap the template icon to open and use the template 2 Tap the template name to get a drop down list with the options e Open open and use the selected template e Clone create a copy of the selected template e Delete delete the selected template e Rename rename the selected template e Add Note or commentary to the template e View Annotations on the template 3 Tap the annotation icon to get the list of annotations attached to the project The Full tab at the bottom of the screen allows you to view the complete list of Project Templates while the Quick tab allows you to access the more frequently used Project Templates Press the Edit icon on top of the screen to enter Edit mode This mode allows you to copy Project Templates from the Full View to the Quick View simply by tapping on the Project Template in the Full View and to remove Project Templates from the Quick View by tapping on the Project Template in the Quick View When you have finished tap the Edit icon again to exit Edit mode Note 1 Annotations on templates are for describing the template and will not be copied to the project when starting or saving a measurement Note 2 If you delete all templates of a certain type for example
328. tion section 8 2 1 Note The SIM card account should include a Data subscription and should be usable without a pin code To use the modem you need to set up the parameters in Dialup Networking listed below and set the Modem parameter to GPRS EDGE HSFA Dialup Parameters in Dialup Networking e APN Access Point Name is an identifier required by the Network Operator Examples are Internet public and www vodaphone de e Username Password and possibly Domain should be set as required by the Network Operator 76 8 2 3 Hand held Analyzers Types 2250 and 2270 User Manual When the Modem perameter is set to GPRS EDGE HSPA Dialup then a connection is made using the settings in Dialup Networking The Status parameter reflects the current status of the network connection eg Connected or Disconnected If the connection fails then the analyzer will try to reconnect until it succeeds or the Modem parameter is set to Disabled If the connection succeeds then the instrument will automatically get an IP address which is readable but not accessible in Network Settings for more details see Section section 8 3 The IP address is the address on the WAN Wide Area Network or Internet Use this address in BZ 5503 or an Internet Browser to connect to the analyzer Note In some cases you might be able to get a static IP address from the Network Opera tor which means that the analyzer will always get the same
329. tions are fulfilled when level crosses Stop Level in accordance with Start Slope for at least Stop Duration seconds set Stop Level here APPENDIX A Setup Parameters 203 Table A 16 Cont Trigger parameters Parameter Values Comment Stop Duration 0 to 15s Stop trigger conditions are fulfilled when level crosses Stop Level in accordance with Start Slope for at least Stop Duration seconds set Stop Duration here Trigger Parameter Lxeg Select which parameter to monitor for the LYeg level trigger The parameter is based on 1 LVpeak second measurements and checked every LxFmax second regardless of the logging period and Lysmax logged parameters Lxmax L Fmax X frequency weightings A or B controlled Ly ysmax by Setup Frequency Weightings Lyimax Broadband excl Peak parameter LXE min Lysmin Y frequency weightings C or Z controlled LYImin by Setup Frequency Weightings L Fmin Broadband excl Peak parameter Lysmin Lyimin V frequency weightings A B C or Z LXF SPL controlled by Setup Frequency Weightings LxS SPL Broadband Peak parameter LxSPL LYF SPL U time weightings F or S controlled by Lys SPL Setup Occupational Health Time LyysPL Weighting for Lav parameter LavuQ LWeq f1 f2 Q exchange rate 4 5 or 6 dB controlled by Setup Occupational Health Exchange Rate for Lav parameter W frequency weightings A B C or
330. to start when level goes below Start Level and stop when level goes above Stop Level Start Level 100 to 200 dB Start trigger conditions are fulfilled when level crosses Start Level in accordance with Start Slope for at least Start Duration seconds set Start Level here Start Duration 0 to 15s Start trigger conditions are fulfilled when level crosses Start Level in accordance with Start Slope for at least Start Duration seconds set Start Duration here Stop Level 100 to 200 dB Stop trigger conditions are fulfilled when level crosses Stop Level in accordance with Start Slope for at least Stop Duration seconds set Stop Level here Stop Duration 0 to 15s Stop trigger conditions are fulfilled when level crosses Stop Level in accordance with Start Slope for at least Stop Duration seconds set Stop Duration here Table A 15 Cont Level Trigger parameters APPENDIX A Setup Parameters 201 Parameter Values Comment Trigger Parameter Lxeg Select which parameter to monitor for the LYeg level trigger The parameter is based on 1 LVpeak second measurements and checked every LxFmax second regardless of the logging period and LxSmax logged parameters Lxmax L Fmax X frequency weightings A or B controlled Ly ysmax by Setup Frequency Weightings Lyimax Broadband excl Peak parameter LXE min Lysmin Y frequency weightings C or Z controlled
331. to the right of the readout warning about the quality of the readout Tap the smiley to get more detailed information about the warning 146 Hand held Analyzers Types 2250 and 2270 User Manual 14 3 2 Spectrum The Spectrum tab shows the reverberation time spectrum from a position or the Room average reverberation time or both The sound level is displayed during measurements Fig 14 6 Spectrum tab 50 500 Hz 0 78 s 1 5 i 0 5 al 0 100 T20 400 Hz 1 25 kHz T20 Pos 400 Hz 1 25 kHz 0 0 250 2 3 15k 500 1k Status Field The Status field on the Spectrum tab is the same as on the Overview tab Spectrum Graph The Spectrum Graph is the same as in the Frequency Analysis software Two 1 1 octave or 1 3 octave spectra superimposed with cursor readouts The displayed frequency range is automatically adjusted for the measured frequency range Small Smiley s are set below each frequency band with a potential problem The Smiley s are also available at the cursor readouts Tap the Smiley at the cursor readout to get detailed information about the warning The Spectrum Parameter Selectors above the graph selects which spectra to display You can choose to display T20 Pos T30 Pos EDT Pos T20 T30 or EDT If you only want one graph you can set the other to Off In addition to choosing which parameter to display you can choose to Display Sound Level this will display the Z weighted spectrum LZF t
332. upational Health Parameters E ep d Lep d v E e Dose e ProjDose e VPeaks gt xxx dB e VPeaks gt 137 dB e VPeaks gt 135 dB US Occupational Health Parameters Lavra e TWA e TWA e DoseRQ e ProjDoseRQ General Parameters e Overload in e Start time e Stop Time e Elapsed Time excl pauses Special Parameters Lxteq also called Lym Lyiq q Lateg LAeg 2 LAFTeq also called LAFTm5 LAFTeqLAceq e SIL average of Lzeq octave band levels 500 Hz 1000 Hz 2000 Hz and 4000 Hz e PSIL average of Lzeq octave band levels 500 Hz 1000 Hz and 2000 Hz 219 220 B 3 B 3 1 Hand held Analyzers Types 2250 and 2270 User Manual e SIL3 average of LZeq octave band levels 1000 Hz 2000 Hz and 4000 Hz Liyeq fl f2 average of power values for Lweg frequency bands from f1 Hz to f2 Hz Statistics to Calculate Percentile Levels and Std Dev Spectrum Parameters i Lweq y Lwemax y Lwsmax Lwrmin Lwsmin The Statistics can be logged in Periodic Reports to Calculate Percentile Levels as spectra Logged Measurement For Logging Software BZ 7224 and Enhanced Logging Software BZ 7225 Parameters measured within a logging interval up to ten or all of the following parame ters can be logged Equivalent Continuous Sound Levels Lxeg Lyeq LceqLAeq Sound Exposure Level Peak Sound Level Lypeak Maximum Time weighted Sound Levels Lyx
333. urces First Receivers First Manual Parameter only available if Map Based Measurement Yes Allows you to select the quickest method of measurement when positioning your analyzer in relation to source and receiver positions Typically Sources First is best for Impulsive Excitation and Receivers First is best for Interrupted Noise excitation Automatic Save No Yes Set to Yes to automatically save the decay after each measurement 196 Hand held Analyzers Types 2250 and 2270 User Manual Table A 10 Cont Measurement Control parameters for Reverberation Time Software BZ 7227 Parameter Values Comment Max Decay Time 1 to 30s Sets the maximum duration of the decay measurement If the decay finishes in a shorter time decay measurement stops automatically Note If you set Max Decay Time above 20 s then the measurement will not stop before this time has elapsed Excitation Impulsive Interrupted Noise Select mpulsive to excite the room with an impulse The analyzer triggers on the impulse measures the impulse as a sequence of spectra with 5 ms intervals and finally backwardly integrates the measurements to decay curves Select nterrupted Noise to excite the room with noise interrupt the noise and measure the decays all controlled by the analyzer Number of Decays 1 to 99 Parameter only available if Excitation Interrupted Noise Specify the number of
334. ure level while measuring e Decay Shows the reverberation decay at a single frequency for one position or for the room average 14 3 1 Overview The Overview tab shows the measurement positions in a table one position per row Fig 14 5 REVERBERATIO Overview tab D lt 500Hz gt Spectrum Decay Status Field The Status Field consists of three lines see Fig 14 5 the first two lines of information are common to the status lines in the Sound Level Meter and Frequency Analyzer see Chapter 5 page 32 Note The first line of the status field might also contain a smiley indicating the quality of the Room the spatial average of all positions see the description of smiley s in the following paragraph and at the end of this chapter CHAPTER 14 Reverberation Time Software Optional Module 145 The third line of information allows you to Select the measured position The selected position is the one highlighted in the table The selected position will be the one displayed when selecting the Spectrum or Decay view Step forwards or backwards through the positions on all displays using the lt and gt icons Get information on the quality of the measurement through a Quality Indicator Smiley displayed as an icon E means results should be used with caution E means results may be suspect or missing No icon means Type 2250 2270 found no measurement quality issues Tap the Smiley to get more det
335. ut is taken from the top socket or the rear socket Input on connector panel Connect your transducer to this socket Note Sound Field and Windscreen corrections can be added to both the Top Socket and the Rear Socket Input parameters However be careful that you don t add a double correction for instance if you have recorded the signal from the Output socket on a tape recorder and later want to re analyse the recording via the Rear Input In this case you should set Microphone Type to Unknown on the Transducer menu for the used transducer when using Rear Input APPENDIX A Setup Parameters 191 Table A 5 Input Ch 2 parameters Type 2270 Parameter Values Comment Sound Field Correction Free field Select a correction matching the sound field of Diffuse field your measurements i e you can make correct measurements in a diffuse field using a Type 4189 or 4190 free field microphone by selecting Diffuse field correction Even free field correction of a free field microphone will enhance the overall frequency response of the system Generally ISO requires free field conditions and ANSI requires diffuse field conditions Check your local standards for the setting you require No correction is made for unknown transducers Automatic detection of UA 1650 windscreen when mounted on the ZC 0032 microphone preamplifier The preamplifier should be connected to the top socket if necessary using a microph
336. ve judgement of intensity of a sound by humans Loudness depends upon the sound pressure and frequency of the stimulus and whether the sound field is diffuse or free field The unit is the Sone Loudness Level 10 log2 Loudness 40 The unit is the Phone The Zwicker method of calculation of stationary loudness based on 1 3 octave measurements is described in ISO 532 1975 Method B The number of 1s peak sound levels over 140 dB C denotes that the C frequency weighting is used Three peak counters are available one with a user definable value set to 140 dB by default one with 137 dB and one with 135 dB value Used for assessing possible damage to human hearing caused by very high short duration noise levels The European Noise at Work Directive 2003 10 EC defines the following limit and action values Limit Value 140 dB corresponding to 200 Pa Upper Action Value 137 dB corresponding to 140 Pa Lower Action Value 135 dB corresponding to 112 Pa Noise Criteria is used to rate steady state continuous noise in a room from all types of equipment including fans mixing boxes diffusers etc The rating is determined from 1 1 octave Lzeq spectra compared with NC curves based on equal loudness curves The NC rating is the value of the highest NC curve touched by the measured spectrum The Decisive Band is the frequency band touching the NC curve Defined by ASHRAE American Society of Heating Refrigerating and
337. vel differences can be defined in Low Middle and High frequency range Proposed level difference limits 8 for adjacent bands dB Middle 6 0 25 Hz 125 160 400 500 10 kHz 1 3 octave bands Hz 080160 The proposed frequency ranges and level differences between adjacent bands are e Low frequency range includes the 1 3 octave bands from 25 Hz to 125 Hz with a level difference for a detected tone greater than 15 dB e Middle frequency range includes the 1 3 octave bands from 160 Hz to 400 Hz with a level difference for a detected tone greater than 8 dB e High frequency range includes the 1 3 octave bands from 500 Hz to 10 kHz with a level difference for a detected tone greater than 5 dB With BZ 7231 software frequency ranges and the limit for the level differences in low middle and high range can be set by the user Tone assessment is carried out for all the measured frequency bands including those below 25 Hz and above 10 kHz The level difference limit is extrapolated from the low and high range to cover the complete measurement range If tones are detected outside the range from 25 Hz to 10 kHz the quality indicator yellow smiley indicates Tone out of ISO range detected ISO 1996 2 Annex D does not specify the size of the adjustment In the default setting of the BZ 7231 Briiel amp Kj r has chosen to set the value to 5 dB Calculating the Level Difference Between one Band and the Adjacen
338. verts to a stopped state after a reset i e stopped icon W displayed with a zeroed readout If the measurement is running then the measurement will be automatically re started after the reset 48 Hand held Analyzers Types 2250 and 2270 User Manual Table 5 1 Start Pause Pushbutton Use the Start Pause pushbutton for controlling the measurement The function of this key depends on the current measurement state see Table 5 1 Start Pause Current Function of Next Measurement Measurement pushbutton functions State Start Pause Pushbutton State E Stopped Start the measurement gt Running gt Running Pause the measurement Pause Pause Continue the measurement gt Running 5 4 4 5 4 5 Save Pushbutton Use the Save pushbutton amp to save the measurement data together with the current project template including all the screen settings and setup information and the calibration documentation Pressing Save will affect the pause and running states In both cases the measurement state will be stopped shortly after pressing the pushbutton stopped icon W displayed Back erase Pushbutton For BZ 7222 and BZ 7223 Software Use the Back erase pushbutton to erase the last 5 seconds completely from the measurement This includes of course overload indications you would like to erase If used when the current measurement is running then the measurement will be paused The
339. w the decay for the Room Average together with the readout of T20 T30 and EDT resp If you only want one graph you can set the other selector to Off Fig 14 9 Decay view CHAPTER 14 Reverberation Time Software Optional Module 149 T30 160Hz gt 0 73s_ T30 Pos 160Hz gt 0 79s 15 C 12 0 T20 400 Hz 1 25 kHz T20 Pos 400 Hz 1 25 kHz Overview 23 53 18 The Main Decay on the display displayed as a continuous line is selected using the parameter selector in the second line of the two shown above the display T30 Pos in Fig 14 9 The parameter selector for the main decay is linked to the selector on the Overview tab and the parameter selector for the main spectrum on the Spectrum tab The Reference Decay on the display displayed as a dashed line is selected using the parameter selector in the first line of the two shown above the display T20 Pos in Fig 14 9 The parameter selector for the reference decay is linked to the parameter selector for the reference spectrum on the Spectrum tab The Frequency selector with decrement and increment Pg buttons as well determines the frequency of the decay curves The frequency selector is linked to the spectrum cursor and the frequency selector on the Overview tab In the upper right corner of the view area the value of a single quality indicator is displayed C xx The Curvature indicator if above 10 then the quality indicator meaning De
340. want to control sound recording by a voltage level generated by external equipment The Voltage Level should generate at least 2 V for On and less than 1 V for Off The duration of the steady level should be at least 1 s so it can be recognised by the analyzer Set Trigger Input to Voltage for Monitoring if you want to monitor the voltage at this input This setting can be used together with Notifications see Section 8 4 This setting cannot be combined with MATRON Handswitch or Voltage Level a Not available in Reverberation Time Software BZ 7227 b Requires Frequency Analysis Software BZ 7223 A 3 Input Ch 1 for Type 2270 Table A 4 Input Ch 1 parameters Type 2270 Parameter Values Comment Input Top Socket Determines whether the input is taken from the Rear Socket top socket or the rear socket Input on connector panel Connect your transducer to this socket Note Sound Field and Windscreen corrections can be added to both the Top Socket and the Rear Socket Input parameters However be careful that you don t add a double correction for instance if you have recorded the signal from the Output socket on a tape recorder and later want to re analyse the recording via the Rear Input In this case you should set Microphone Type to Unknown on the Transducer menu for the used transducer when using Rear Input 190 Hand held Analyzers Types 2250 and 2270 User Manual Table A 4
341. work Modem GPRS EDGE HSPA E mail Browser GPRS EDGE HSPA Dialup see Section 8 4 Mobile Phone with modem Settings in Dialup Networking Internet Browser Network Settings Possibly settings in DynDNS see Sections 8 2 and 8 3 BZ 5503 or Internet Network Modem Disabled E mail see Section 8 4 Mobile Phone with Internet Browser Network Settings see Sections 8 2 and 8 3 BZ 5503 or Internet Network Modem Disabled E mail Browser CF WLAN Possibly settings in DynDNS see Section 8 4 Mobile Phone with Network Settings Internet Browser Settings in Wireless Network see Sections 8 2 and 8 3 BZ 5503 or Internet Network Modem Disabled E mail Browser DSL Modem Router Possibly settings in DynDNS see Section 8 4 a SMS is also possible for the setting Modem Disabled Note The on line help for BZ 5503 contains additional information on how to connect an instrument using the different connection types 7 2 7 3 CHAPTER 7 Connection to PC or Mobile Phone 63 Transferring Measurement Data to Your PC Utility Software for Hand held Analyzers BZ 5503 is used for communication between your PC and the analyzer Connect the analyzer to your PC using the supplied USB Cable AO 1476 using a modem connection or through a LAN connection see Chapter 8 Use this software to e Transfer measurement data and templates from the analyzer to your PC and vice versa e View data e Organise data on the an
342. y v Ep Page v G Tools v Briel amp Kj r lt We help our customers improve the quality of sound and vibration and related human comfort Downloads Service Help Downloading picture http b Internet Protected Mode Off 100 v Chapter 8 Advanced Use of the Analyzer Tips and Tricks 8 1 Setting your Preferences on the Analyzer You can specify a number of parameters controlling display settings power settings regional settings storage settings and users These parameters are grouped together under Preferences You access preferences by tapping on the Main Menu icon and selecting Preferences from the list of options The screen shown in Fig 8 1 will appear Fig 8 1 The Preferences screen PREFERENCES Display Settings Power Settings Regional Settings Storage Settings Headphone Settings Users Printer Settings Modem DynDNS Settings Network Settings Notification Settings Web Server Settings x 8 1 1 Display Settings 09 29 16 Tap Display Settings or next to Display Settings to expand the list of available display settings Fig 8 2 These parameters allow you to select a suitable display colour scheme This may vary depending on the lighting conditions at the time of the measurement 68 Fig 8 2 Display 8 1 2 Hand held Analyzers Types 2250 and 2270 User Manual PREFERENCES Settings screen Display S
343. y Overload Setup Bandwidth Bottom F for Special Trig Input Voltage Leq f2 Top frequency band controlled by Setup Bandwidth Top Freq for Special Leq a For Logging BZ 7224 and Enhanced Logging BZ 7225 templates only A 12 Logged Spectrum Table A 13 Logged Spectrum parameters Parameter Values Comment Full Spectral Statistics Yes No Determines whether the full spectral statistics are logged or not Table A 13 Logged Spectrum parameters APPENDIX A Setup Parameters 199 Parameter Values Comment Spectrum Parameters All Determines whether all spectrum parameters Selected are logged a selected part of the parameters None are logged up to 3 parameters or none are logged Spectrum 1 to Lxeg These parameters can be set if Spectrum Spectrum 3 LxFmax Parameters Selected LxSmax LXFmin X frequency weightings A B C or Z Lysmin controlled by Setup Frequency Weightings Off Spectrum parameter a For Logging BZ 7224 and Enhanced Logging BZ 7225 templates only requires Frequency Analysis Software BZ 7223 A 13 Markers Table A 14 Markers Parameter Values Comment Marker 1 Text string Default set to Exclude This marker can be set using the stylus in the profile or the Back erase pushbutton during a measurement Marker 2 Text string Default set to Manual This marker can be set
344. y will be equivalent to the average of a large number of decays made with the interrupted noise method Therefore the decays will be smooth using just one single shot 14 2 Setting up the Instrument 1 Select the REVERBERATION TIME Project Template see section 3 3 1 for more details on templates The Project Template is displayed at the top of the screen if it does not display REVERBERATION TIME tap the black bar at the top of the screen and select REVERBERATION TIME from the drop down menu that appears 2 Tap the Main Menu icon and select Setup from the list of options Set the Bandwidth and Bottom and Top Frequency of the measurement as required 3 Set Map Based Measurement No in the Measurement Control setup the reverberation decays will then be numbered from Pos 1 to N see how to measure with position management in next section 4 Set Automatic Save No if you want to inspect the reverberation time and decays before manually saving the measurement otherwise select Yes to automatically save the decays after each measurement 5 The analyzer automatically detects the decay time and stops the measurement at the end of the decay however under special conditions for example when measuring with high background noise the decay time cannot be detected and the measurement will run up to 20 s To minimise the measurement time and memory requirement for the measurement you can limit the measurement by setting the Max
345. ys Hand held Analyzers Types 2250 and 2270 User Manual A smiley will be shown to the right of the project name if there are any issues with calculating noise parameters or displaying noise curves see the overview in Table 10 1 Table 10 1 Overview of Smileys Smiley Explanation Description No Loudness for 1 1 octaves Select 1 3 octave No Leg parameter logged Select a Leg spectrum for logging Sound Field Mismatch for Loudness Set the Loudness parameter in Input in accordance with the Sound Field Correction Frequency bands outside Noise Curves Levels are lower or higher than any noise curve band Noise Curves require use of Mic Select a microphone Display Noise Curve with Lzeq Noise parameters are calculated but Noise Curves can only be displayed together with Lzeq Noise Curve for 1 1 octaves only Noise parameters are calculated but Noise Curves can only be displayed for 1 1 octaves 10 4 Saving Results Measurements are saved and can be viewed later in the same way as described for the Sound Level Meter Project in Chapter 3 Chapter 11 Logging Optional Module Logging Software BZ 7224 enables you to measure and save data periodically on SD or CF Cards The module is optimised for attended use which means that while measuring you can annotate any sound on line as well as mark up to five different sound categories on line The main
346. zer is selected as the Transducer Used parameter this is also found in the Setup menu e Check whether the parameters for the selected transducer Transducer Used are set correctly especially the Microphone Type and Polarization Voltage parameters These are found by tapping the Main Menu icon HB then Transducers e Check that the Sound Field and Windscreen Correction parameters have been set correctly These are found by tapping the Main Menu icon B then Setup followed by Input e Check if the calibration is OK make a new calibration using an external calibrator CHAPTER 9 Updating and Upgrading Applications Maintenance Calibration and Troubleshooting 93 9 4 2 SD and CF Cards The Logging Enhanced Logging and Sound Recording software requires that measurements are saved on SD or CF memory cards If you experience problems in storing or recalling data on memory cards you can check and repair the integrity of the file system on the memory card or even re format it by doing the following 1 Insert the memory card in the correct slot of the connector panel of the analyzer see Fig 2 2 2 You will be notified that a memory card has been inserted select Yes to change the default measurement path to the memory card 3 Tap the Main Menu icon and then Explorer 4 Tap the E icon to go up folder levels until you have reached the topmost level with a list of the available memory devices 5 Tap the name of the memory card not

Type 2250 Product Sheet

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents